RF 5720

PUBLICATION NUMBER: 10284-0004
MAY 1999
Rev. D
RF-5720
MULTI-WAVEFORM
HF MODEM
INSTALLATION AND OPERATION MANUAL
LIMITED ONE YEAR WARRANTY
HARRIS CORPORATION (RF COMMUNICATIONS DIVISION)
FROM HARRIS TO YOU – This warranty is extended to the original buyer and applies to all Harris Corporation, RF
Communications Division equipment purchased and employed for the service normally intended, except those products
specifically excluded.
WHAT WE WILL DO – If your Harris Corporation, RF Communications Division equipment purchased from us for use outside the
United States fails in normal use because of a defect in workmanship or materials within one year from the date of shipment, we
will repair or replace (at our option) the equipment or part without charge to you, at our factory. If the product was purchased for
use in the United States, we will repair or replace (at our option) the equipment or part without charge to you at our Authorized Repair
Center or factory.
WHAT YOU MUST DO – You must notify us promptly of a defect within one year from date of shipment. Assuming that Harris
concurs that the complaint is valid, and is unable to correct the problem without having the equipment shipped to Harris:
• Customers with equipment purchased for use outside the United States will be supplied with information for the return
of the defective equipment or part to our factory in Rochester, NY, U.S.A., for repair or replacement. You must prepay
all transportation, insurance, duty and customs charges. We will pay for return to you of the repaired/replaced equipment
or part, C.I.F. destination; you must pay any duty, taxes or customs charges.
• Customers with equipment purchased for use in the United States must obtain a Return Authorization Number, properly
pack, insure, prepay the shipping charges and ship the defective equipment or part to our factory or to the Authorized
Warranty Repair Center indicated by us.
Harris Corporation Telephone: (716) 244-5830

RF Communications Division Fax: 716-242-4755
Customer Service http://www.harris.com/communications
1680 University Avenue
Rochester, NY 14610, U.S.A.
Harris will repair or replace the defective equipment or part and pay for its return to you, provided the repair or replacement is due
to a cause covered by this warranty.
WHAT IS NOT COVERED – We regret that we cannot be responsible for:
• Defects or failures caused by buyer or user abuse or misuse.
• Defects or failures caused by unauthorized attempts to repair or alter the equipment in any way.
• Consequential damages incurred by a buyer or user from any cause whatsoever, including, but not limited to
transportation, non-Harris repair or service costs, downtime costs, costs for substituting equipment or loss of anticipated
profits or revenue.
• The performance of the equipment when used in combination with equipment not purchased from Harris.
• HARRIS MAKES NO OTHER WARRANTIES BEYOND THE EXPRESS WARRANTY AS CONTAINED HEREIN. ALL
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR MERCHANTABILITY ARE
EXCLUDED.
SERVICE WARRANTY – Any repair service performed by Harris under this limited warranty is warranted to be free from defects
in material or workmanship for sixty days from date of repair. All terms and exclusions of this limited warranty apply to the service
warranty.
IMPORTANT – Customers who purchased equipment for use in the United States must obtain a Return Authorization Number
before shipping the defective equipment to us. Failure to obtain a Return Authorization Number before shipment may result in a
delay in the repair/replacement and return of your equipment.
IF YOU HAVE ANY QUESTIONS – Concerning this warranty or equipment sales or services, please contact our Customer Service
Department.
PUBLICATION NUMBER: 10284-0004
JUNE 1999
Rev. D
RF-5720
MULTI-WAVEFORM
HF MODEM
Information and descriptions contained herein are the property of Harris Corporation. Such information
and descriptions may not be copied or reproduced by any means, or disseminated or distributed without
the express prior written permission of Harris Corporation, RF Communications Division, 1680 University
Avenue, Rochester, New York 14610-1887.
Copyright © 1999
By Harris Corporation
All Rights Reserved
HARRIS CORPORATION RF COMMUNICATIONS DIVISION

1680 University Avenue Rochester, New York 14610-1887 USA
Tel: 716-244-5830. Fax: 716-242-4755. http://www.harris.com/communications
RF-5720
When an Adult Stops Breathing

WARNING
DO NOT attempt to perform the rescue breathing techniques provided
on this page, unless certified. Performance of these techniques by
uncertified personnel could result in further injury or death to the victim.
1 Does the Person

Respond?
G Tap or gently shake
2 Shout, “Help!”
G Call people who can
victim. phone for help.
G Shout, “Are you OK?”
3 Roll Person
Onto Back
G Roll victim toward you
by pulling slowly.
4 Open Airway
G Tilt head back and lift
5 Check for
Breathing
G Look, listen, and feel
chin. for breathing for
3 to 5 seconds.
6
G
Give 2 Full
Breaths
Keep head tilted back.
G Pinch nose shut.
G Seal your lips tight
around victim’s mouth.
G Give 2 full breaths for
1 to 1-1/2 seconds each.
7 Check for Pulse

at Side of Neck
G Feel for pulse for
8 Phone
for Help
G Send someone to call
5 to 10 seconds. an ambulance.
9
G
Begin Rescue
Breathing
Keep head tilted back.
10 Recheck Pulse
Every Minute
G Keep head tilted back.
G Lift chin. G Feel for pulse for
G Pinch nose shut. 5 to 10 seconds.
G Give 1 full breath G If victim has pulse but is
every 5 seconds. not breathing, continue
G Look, listen, and feel for rescue breathing. If no
breathing between breaths. pulse, begin CPR.
For more information about these and other life–saving techniques, contact your Red Cross chapter for training.
“When Breathing Stops” reproduced with permission from an American Red Cross Poster.
ii
RF-5720
TABLE OF CONTENTS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Paragraph Page
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xvii
About This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xix
SECTION 1 – INTRODUCTION
1.1 PURPOSE OF MANUAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
1.2 GENERAL DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
1.2.1 Single-Tone Waveform . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
1.2.2 39-Tone Waveform . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
1.2.3 FSK Waveform . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
1.3 SYSTEM CONFIGURATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
1.4 DATA TERMINAL EQUIPMENT (DTE) INTERFACE CRITERIA . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
1.4.1 Single-Tone and 39-Tone Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
1.4.2 Single-Tone and 39-Tone Synchronous Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
1.4.3 Single-Tone and 39-Tone Asynchronous Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
1.4.4 FSK General Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
1.4.5 FSK Synchronous Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
1.4.6 FSK Asynchronous Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
1.5 REMOTE CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
1.6 RF-5720 FUTURE OPTION ASSEMBLIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
1.7 GLOSSARY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
SECTION 2 – INSTALLATION
2.1 GENERAL INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
2.2 UNPACKING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
2.3 ADDITIONAL EQUIPMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
2.4 POWER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
2.5 CONNECTING THE POWER CABLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
2.6 TESTING THE MODEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
2.7 CONNECTING THE MODEM TO THE RADIO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
2.8 CONNECTING THE MODEM TO THE DATA TERMINAL EQUIPMENT . . . . 2-4
2.9 SETTING THE MODEM INTERFACE CRITERIA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
2.9.1 Programming the Modem Waveform Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
2.9.2 Asynchronous DTE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
2.9.3 Synchronous DTE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
2.10 ESTABLISHING VOICE CONTACT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
2.11 SENDING DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
SECTION 3 – OPERATION
3.1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
3.2 CONTROLS, CONNECTORS, AND DISPLAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
3.2.1 Performing Self-Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
3.2.2 Resetting the Modem to its Default Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
3.3 MODES OF OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
3.4 OPERATION USING THE MODE/SETUP COMMANDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
3.4.1 Selecting and Modifying Operating Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
3.4.2 MODE/SETUP Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
3.5 OPERATION USING THE PROGRAM COMMAND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
iii
RF-5720
TABLE OF CONTENTS
TABLE OF CONTENTS (Cont.)

Paragraph Page
SECTION 3 – OPERATION (Cont.)

3.5.1 Program Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
3.5.2 Access Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
3.5.2.1 11 PRGM – Modem Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
3.5.2.2 12 PRGM – Modem Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
3.5.2.3 13 PRGM – Modem Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
3.5.2.4 14 PRGM – Rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
3.5.2.5 15 PRGM – Interleave . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
3.5.2.6 16 PRGM – Mark Frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17
3.5.2.7 17 PRGM – Space Frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18
3.5.2.8 18 PRGM – Clipping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18
3.5.2.9 19 PRGM – Diversity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19
3.5.2.10 20 PRGM – Doppler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19
3.5.2.11 21 PRGM – Coding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20
3.5.2.12 22 PRGM – EOM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20
3.5.2.13 24 PRGM – Acquisition on Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21
3.5.2.14 25 PRGM – TX Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21
3.5.3 30 PRGM – Data Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22
3.5.3.1 31 PRGM – Async Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22
3.5.3.2 32 PRGM – Async Rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23
3.5.3.3 33 PRGM – Async Bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24
3.5.3.4 34 PRGM – Async Stop Bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24
3.5.3.5 35 PRGM – Async Parity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25
3.5.3.6 36 PRGM – Async Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25
3.5.3.7 37 PRGM – Async Echo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26
3.5.3.8 39 PRGM – Sync Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26
3.5.3.9 40 PRGM – TXCLK Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27
3.5.4 50 PRGM – Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27
3.5.5 99 PRGM – Zeroize . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28
3.5.6 PRGM Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29
3.5.6.1 Level-by-Level Keystrokes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30
3.5.6.2 One-Step Access Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-35
3.6 TRANSMITTING THE SIGNAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36
3.7 FSK RECEIVE TUNING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36
SECTION 4 – REMOTE CONTROL
4.1 GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
4.2 DATA TERMINAL EQUIPMENT INTERFACE CRITERIA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
4.3 REMOTE CONTROL CABLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
4.4 SHOW (SH) AND HELP (HE OR ?) MENUS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
SECTION 5 – THEORY OF OPERATION
5.1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
5.2 SINGLE-TONE THEORY OF OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
5.2.1 Synchronization Preamble Phase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
5.2.2 Data Phase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
iv
RF-5720
TABLE OF CONTENTS

Paragraph Page
SECTION 5 – THEORY OF OPERATION (Cont.)

5.2.2.1 Forward Error Correction in Single-Tone Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
5.2.2.2 Interleaving in Single-Tone Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
5.2.2.3 Gray Decoding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
5.2.2.4 Symbol Formation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
5.2.2.5 Scrambling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
5.2.3 End of Message (EOM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
5.2.4 Interleaver Flush . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
5.2.5 Demodulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
5.2.6 Automatic Bit Rate Detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
5.2.7 Automatic Interleaving Detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
5.2.8 Signal-to-Noise Ratio Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
5.2.9 Acquisition on Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
5.2.10 Stanag 4285 Single Tone Waveform (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
5.3 39-TONE THEORY OF OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
5.3.1 39-Tone Modulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15
5.3.2 Demodulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15
5.3.3 Frequency and Frame Synchronization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18
5.3.4 Forward Error Correction (FEC) Code in 39-Tone Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21
5.3.5 Interleaving in 39-Tone Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21
5.3.6 Diversity in 39-Tone Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22
5.3.7 Signal Clipping in 39-Tone Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23
5.3.8 Keyline Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23
5.4 BINARY FSK THEORY OF OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23
5.4.1 FSK Modulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23
5.4.2 FSK Demodulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24
5.5 MAJOR ASSEMBLIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24
5.5.1 Power Supply Assembly A1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27
5.5.2 Matrix Processor Module A2 – Future Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-29
5.5.3 Modem Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-29
5.5.3.1 FFT Assembly A3A1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-29
5.5.3.2 MOD/DEMOD Assembly A3A2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-29
5.5.3.3 FEC Assembly A3A2A1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-29
5.5.4 Interface Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-31
5.5.4.1 Interface Assembly A5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-31
5.5.5 Front Panel Controller Assembly A6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-31
5.5.6 LPC-10E Digital Voice Module Option A7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-31
5.5.7 Front Panel Module A8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-34
5.5.7.1 Front Panel Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-34
SECTION 6 – MAINTENANCE
6.1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
6.1.1 Protection of Static-Sensitive Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
6.2 BIT/BITE DESCRIPTION AND USE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
6.3 TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDELINES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
6.4 REQUIRED TOOLS AND TEST EQUIPMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
v
RF-5720
TABLE OF CONTENTS

Paragraph Page
SECTION 6 – MAINTENANCE (Cont.)

6.5 MODULE AND FRONT PANEL REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . 6-6
6.5.1 Removal and Replacement of the A6, A5 and A3A1 Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
6.5.2 Removal and Replacement of the A1 Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
6.5.3 Removal and Replacement of the A3A2/A3A2A1 Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
6.5.4 Replacing the Motherboard A9A2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
6.5.5 Removal and Replacement of Front Panel Assembly A8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10
6.6 FAULT ISOLATING POWER SUPPLY A1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10
6.7 FAULT ISOLATING FRONT PANEL ASSEMBLY A8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10
6.8 TROUBLESHOOTING POWER SUPPLY A1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11
6.8.1 No +5 or +12 Volts Present at P1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11
6.8.2 No –12 Volts Present at P1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
6.8.3 No +12 Volts Present at P1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
6.9 TROUBLESHOOTING MODEM MODULE A3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13
6.9.1 Fault A301 – Communication Fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13
6.9.2 Fault A31F – FEC ROM Fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13
6.9.3 Fault A320 – FEC RAM Fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13
6.9.4 Fault A321 – Dual Port RAM Fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14
6.9.5 Fault A322 – Modem Communications Fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14
6.9.6 Fault A323 – Modem/FEC DPRAM Fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14
6.9.7 Fault A324– MODEM/FFT DPRAM Fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15
6.9.8 Fault A325 – MODEM ROM Fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15
6.9.9 Fault A326 – MODEM RAM Fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15
6.9.10 Fault A327 – MODEM Sample Clock Fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15
6.9.11 Fault A330 – FFT Communications Fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16
6.9.12 Fault A331 – FFT Dual Port RAM Fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16
6.9.13 Fault A332– FFT ROM Fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-17
6.9.14 Fault A333 – FFT External RAM Fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-17
6.9.15 Fault A334 – FFT D/A to A/D Loopback Fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-17
6.9.16 Fault A335 – Canned FFT Fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-17
6.9.17 Fault A340 – DSP56156 Communication Fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18
6.9.18 Fault A341 – DSP56156 Dual Port RAM Fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18
6.9.19 Fault A342 – DSP56156 SRAM Fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18
6.9.20 Fault A343 – TMS320C51 Dual Port RAM Fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-19
6.10 TROUBLESHOOTING INTERFACE ASSEMBLY A5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-19
6.10.1 Fault A501 – Communications Fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-19
6.10.2 Fault A502 – ROM Fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-20
6.10.3 Fault A503 – IRAM Fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-20
6.10.4 Fault A504 – XRAM Fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-20
6.10.5 Fault A505 – SCC ASYNC Fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-20
6.10.6 Fault A506 – SCC SYNC Fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-21
6.10.7 Fault A507 – No Tone Fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-21
6.10.8 Fault A508 – PT Detector Fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-21
6.10.9 Fault A509 – Other Tone Fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-22
6.11 TROUBLESHOOTING FRONT PANEL CONTROLLER ASSEMBLY A6 . . . . 6-22
6.11.1 Fault A602 – IRAM Fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-22
6.11.2 Fault A603 – ROM Fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-22
vi
RF-5720
TABLE OF CONTENTS

Paragraph Page
SECTION 6 – MAINTENANCE (Cont.)

6.11.3 Fault A604 – XRAM Fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-22
6.11.4 Incorrect or No Response to Keyboard/Function Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-22
6.11.5 LCD Displays BACKUP MEMORY FAILURE at Power Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-23
6.11.6 No Message Displayed on LCD at Power Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-23
6.12 TROUBLESHOOTING FRONT PANEL A8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-23
6.12.1 General Preliminary Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-24
6.12.2 Audio Troubleshooting in the Receive Audio Path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-24
6.12.3 Audio Troubleshooting in the Transmit Audio Path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-25
6.12.4 Troubleshooting the LCD Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-27
6.12.5 Troubleshooting User Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-28
SECTION 7 – PARTS LISTS AND SCHEMATICS

7.1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
7.1.1 RF-5720 Modem Unit (10284-1000-01) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
7.2 RF-5720 CHASSIS ASSEMBLY (10284-5600) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
7.2.1 A9A2 Interconnect PWB Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
7.3 A1 BLACK POWER SUPPLY PWB ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-27
7.4 A3 MULTI-WAVE MODEM MODULE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-35
7.4.1 A3A1 FFT-DSP PWB ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-35
7.4.2 A3A2 MOD/DEMOD PWB ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-53
7.4.3 A3A2A1 FEC PWB ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-61
7.5 A5 INTERFACE PWB ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-69
7.6 A6 FRONT PANEL CONTROLLER PWB ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-83
7.7 A8 FRONT PANEL MODULE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-89
7.7.1 A8A1 Front Panel PWB Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-89
7.7.2 A8A2 Front Panel Filter Board PWB Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-107
7.7.3 A8A3 LCD PWB Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-111
7.8 POWER SUPPLY: BATTERY ELIMINATOR ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-113
A.1 CABLE ACCESSORIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1
A.1.1 RF-5720 DC Power Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1
A.1.2 RF-5720 AC Power Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1
A.1.3 RF-5720/DTE Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1
A.1.4 PRC-104 Audio Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-2
A.2 MOUNTING SYSTEMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-2
APPENDIX A
GLOSSARY
vii
RF-5720
TABLE OF CONTENTS
LIST OF FIGURES
Figure Page
1-1 RF-5720 HF Modem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1

1-2 RF-5720 Modem Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
2-1 Connecting the Power Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
2-2 Radio Interface Cable (Balanced Audio) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
2-3 Radio Interface Cable (Unbalanced Audio) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
2-4 Typical Asynchronous RS-232 DTE Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
2-5 Typical Synchronous RS-232 DTE Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
3-1 Modem Front Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
3-2 Operational Command Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
3-3. SETUP Flow Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
3-4 Programming Flow Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
3-5 LCD Display Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
3-6 PRGM Level Advance vs Access Number Advance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
4-1 Remote Control Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
4-2 Show Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
4-3 Single-Tone (Serial) Modem Show Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
4-4 39-Tone Modem Show Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
4-5 FSK Modem Show Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
4-6 Async and Sync Show Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
4-7 Help Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
4-8 Modem Help Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
4-9 Async and Sync Help Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
5-1 Modem Simplified Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
5-2 Single-tone Waveform Functional Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
5-3 Convolutional Coder Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
5-4 State Constellation Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
5-5 Interleaving Matrix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
5-6 39-Tone Modulation and Demodulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
5-7 TDQPSK Fundamentals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16
5-8 Vector Representation of Phase Shift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18
5-9 Frequency Correction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19
5-10 Frame Boundaries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20
5-11 Interleaving Matrix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22
5-12 FSK Modulation and Demodulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25
5-13 FSK Integration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26
5-14 Power Supply Assembly A1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28
5-15 Modulator/Demodulator Assembly A3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-30
5-16 Interface Assembly A5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-32
5-17 Front Panel Controller Assembly A6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-33
5-18 Front Panel Module Assembly A8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-35
5-19 Modem System Audio Routing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-36
6-1 Modem Assembly Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
6-2 Modem Rear Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
6-3 Proper Cable Dressing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
6-4 Module Extraction Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
7-1 RF-5720 Modem Assemblies Interconnect Diagram (10284-5700) . . . . . . . . . 7-3
viii
RF-5720
TABLE OF CONTENTS
LIST OF FIGURES (Cont.)

Figure Page
6-5 A3A2/A3A2A1 Mounting Screws . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
7-2 A9A2 Interconnect PWB Assembly Component Side Assembly Diagram
(10284-5700) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-19
7-3 A9A2 Interconnect PWB Assembly Wire Side Assembly Diagram
(10284-5700 Rev) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-20
7-4 A9A2 Interconnect PWB Schematic Diagram (10284-5701) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-21
7-5 A1 Black Power Supply PWB Assembly Component Side Assembly Drawing
(10284-2200 Rev) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-31
7-6 A1 Black Power Supply PWB Assembly Wire Side Assembly Drawing
(10284-2200) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-32
7-7 A1 Black Power Supply PWB Assembly Schematic Diagram (10284-2201) . 7-33
7-8 A3A1 FFT-DSP PWB Assembly Component Side Assembly Drawing
(10284-2550) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-39
7-9 A3A1 FFT-DSP PWB Assembly Wire Side Assembly Drawing
(10284-2550) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-39
7-10 A3A1 FFT-DSP PWB Assembly Schematic Diagram (10284-2551) . . . . . . . . 7-41
7-11 A3A2 Mod/Demod PWB Assembly Component Side Assembly Drawing
(10284-2420) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-55
7-12 A3A2 Mod/Demod PWB Assembly Wire Side Assembly Drawing
(10284-2420) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-56
7-13 A3A2 Mod/Demod PWB Assembly Schematic Diagram (10284-2421) . . . . . . 7-57
7-14 A3A2A1 FEC PWB Assembly Component Side Assembly Drawing
(10284-2430) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-62
7-15 A3A2A1 FEC PWB Assembly Wire Side Assembly Drawing (10284-2430) . 7-63
7-16 A3A2A1 FEC PWB Assembly Schematic Diagram
(10284-2431) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-65
7-17 A5 Interface PWB Assembly Component Side Assembly Drawing
(10284-2610) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-73
7-18 A5 Interface PWB Assembly Wire Side Assembly Drawing (10284-2610) . . . 7-74
7-19 A5 Interface PWB Assembly Schematic Diagram (10284-2611) . . . . . . . . . . . 7-75
7-20 A6 Front Panel Controller PWB Assembly Component Side Assembly
Drawing (10284-2700) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-85
7-21 A6 Front Panel Controller PWB Assembly Wire Side Assembly Drawing
(10284-2700) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-86
7-22 A6 Front Panel Controller PWB Assembly Schematic Diagram
(10284-2701) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-87
7-23 A8A1 Front Panel PWB Assembly Component Side Assembly Drawing
(10284-2110) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-95
7-24 A8A1 Front Panel PWB Assembly Wire Side Assembly Drawing
(10284-2110) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-96
7-25 A8A1 Front Panel PWB Assembly Schematic Diagram (10284-2111) . . . . . . 7-97
7-26 A8A2 Front Panel Filter Board PWB Assembly Component Side
Assembly Drawing (10284-2120) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-108
ix
RF-5720
TABLE OF CONTENTS
LIST OF FIGURES (Cont.)

Figure Page
7-27 A8A2 Front Panel Filter Board PWB Assembly Wire Side Assembly Drawing
(10284-2120) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-108
7-28 A8A2 Front Panel Filter PWB Assembly Schematic Diagram
(10284-2121) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-109
7-29 A8A3 LCD PWB Assembly Component Side Assembly Drawing
(10284-2130) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-112
7-30 Battery Eliminator Input PWB Assembly Component Side Assembly Drawing
(10284-6020) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-114
7-31 Battery Eliminator Assembly Schematic Diagram
(10284-6011) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-115
LIST OF TABLES
Table Page
1-1 Radio Equipment Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
2-1 DATA Connector J2 Pinout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
3-1 Modem Front Panel Controls, Connectors, and Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
3-2 Modem Type Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
3-3 Bit Rates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
3-4 Interleaving Time Delays - Serial Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
3-5 Interleaving Time Delays - 39-Tone Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
3-6 Single-Tone and 39-Tone Program Reference Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15
3-7 Modem Default Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28
5-1 Error-Correcting Coding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
5-2 Coding for 2400/4800 bps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
5-3 Coding for 1200 bps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
5-4 39-Tone Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17
5-5 Normal Acquisition Preamble Length (Seconds) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20
5-6 Diversity Factors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23
5-7 Major Assemblies and Their Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27
6-1 Modem Fault Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
6-2 Required Tools and Test Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
6-3 RF-5720 Site Spares Kit Parts List (1001-0853) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
6-4 Keypad Assembly A8A4 Output at U11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-30
6-5 Mode Control Input/Output at U12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-30
7-1 RF-5720 Modem Unit Parts List (10284-1000-01) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
7-2 RF-5720 Chassis Assembly Parts List (10284-5600) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
7-3 Interconnect PWB Assembly A9A2 Parts List (10284-5700) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
7-4 A1 Black Power Supply PWB Assembly Parts List (10284-2200) . . . . . . . . . . 7-27
7-5 A3 Multi-Wave Modem Module Parts List (10284-2400-01) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-35
7-6 A3A1 FFT-DSP PWB Assembly Parts List (10284-2550) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-35
7-7 A3A2 Mod/Demod PWB AssemblyParts List (10284-2420) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-53
7-8 A3A2A1 FEC PWB Assembly Parts List (10284-2430) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-61
7-9 A5 Interface PWB Assembly Parts List (10284-2610) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-69
7-10 A6 Front Panel Controller PWB Assembly Parts List (10284-2700) . . . . . . . . 7-83
7-11 A8 Front Panel Module Parts List (10284-2000) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-89
7-12 A8A1 Front Panel PWB Assembly Parts List (10284-2110) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-89
x
RF-5720
TABLE OF CONTENTS
LIST OF TABLES (Cont.)

Table Page
7-13 A8A2 Front Panel Filter Board PWB Assembly Parts List (10284-2120) . . . . 7-107
7-14 A8A3 LCD PWB Assembly Parts List (10284-2130) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-111
7-15 Battery Eliminator Assembly Parts List (10284-6000) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-113
7-16 Battery Eliminator Heatsink Assembly A1 Parts List (10284-6010) . . . . . . . . . 7-113
7-17 Battery Eliminator Input PWB Assembly Parts List (10284-6020) . . . . . . . . . . 7-113
7-18 Battery Eliminator Bridge Rectifier Assembly Parts List (10091-3060) . . . . . . 7-114
xi
RF-5720
SAFETY SUMMARY
SAFETY SUMMARY
1. INTRODUCTION
All operators and maintenance personnel must observe the following safety precautions during operation and
maintenance of this equipment. Specific warnings and cautions are provided in the manual and at the end of this
Safety Summary. Warnings, Cautions, and Notes appear before various steps in the manual and will be used as
follows:
• WARNING – Used when injury or death to personnel and damage to equipment is possible
• CAUTION – Used when there is a possibility of damage to equipment
• NOTE – Used to alert personnel to a condition that requires emphasis
2. PERSONNEL AND EQUIPMENT SAFETY

Basic safety precautions consider factors involved in protecting personnel from injury or death. Electrical,
mechanical, electromagnetic radiation (EMR), material, or chemical hazards are the most common types of
hazards found in electronic equipment. The following are types of hazards that may exist:
ELECTRICAL – Hazardous voltage and current levels may exist throughout the equipment. Contact
with these hazards could cause electrocution, electrical shock, burns, or injury due to
involuntary reflexes of the body.
MECHANICAL – Mechanical hazards are created when heavy assemblies and components must be
removed and replaced. Moving parts (such as fan blades) and hot surfaces are
potential mechanical hazards.
THERMAL – Burn hazards may exist in the equipment that could cause personal injuries and/or
serious equipment damage. Internal surfaces of the equipment may be in excess of
65°C, the point at which personnel could be burned. Extreme caution should be used
when working with any hot assemblies (for example, power supply or power amplifier
assemblies). Physical injury or damage may result to personnel and/or equipment as a
result of a reflex action to a burn.
CHEMICAL – Chemicals or materials used for servicing the equipment may present potential
hazards. Many chemical agents, such as cleaners and solvents, may be toxic, volatile,
or flammable. If used incorrectly, these agents can cause injury or death.
EMR – Overexposure to electromagnetic radiation results from amplified radio frequencies
may produce a health hazard.
3. OPERATIONAL AND MAINTENANCE SAFETY GUIDELINES
Good safety discipline is critical to prevent injury to personnel. All other safety measures are useless if personnel
do not observe the safety precautions and do not follow safety disciplines. Once aware of a hazard, personnel
should ensure that all other personnel are aware of the hazard. The following basic safety disciplines are stressed:
a. Read a procedure entirely before performing it. Personnel must always perform each assigned task in a
safe manner.
b. Prior to applying equipment power after maintenance, personnel must ensure that all unsecured hand
tools and test equipment are disconnected from the serviced/maintained equipment and properly stored.
xiii
RF-5720
SAFETY SUMMARY
c. Power to the equipment must be removed before a piece of equipment is removed.
d. Extreme care must be used when adjusting or working on operating equipment. Voltages in excess of
70 V or current sources in excess of 25 A are covered with barriers. Barriers include warning information
about the hazard encountered upon barrier removal.
e. Personnel must react when someone is being electrically shocked. Perform the following steps:
1. Shut off power.
2. Call for help.
3. Administer first aid if qualified.
Under no circumstances should a person come directly in contact with the body unless the power has
been removed. When immediate removal of the power is not possible, personnel must use a
non-conductive material to try to jolt or pry the body away from the point of shock.
f. Personnel should work with one hand whenever possible to prevent electrical current from passing
through vital organs of the body. In addition, personnel must never work alone. Someone must be
available in the immediate area to render emergency first aid, if necessary.
g. Lifting can cause injury. Items weighing more than 37 pounds must be lifted by two or more people.
h. Some electrolytic capacitors contain aluminum oxide or tantalum. If connected incorrectly, the capacitor
will explode when power is applied. Extreme care must be used when replacing and connecting these
capacitors. The capacitor terminals must always be connected using the correct polarity: positive to
positive and negative to negative.
The next section contains general safety precautions not directly related to specific procedures or equipment.
These precautions are oriented toward the maintenance technician. However, all personnel must understand and
apply these precautions during the many phases of operation and maintenance of the equipment. The following
precautions must be observed:
DO NOT SERVICE EQUIPMENT ALONE

Never work on electrical equipment unless another person familiar with the operation and hazards of the
equipment is near. When the maintenance technician is aided by operators, ensure that operators are aware of
the hazards.
GROUNDING
Always ensure that all equipment and assemblies are properly grounded when operating or servicing.
TURN OFF POWER AND GROUND CAPACITORS

Whenever possible, power to equipment should be turned off before beginning work on the equipment. Be
sure to ground all capacitors that are potentially dangerous.
KEEP AWAY FROM LIVE CIRCUITS

Operators and maintainers must observe all safety regulations at all times. Do not change components or
make adjustments inside equipment with a high voltage supply on unless required by the procedure. Under
certain conditions, dangerous potentials may exist in circuits with power controls off, due to charges retained
by capacitors.
xiv
RF-5720
SAFETY SUMMARY
DO NOT BYPASS INTERLOCKS

Do not bypass any interlocks unnecessarily. If it is necessary to employ an interlock bypass for equipment
servicing, use extreme care not to come in contact with hazardous voltages.
USE CARE HANDLING HEAVY EQUIPMENT

Never attempt to lift large assemblies or equipment without knowing their weight. Use enough personnel or a
mechanical lifting device to properly handle the item without causing personal injury.
HEED WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS

Specific warnings and cautions are provided to ensure the safety and protection of personnel and equipment.
Be familiar with and strictly follow all warnings and cautions on the equipment and in technical manuals.
PROTECTIVE EYEWEAR
All personnel must wear protective eyewear when servicing or maintaining equipment. Protective eyewear
must be worn at all times when using tools.
4. PROTECTION OF STATIC-SENSITIVE DEVICES
Diode input-protection is provided on all CMOS devices. This protection is designed to guard against adverse
electrical conditions such as electrostatic discharge. Although most static-sensitive devices contain protective
circuitry, several precautionary steps should be taken to avoid the application of potentially damaging
voltages to the inputs of the device.
To protect static-sensitive devices from damage, the following precautions should be observed.
a. Keep all static-sensitive devices in their protective packaging until needed. This packaging is
conductive and should provide adequate protection for the device. Storing or transporting these
devices in conventional plastic containers could be destructive to the device.
b. Disconnect power prior to insertion or extraction of these devices. This also applies to PWBs
containing such devices.
c. Double check test equipment voltages and polarities prior to conducting any tests.
d. Avoid contact with the leads of the device. The component should always be handled carefully by
the ends or side opposite the leads.
e. Avoid contact between PWB circuits or component leads and synthetic clothing.
f. Use only soldering irons and tools that are properly grounded. Ungrounded soldering tips or tools
can destroy these devices. SOLDERING GUNS MUST NEVER BE USED.
xv
RF-5720
SAFETY SUMMARY
5. EXPLANATION OF HAZARD SYMBOLS
The symbol of drops of a liquid onto a hand shows that the material will cause burns or
irritation of human skin or tissue.
The symbol of a person wearing goggles shows that the material will injure your eyes.
The symbol of a flame shows that a material can ignite and burn you.
The symbol of a skull and crossbones shows that a material is poisonous or a danger to life.
The symbol of a human figure in a cloud shows that vapors of a material present danger to your
life or health.
xvi
RF-5720
SPECIFICATIONS
SPECIFICATIONS
SERIAL (SINGLE-TONE) MODE
Data Rates (bps): 75, 150, 300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800 (uncoded)
FEC Coding: 1/2 Rate Convolutional (except 4800 bps)
Interleaving Delay: 0, 1.2, or 9.6 seconds
Modulation: M-ary PSK, 2400 symbols/second
Multipath Tolerance: 5 milliseconds
Bandwidth: 3000 Hz (300 - 3300 Hz)
Doppler Sync: ±75 Hz
Doppler Tracking: 3.5 Hz
Equalization: Data Directed Equalization (Patented)
Synchronization: Sync on Preamble and Sync on Data
Adaptive Filtering: Suppression of certain classes of in-band
interference
39-TONE MODE
Data Rates (bps): 75, 150, 300, 600, 1200, 2400, 2400 Voice
FEC Coding: (14, 10, 2) Reed-Solomon code at 2400 bps;
(7, 3, 2) Reed-Solomon code at lower rates
Interleaving: Long or short
Tone Library: 39 tones, 675-2812.5 Hz;
Doppler tone at 393.75 Hz
Modulation: TDQPSK
Multipath Tolerance: 4.72 milliseconds
Bandwidth: 3000 Hz nominal
Doppler Sync: 75 Hz
Doppler Tracking: 3.5 Hz
xvii
RF-5720
SPECIFICATIONS
SPECIFICATIONS (Cont.)
FSK MODE
Data Rates (bps): 75, 150, 300, 600
Bandwidth Selections:
FSK-NS: Center = 2805 Hz, Shift 42.5 Hz
FSK-WS: Center = 2000 Hz, Shift 425 Hz
FSK-A: Center = 2000 Hz, Shift 85 Hz
FSK-V: Programmable Mark/Space Frequency;

Range (350-3000 Hz);
Resolution = 5 Hz
Receive Tuning: Center frequency tunable in 10 Hz steps up to ±200

Hz
Dynamic Range: 30 dB
Tracking Type: Automatic threshold
RF-5720 MODEM - MECHANICAL,

ENVIRONMENTAL AND ELECTRICAL
MECHANICAL
Size: 3.0 H x 7.9 W x 8.0 D inches (without battery
eliminator)
Weight: 8 lbs. (without battery eliminator)
Shock: MIL-STD-810E, Method 516.4, Procedure I
Vibration: MIL-STD-810E, Method 514.4, Category 10
ENVIRONMENTAL
Temperature: –20° C to +50° C (per MIL-STD-810E, Methods
501.3 and 502.3)
Humidity: MIL-STD-810E, Method 507.3, Procedure III
Submersion: 3 feet of water
ELECTRICAL
Power: 10.0 watts average
Interface Data: RS-232C
Radio: 600 ohms balanced audio

Transmit - 0 to –20 dBm adjustable
Receive - –25 dBm to +5 dBm
Keyline - Transistor closure to ground
40 volts, 10 ma maximum
xviii
RF-5720
ABOUT THIS MANUAL
ABOUT THIS MANUAL

The RF-5720 Multi-Waveform HF Modem Installation and
Operation Manual is divided into seven main sections, which
are outlined as follows:
• Section 1 – Introduction: Contains a description of the scope

of this manual, provides a general description of the
RF-5720 Modum, including applications, system
configurations, radio interface criteria, data
terminal equipment (DTE) interface criteria, remote
control, RF-5720 future option assemblies, and the
glossary.
• Section 2 – Installation: Contains general information,

information on unpacking, additional equipment,
power, and power cable connections. This section
also provides information on testing the modem,
connecting the modem to the radio, connecting the
modem to the data terminal equipment, setting the
modem interface criteria, establishing voice contact,
and sending data.
• Section 3 – Operation: Describes and shows the controls,

connectors, and display of the RF-5720. The modes of operation,
operation using the mode/setup commands, operation
using the program command, transmitting the signal,
and FSK receive tuning are also described.
• Section 4 – Remote Control: Contains a general

description of remote control and provides data
terminal equipment interface criteria. The remote
control cable and the show (SH) and help (HE or ?)
menus are described.
• Section 5 – Theory of Operation: Contains an

introduction to the theory for the single-tone, 39-tone,
and binary FSK primary modes of operation. This
section also describes the data paths for each major
assembly. A simplified block diagram of the modem
and functional block diagrams of signal paths are
provided.
xix
RF-5720
ABOUT THIS MANUAL
ABOUT THIS MANUAL (Cont.)
• Section 6 – Maintenance: Contains an introduction,

bit/bite description and use, troubleshooting guidelines,
module and front panel replacement procedures for the
RF-5720. Fault isolating Power Supply A1 and Front Panel
Assembly A8 is described. Troubleshooting information on
Power Supply A1, Modem Module A3, Interface Assembly
A5, Front Panel Controller Assembly A6, and Front Panel
A8 is provided in this section.
• Section 7 – Parts Lists and Schematics: Contains a parts list

for the RF-5720 Modem and an interconnect diagram for the
assemblies of the RF-5720. A chassis assembly parts list is
included. A parts list, assembly diagrams, and a schematic
for Interconnect Assembly A9A2 are provided.
• Section A1 provides a parts list, assembly diagram, and a

schematic diagram for A1 Power Supply Assembly.
• Section A3 contains a parts list for A3 Modem Module

Assembly. This section provides a parts list, assembly
diagram, and a schematic diagram for A3A1 FFT Assembly,
A3A2 MOD/DEMOD Assembly, and A3A2A1 FEC Assembly .

schematic diagram for A5 Interface Assembly.

schematic diagram for A6 Front Panel Controller Assembly.
• Section A8 contains a parts list for Front Panel Module

A8. This section provides a parts list, assembly diagram,
and a schematic diagram for A8A1 Front Panel Assembly
and A8A2 Front Panel Filter Assembly. Section A8 also has a
parts list and assembly diagram for A8A3 LCD Assembly.
• The Power Supply section contains a parts list, assembly

diagram, and a schematic diagram for the RF-5720PS
Power Supply.
• Appendix A contains information on cable accessories and

mounting systems for the RF-5720 Modem.
• The Glossary at the end of the manual is a reference for

terms, abbreviations, and acronyms.
xx
RF-5720 MULTI-WAVEFORM HF MODEM
GENERAL INFORMATION
RF-5720
MULTI-WAVEFORM
HF MODEM
RF-5720
INTRODUCTION
SECTION 1
INTRODUCTION
1.1 PURPOSE OF MANUAL
This manual contains information necessary to install, program, operate, maintain, and repair the RF-5720
Multi-Waveform HF Modem. Information on cable accessories is included in the appendix. Information on the
KG-84 application and the Encryption Interface Kit (EIK) is available from Harris Corporation.
This manual is intended to give the technician and operator all information needed to install, program, operate,
and maintain the RF-5720 Multi-Waveform HF Modem. The functions of each of the main assemblies are
described through the use of functional block diagrams and text. In addition, maintenance procedures supply all
information required to locate and replace faulty assemblies.
For a description of signal processing within the modem, modulation and demodulation theory is included for the
three waveform types used in the modem: Single-Tone, 39-Tone, and Frequency Shift Keying (FSK).
1.2 GENERAL DESCRIPTION
The Harris RF-5720 Multi-Waveform HF Modem, shown in figure 1-1, has the ability to generate three HF
waveforms using the same hardware. Each waveform is selectable from the front-panel alphanumeric keypad and
shown on the liquid-crystal display (LCD). All three waveforms allow half-duplex synchronous or asynchronous
operation. Flexible programmable interfaces ensure compatibility with a wide range of data and radio equipment.
5720-001-mp
Figure 1-1. RF-5720 HF Modem
1-1
RF-5720
INTRODUCTION
1.2.1 Single-Tone Waveform

The single (serial) tone mode is based upon Phase Shift Keyed Modulation at a constant rate of 2400 symbols per
second. It is a full MIL-STD-188-110A serial tone compatible mode. Known data segments are periodically
inserted in the transmitted signal to allow for adaptive channel equalization at the receiver. Harris was the original
inventor of the HF single tone demodulation technique and still holds patent rights to the “Data Directed
Equalization” technique. Convolutional coding (1/2 rate) and Viterbi decoding are combined with interleaving to
provide unequalled performance in HF channels. Data rates of 75 to 2400 bits per second (bps), and 4800 bps
(uncoded), are provided. Automatic bit rate detection and correction are provided in receive mode. Lastly, a very
robust adaptive Narrowband Interference (NBI) filtering algorithm allows data transmission on channels with
severe interference.
The Stanag 4285 (single tone) coded and uncoded waveforms are available as an option. The characteristics and
performance of the Stanag 4285 waveform are similar to (but not interoperable with) the MIL-STD-188-110A
single tone, particularly in the coded mode. Refer to Stanag 4285 for further waveform details.
1.2.2 39-Tone Waveform
The 39-Tone mode is based upon time-differential QPSK modulation of 39 tones, for a resultant channel rate of
3466 bps. The Reed-Solomon Forward Error Correction Code and selectable time interleaving provide for robust
performance under marginal HF channel conditions. At rates of 600 bps and below, inband time/frequency
diversity gives added protection in selective fading and low signal-to-noise ratio (SNR). The waveform
incorporates fast synchronization techniques and allows for rapid recovery from deep channel fades.
1.2.3 FSK Waveform
The modem includes a Frequency Shift Keyed (FSK) mode of operation for compatibility with existing modems.
User selection of mark/space frequencies over the range of 350 to 3250 Hz (5-Hz resolution) are accommodated.
The binary FSK waveform is entirely implemented with digital signal processing techniques.
The versatility and speed of the RF-5720 make it suitable for a variety of applications, including the following:
• Narrowband Secure Voice
• High-Speed Burst Data
• Digital Facsimile
• Slow-Scan Television
• Multi-Data-Rate Operation
• HF, Microwave, Land-Line
• Narrowband Satellite
Figure 1-2 is a diagram illustrating possible applications of the modem in an integrated communications system,
including transmission of low-speed teletype, high-speed data, digital facsimile, or narrowband secure voice. It
can support either synchronous or asynchronous data terminal equipment or handset audio devices.
The architecture of the RF-5720 is based on the TMS320C51 and DSP56156 families of digital signal processors
and the 80C186 microprocessor. The unit is a general-purpose signal processor with input/output capabilities, and
provides for future waveform/option expansion by software reprogramming. Extensive Built-In Test (BIT)
functions are included.
1-2
RF-5720
INTRODUCTION
POWER
SUPPLY
GRID
GRC-106
FACSIMILE
AN/UXC-7
5720/RADIO
CABLE
PRC-104
RF-5720
5720–002
DATA CABLE
DIGITAL VOICE UNIT
UGC-74
TELETYPE
Figure 1-2. RF-5720 Modem Applications
1.3 SYSTEM CONFIGURATIONS
The modem is offered in several standard system configurations including vehicular, base station, and manpack.
Information on these configurations can be obtained from Harris Corporation.
Table 1-1. Radio Equipment Requirements

Consideration Limitation or Deviation
Envelope Delay Distortion Less than 1 millisecond total for transmitter and receiver between
675 Hz and 2812 Hz
Amplitude Distortion Amplitude ripple between 300 Hz and 3000 Hz should not exceed
2 dB.
Intermodulation Distortion Third-order intermodulation distortion products should be at least
35 dB below PEP.
Synthesizer Phase Noise RMS phase jitter should not exceed 2.5 degrees when averaged
over 22 millisecond periods.
Synthesizer Frequency Deviation ± 1 part in 106
Receiver AGC Decay time should be about 0.5 seconds.
Audio Interface Normal H-250 or H-289 handset interface
Keyline Up to 10 mA from current limited source with maximum
open-circuit output of 40 volts
1-3
RF-5720
INTRODUCTION
1.4 DATA TERMINAL EQUIPMENT (DTE) INTERFACE CRITERIA

The modem is designed to comply with the EIA interface standard, RS-232C standard, and can be configured for
synchronous or asynchronous operation. The operation criteria described in thefollowing subsections should be
considered when selecting data terminal equipment to interface with the modem.
1.4.1 Single-Tone and 39-Tone Considerations
The modem requires the data terminal equipment to supply a Request-to-Send (RTS) to initiate transmission. If
the data terminal equipment does not support RTS signaling, an external means of generating a Request-to-Send
must be provided.
The modem returns a Clear-to-Send (CTS) signal to the data terminal equipment when it is ready to receive data.
Any data sent by the data terminal equipment prior to CTS being asserted is ignored. The data terminal equipment
should drop the RTS signal between messages to ensure that a preamble is sent at the beginning of a new
message.
The Receive-Line-Signal-Detect (RLSD) signal is active when the demodulator and FEC decoder of the receiving
modem is synchronized with the sending modem.
1.4.2 Single-Tone and 39-Tone Synchronous Operation
RX clock signals are generated by the modem. The source of the transmit clock signal is determined by
programming the TX CLK function (in/out). CTS remains active until the Request-to-Send is dropped. The data
terminal equipment rate must be the same as the transmission data rate.
1.4.3 Single-Tone and 39-Tone Asynchronous Operation
The modem and data terminal equipment use their own internal TX and RX data clocks. Sending and receiving
data terminal equipment need not be set at the same bit rate; however, character length, parity, and number of stop
bits must be identical between the data terminal equipment and the modem. Also, the modem data rate must be
less than or equal to the DTE data rate to prevent received messages from overrunning the receive DTE data
buffer. In Serial mode, an autobaud to a higher modem rate may cause this type of overrun.
Flow control is accomplished by either the CTS signal or the XON/XOFF characters (if character length is 7 or 8
bits.) CTS is reissued when the modem is ready to accept more data from the sending data terminal equipment.
The CTS signal is deactivated in response to the RTS signal being deactivated.
The CTS and/or XON/XOFF flow control features normally occur only if the data terminal equipment rate
exceeds the over-the-air data rate.
The modem supports echo back to the data terminal equipment.
1.4.4 FSK General Considerations
An RTS signal from the data terminal equipment causes the modem to issue a keyline to the transmitter. Data
rates of 75, 150, 300, or 600 bps are allowed.
The modem returns a CTS signal to the data terminal equipment when it is ready to receive data. Any data sent by
the data terminal equipment prior to CTS being asserted is ignored.
The RLSD signal is active when the demodulator of the receiving modem is receiving a valid signal from the
transmitting modem.
1.4.5 FSK Synchronous Operation
RX clock signals are generated by the modem, and TX clock signals can be programmed as either an input from
the data terminal equipment or as an output from the transmitting modem (using the same RX clock signal). CTS
remains active until RTS is removed.
1-4
RF-5720
INTRODUCTION
1.4.6 FSK Asynchronous Operation

The modem and the data terminal equipment use their own internal TX and RX data clocks. Sending and
receiving data terminal equipment need not be set at the same bit rate, but character length, parity, and number of
stop bits must be identical in the modem and data terminal equipment.
1.5 REMOTE CONTROL
The modem can be controlled from any remote ASCII terminal connected to the modem asynchronous data
terminal equipment port. Any operating parameters that can be manipulated in the program mode can be changed
by the remote controller.
Transmissions can also be initiated and terminated from the remote location. The modem is capable of reporting
current operational and front-panel status in response to polls from the remote control unit. The remote control
interface is designed to EIA standard RS-232 and uses a simple ASCII interface supported by the modem.
1.6 RF-5720 FUTURE OPTION ASSEMBLIES
The modem is designed to accept inputs from many different data transmitters. Although it is compact in size, its
mechanical and electrical design allows for future options such as:
• Future Waveform Capability
• Encryption Modules
• Digital Voice Module (LPC-10)
1.7 GLOSSARY
A glossary section is provided at the back of the manual for reference of terms, abbreviations, and acronyms.
1-5
RF-5720
INSTALLATION
SECTION 2
INSTALLATION
2.1 GENERAL INFORMATION
The RF-5729 HF Modem provides a means for transmitting RS-232 serial data over an HF transceiver system.
The modem allows transmission over any 3000 Hz bandwidth system such as satellite or telephone. Since the
primary application of the modem is HF data transmission, this section describes installation in an HF
communications system.
Installation will include:
• Unpacking the equipment (Subsection 2.2)
• Additional equipment (Subsection 2.3)
• Power requirements (Subsection 2.4)
• Connecting the power cables (Subsection 2.5)
• Testing the modem (Subsection 2.6)
• Connecting the modem to the radio (Subsection 2.7)
• Connecting the modem to the Data Terminal Equipment (DTE) (Subsection 2.8)
• Setting the modem interface criteria (Subsection 2.9)
• Establishing voice contact (Subsection 2.10)
• Sending data (Subsection 2.11)

2.2 UNPACKING
Carefully remove the unit from the shipping container and retain the carton for repacking if necessary. Inspect for
damage and check the packing list to account for all equipment on the list. Notify carrier if the unit is damaged or
items are missing.
2.3 ADDITIONAL EQUIPMENT
Ensure that the following equipment is available:
• An HF radio with a 0 dBm, 600-ohm transmit audio port and a 600 ohm receive audio port that provides
output audio levels in the –25 to +5 dBm range
• A data source (Data Terminal Equipment) that fully supports an RS-232C interface protocol
• A modem-to-Data Terminal Equipment (DTE) cable
• A modem-to-radio cable
• Power cables and a power source for all of the equipment
• A power supply for the modem (either the RF-5720PS Power Supply [10284-6000] or an alternate)
2-1
RF-5720
INSTALLATION
2.4 POWER
Usually, the RF-5720PS Power Supply (10284-6000) is provided with the modem. It attaches mechanically to the
rear of the modem and converts a wide variety of AC and DC power sources to the DC voltage required by the
modem.
The RF-5720PS Power Supply accepts input power from the following sources:
• 18 – 32 volts DC
• 110 volts AC (± 15%); 50, 60, or 400 Hz
• 220 volts AC (± 15%); 50, 60, or 400 Hz
With any of the above power sources, the RF-5720PS Power Supply provides a DC voltage to the modem in the
range of 14 – 32 volts DC.
If a problem is suspected with the RF-5720PS Power Supply (10284-6000), verify the above output voltage range
with a variable resistance, 25 watt load set to draw about 10 watts.
Other Harris power sources for use with the modem include:
• Ni-Cd rechargeable battery pack (10012-0300)
• A BA-5590 Battery Adapter Box (10012-0330) for either the BA-590 or BA-5590 batteries
Attach the RF-5720PS Power Supply (or alternate) to the rear of the modem. The power pins on the rear of the
modem mate with the sockets on the power supply. After attaching the RF-5720PS Power Supply, secure it using
the two side clamps.
2.5 CONNECTING THE POWER CABLES
Ensure that the HF radio and data source have power cables with appropriate mating connectors.
The RF-5720PS Power Supply (10284-6000) comes with both an AC and DC power cable. The AC cable has a
standard three-prong connector, including the ground prong. The DC cable has three stripped wires for +Vdc,
ground, and shield. The other end of both the AC and DC cables has a MS3116J8-4SW connector that mates with
the power input connector of the power supply. As shown in Figure 2-1, attach either the AC or DC power cables
to the power supply and connect the other end to the appropriate AC or DC power source.
2-2
RF-5720
INSTALLATION
(RED) +
TO AC
(BLK) – POWER
(WHT) SOURCE
(3 PRONG)
(SHIELD)
10284-6000
POWER SUPPLY
RF-5720
MODEM
5720–003–mp
Figure 2-1. Connecting the Power Cable
2.6 TESTING THE MODEM
With power applied to the modem, turn the modem mode control to the Plain Text (PT) position. The modem
display turns on and displays text, depending on the mode of operation. If the display does not turn on, check the
power cabling and power source.
Press the TEST key on the front panel keypad to execute a modem self-test. During self-test, all display character
positions are briefly filled with black squares. Use this method to verify the display. After approximately ten
seconds, the display should momentarily read SELF TEST PASSED and then return to the normal mode of
operation display.
If a fault code appears or no display is shown, verify that only the power cable is attached and repeat. Notify the
depot or Harris Corporation if the fault persists.
2.7 CONNECTING THE MODEM TO THE RADIO
Harris makes radio interface cables for several different types of radios, and provides a P-0339 modem mating
connector to assist users in making a modem-to-radio cable. Contact Harris Corporation to order any accessory
radio interface cables.
The modem has a standard 600-ohm balanced audio interface with an open collector keyline circuit. Any radio
used with the modem should have the following features:
• 600 ohm, 0 dBm to –20 dBm transmit audio
• 600 ohm, receiver output audio, fixed level, –25 dBm to +5 dBm
2-3
RF-5720
INSTALLATION
• A keyline activated by contact closure to ground

• A transmit and receive filter bandwidth of 300 Hz to 3000 Hz (± 3 dBm)
Radios with bandwidth less than that specified cause degraded modem performance.
Radios with interfaces different than those listed require a special radio interface cable. Most HF radios, however,
have these listed features, thereby making direct connection to the modem possible.
Use the P-0339 connector provided with the modem to make the modem-to-radio interface cable. Figure 2-2
shows a balanced audio configuration. Figure 2-3 shows an unbalanced configuration. Most radios accept a 0
dBm transmit signal (2.2 volts peak-to-peak into 600 ohms). If the system radio requires a lower transmit signal,
refer to section 3, Operation, to set the nominal transmit level between 0 and –20 dBm (600 ohms) in 2 dB
increments.
2.8 CONNECTING THE MODEM TO THE DATA TERMINAL EQUIPMENT
Harris provides a U-316/U connector with the modem that mates with the J2 connector and is used to make a
modem-to-DTE cable. Harris also makes several RF-5720 cables that are listed in Appendix A of this manual.
The J2 pinout information is shown in Table 2-1.
Figures 2-4 and 2-5 are typical RF-5720-to-RS-232 DTE cables. J2 is the modem side of the cable. The other side
shows the signal pinouts and descriptions as defined in the RS-232 specification.
In synchronous mode, the modem can either provide a transmit clock or accept an external transmit clock. J2 pin
M is used for an external transmit clock. J2 pin R provides a clock to equipment that accepts (rather than sources)
at transmit clock.
NOTE
The modem must be programmed to either ACCEPT or
PROVIDE the transmit clock. Failure to do this results in
modem lock-up after activating Request-to-Send (RTS). Refer to
Subsection 2.9. Receive clock is always provided by the modem.
Table 2-1. DATA Connector J2 Pinout
Pin DTE Function
A CTS ASYNC
B REMOTE POWER ON
C RX DATA SYNC
D TX DATA SYNC
E NOT USED
F CHASSIS GND
H RLSD
J DATA GND
K TX DATA ASYNC
L CTS SYNC
M EXT TX SYNC CLOCK
N RX DATA ASYNC
P RTS
R RX SYNC CLOCK
2-4
RF-5720
INSTALLATION
P1
(P-0339)
RF-5720 RADIO CONNECTOR
CONNECTOR (See Radio Manual for Pinouts)
GND A GND
RX AUDIO + B RX AUDIO +
RADIO KEYLINE C RADIO KEYLINE INPUT
TX AUDIO + D TX AUDIO +
RX AUDIO – E RX AUDIO –
TX AUDIO – F TX AUDIO –
5720–004–mp
Figure 2-2. Radio Interface Cable (Balanced Audio)
(P-0339)
RF-5720 RADIO
CONNECTOR CONNECTOR
GND A GND
RX AUDIO + B RX AUDIO +
RADIO KEYLINE C RADIO KEYLINE INPUT
TX AUDIO + D TX AUDIO +
RX AUDIO – E
TX AUDIO – F
5720-005-mp
Figure 2-3. Radio Interface Cable (Unbalanced Audio)
2-5
RF-5720
INSTALLATION
RS-232
RF-5720 DTE
CTS
A 5 CLEAR TO SEND
B NC
C NC 6 DATA SET READY
D NC
E NC 20 DATA TERMINAL READY
CHASSIS GND
F 1 PROTECTIVE GND
RLSD
H 8 RECEIVE LINE SIGNAL DETECT
SIGNAL GND
J 7
TXD
K 2 TRANSMIT DATA (ASYNC)
L NC
M NC
RXD
N 3 RECEIVE DATA (ASYNC)
RTS
P 4 REQUEST TO SEND
R NC
5720-006-mp
Figure 2-4. Typical Asynchronous RS-232 DTE Cable
RF-5720 RS-232
J2 SHIELD PIN #
A NC 6 DATA SET READY
B NC 20 DATA TERMINAL READY

RXD SYNC
C 3 RECEIVED DATA
TXD SYNC
D 2 TRANSMITTED DATA
E NC
CHASSIS GND
F 1 PROTECTIVE GND
RLSD
H 8 RECEIVED LINE SIGNAL DETECTOR
GND
J 7 SIGNAL GROUND
K NC
CTS
L 5 CLEAR TO SEND
EXT TX CLOCK
M 24 TX SIGNAL ELEMENT TIMING (DTE SOURCE)
N NC
RTS
P 4 REQUEST TO SEND
RX CLOCK
R 17 RX SIGNAL ELEMENT TIMING (DCE SOURCE)
15 TX SIGNAL ELEMENT TIMING (DCE SOURCE)
5720-007-mp
Figure 2-5. Typical Synchronous RS-232 DTE Cable
2-6
RF-5720
INSTALLATION
2.9 SETTING THE MODEM INTERFACE CRITERIA

The modem has a flexible, programmable DTE interface. However, the modem must have its parameters
programmed identically to other modems in the network and have its data port parameters programmed
identically to the DTE parameters.
2.9.1 Programming the Modem Waveform Parameters
Perform the following procedure to program the modem waveform parameters to match the other modems in the
network. Note that the optional Stanag 4285 waveforms (4285-C and 4285-U) appear on the display only if the
option is installed.
g. Use the MODE key to select one of the following waveforms:
Serial
4285-C (option)
4285-U (option)
39-Tone
FSKNS
FSKWS
FSK-A
FSK-V
h. Use the SETUP key and the UP/DOWN arrow keys to set the following:
Data Rate (75, 150, 300,...4800)
Interleaving (Long, Short, or Zero)
Modem Port (Synchronous or Asynchronous)
2.9.2 Asynchronous DTE
Program the MODEM DATA PORT parameters to match the DTE settings. Refer to section 3. For an
asynchronous DTE, the following parameters must be set:
• DTE Data Rate
• Bits per Character (5, 6, 7, 8)
• Stop Bits (0, 1, 2)
• Parity (Odd, Even, None)
• Flow Control
• Echo (On, Off)
2-7
RF-5720
INSTALLATION
2.9.3 Synchronous DTE

For synchronous DTE, the source of the transmit clock must be set as follows:
• TX Clock Input = ON for an external clock provided by a DTE to J2 pin M
• TX Clock Input = OFF for modem providing TX clock on J2 pin R
2.10 ESTABLISHING VOICE CONTACT

Perform the following procedure to set up a normal voice link before trying to send data, after all of the previous
steps have been completed:
a. Connect an H-250 handset to J1 of the modem.
b. Key the handset and verify that the display reads MIC.
2.11 SENDING DATA
Once a voice link is established, data is sent by activating the DTE. When sending data, verify that the modem
displays TX for the duration of the message and returns to RX at the end of the message. If the modem fails to
transmit the complete message, verify activity on the following signal lines:
• RTS (Request-to-Send)
• CTS (Clear-to-Send)
• TX DATA
• TX CLK (Synchronous mode, TX CLK input = ON)
• RX CLK (Synchronous mode, TX CLK input = OFF)
2-8
RF-5720
OPERATION
SECTION 3
OPERATION
3.1 INTRODUCTION
The modem is versatile and designed to provide compatible interface connections between the DTE and the
transceiver. The operational commands for modem operation can be selected three ways:
• Using the MODE/SETUP keys to select the operating parameters
• Using the PRGM key to program advanced operating parameters as well as the data port, configuration,
and zeroize parameters
• Using the RMT mode control position (described in Section 4)
This section describes all front panel controls, connectors, and indicators, followed by descriptions of using the
MODE/SETUP keys and PRGM key to operate the modem.
3.2 CONTROLS, CONNECTORS, AND DISPLAY
All operational controls, connectors, and display are located on the front panel. Figure 3-1 and Table 3-1 illustrate
and describe the modem front panel controls. Because the modem is designed to include ENCRYPTION as a
future option, three options on the MODE control are included for this purpose, but are not functional. These are
CT (cipher text), LD (load), and Z (zeroize). Selecting any of these initiates the following display:
ENCRYPTION
Not Installed
Two keypad buttons are reserved for future use: SEND and ALPHA. These keys are not functional at this time.
3-1
RF-5720
OPERATION
6 7 8 9 10
HIGH FREQUENCY MODEM

HARRIS RF-5720
PT OFF CT
MODE SETUP ALPHA PRGM
1
3 39 TONE RX LD
A D G RMT
2400 bps ASYNC 1 B
C 2 E
F 3 H
I
SEND
Z 11
5
J M P
4 K
L
N
O 6 Q
R
TEST
14
2
7
S
T
8
V
X
9
Y
Z CLR J3
J1
U X –
J2
VOL 0 ENTR
RADIO
AUDIO
FILL DATA
4 5 13 12
5720–008–mp
Figure 3-1. Modem Front Panel
Table 3-1. Modem Front Panel Controls, Connectors, and Display

Controls &
Item No. Connectors Function
1 ON/OFF MODE SELECT OFF, RMT (Remote Control), and PT (plain text) modes avail-
able. CT, LD, and Z are included for future option purposes.
2 VOLUME Adjusts the volume of the handset/headset from audio on J1.
3 LCD Display Displays current operational and/or programmed information.
4 J1 AUDIO – Handset/Headset input/output FILL – Encryption
Key Input
5 J2 DATA – Data Terminal Equipment (DTE), Encryption Device,
and remote control device interface
6 MODE Allows waveform selection: Serial, 39-Tone, FSKNS, FSKWS,
FSK-A, FSK-V, 4285-C (option), 4285-U (option).
7 SETUP Allows signal parameter and values selection.
8 ALPHA Future Option
9 PRGM Program Key – Access programming parameters and modem
setup.
10 SEND Future Option
3-2
RF-5720
OPERATION
Table 3-1. Modem Front Panel Controls, Connectors, and Display (Cont.)
Controls &
Item No. Connectors Function
11 TEST BIT – Built-in Test
12 CLR Clears programming entries and resets previous value, accessto
previos program level.
13 ENTR Enters a progra,m parameter change, accesses next program
level, or takes out of PRGM mode.
14 J3 Radio Interface Connector
3.2.1 Performing Self-Test

Use the TEST key to quickly check the operational status of the modem. Pressign the TEST key performs a quick
(approximately 10 seconds) Built-in Test. The displays below show the LCD display while self1-test is being
performed.
SELF TEST
TEST PASSED
If a fault occurs, remove all cables from the modem and re-run self-test. Refer to Section 6, Maintenance, for
further information on fault codes and troubleshooting procedures.
After self-test is performed, the display returns to the last operational display.
3-3
RF-5720
OPERATION
3.2.2 Resetting the Modem to its Default Parameters

The PRGM key can be used to zeroize (erase) all operational settings and return the modem to its default
parameters. Push the PRGM button until 99 ZEROIZE appears in the display. Use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to
select ON, then press ENTR to zeroize the modem. Once the modem is zeroized, the following LCD display
appears:
DEFAULT REMAINS RX UNTIL A

MODEM TYPE KEYUP IS RECEIVED.
SERIAL RX
2400 bps ASYNC
DEFAULT
BIT RATE DEFAULT
MODEM PORT
3.3 MODES OF OPERATION

The modem provides for serial-tone (single-tone), 39-tone, and FSK waveforms. Table 3-2 is a list of waveform
settings:
Table 3-2. Modem Type Settings
Type Definition
Serial MIL-STD-188-110A single tone waveform, 75 to 4800 bps
4285-C (option) Stanag 4285 single tone coded waveform, 75 to 2400 bps
4285-U (option) Stanag 4285 single tone uncoded waveform, 1200 to 2400 bps
39-Tone 39-Tone High Speed Data Waveform, 75 to 2400 bps
FSKNS FSKNS Narrow Shift: Center Frequency 2805 ± 42.5 Hz
FSKWS FSKWS Wide Shift: Center Frequency 2000 ± 425 Hz
FSK-A FSK-A Narrow Shift: Center Frequency 2000 ± 85 Hz
FSK-V FSK-V Variable Mark and Space Frequencies 350-3250 Hz
Note: FSK-V Frequencies should be input according to the following limit:
Freq (mark) – Freq (space) (Hz)

> = 67%
Bit Rate (bps)
The operational command keys are highlighted in Figure 3-2. The MODE/SETUP keys are used to manually
select the operating parameters. The PRGM key is used to program advanced operating parameters and define the
data port and configuration parameters. The zeroize command is also accessed by the PRGM key.
3-4
RF-5720
OPERATION
MODE SETUP ALPHA PRGM
A D G
1 B
C
2 E
F
3 H
I
SEND
J M P
4 K
L
5 N
O
6 Q
R
TEST
S V Y
7 T
U
8 W
X
9 Z
–
CLR
0 ENTR
5720–023
Figure 3-2. Operational Command Keys
3.4 OPERATION USING THE MODE/SETUP COMMANDS

Modem operating parameters are selected by using the MODE, SETUP, and UP/DOWN arrow keys. The MODE
key scrolls through the available waveforms. The SETUP key scrolls through the available parameters. The
UP/DOWN arrow keys scroll through the options for each parameter. Figure 3-3 is a flow chart that illustrates the
waveforms offered under the MODE command, and the SETUP parameters and values associated with each
waveform.
• MODEM PORT selects either the asynchronous or synchronous data interface for data transmission and
reception. The selections toggle between ASYNC and SYNC when pressing the UP/DOWN arrow keys.
• BIT RATE selects the over-the-air information transmission rate used by the modem. When the modem is
enabled for synchronous data transmission, the over-the-air bit rate command also controls the
synchronous data terminal equipment port rate. In asynchronous mode, the data port rate need not equal
the over-the-air-rate. Table 3-3 lists the modem signals and available bit rates.
• INTERLEAVE is an option for Serial, 4285-C, and 39-Tone mode operation. This determines how much
the data is interleaved in order to reduce errors due to fading and burst noise interference. Using the
interleaving option adds data throughput delay by the times indicated in Tables 3-4 and 3-5. Refer to
Stanag 4285 for the 4285-C mode interleaver throughput time delays.
3-5
RF-5720
OPERATION
In FSK modes, two additional choices are offered under SETUP:
• OFFSET is the first selection displayed (in FSK modes only) when the SETUP key is pressed. A number
from –200 Hz to +200 Hz is displayed to allow the user control in tuning to an incoming RX signal (see
Paragraph 3.7).
• MARK/SPACE frequencies for all FSK modes are displayed in SETUP. FSK-V mode, however, is the
only waveform which allows the user to change the mark and space frequencies.
Table 3-3. Bit Rates
Signal Bit Rates (bps)
SERIAL 75, 150, 300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800 (uncoded)
4285-C (option) 75, 150, 300, 600, 1200, 2400
4285-U (option) 1200, 2400
39-TONE 75, 150, 300, 600, 1200, 2400, 2400 VOICE
FSKNS 75
FSKWS 75, 150, 300, 600
FSK-A 75, 150
FSK-V 75, 150, 300, 600
Table 3-4. Interleaving Time Delays - Serial Mode

Setting Bit Rate Throughput Delay
Zero All rates 0
Short 75 – 2400 bps 1.2 sec
Long 75 – 2400 bps 9.6 sec
Table 3-5. Interleaving Time Delays - 39-Tone Mode

Setting Bit Rate Throughput Delay
LONG 2400 VOICE 0.6 sec
2400 bps-ASYNC 10.1 sec
2400 bps-SYNC 9.9 sec
75-1200 bps 14.1 sec
SHORT 2400 VOICE 0.4 sec
2400 bps-ASYNC 0.34 sec
2400 bps-SYNC 5.1 sec
64-1200 bps 1.7 sec
3-6
RF-5720
OPERATION
3.4.1 Selecting and Modifying Operating Parameters

As shown in Figure 3-3, each waveform selected by the MODE key has unique operating parameters. These can
be viewed by pressing the SETUP key to scroll through the options. The UP/DOWN arrow keys scroll through
the values offered. The SETUP key selects the value displayed and scrolls to the next operating mode parameter.
The ENTR key selects the value and exits SETUP.
Once all the parameters are selected, press the SETUP key to scroll to the operating mode.
3.4.2 MODE/SETUP Example
The following is an example of using the MODE/SETUP keys to select an FSK Wide Shift (FSKWS) signal with
the following parameters:
• Bit RATE – 75 bps
• DTE – SYNC
NOTE
Selected parameters in the display flash during operation. This
manual represents a flashing field in boldface type.
The example begins with the display shown after a zeroize command: (see Paragraph 3.2.2)
SERIAL RX
2400 bps ASYNC
First, the mode of operation must be changed to the selected waveform:
FSKNS RX T0
MODE MODE
75 bps ASYNC
FSKWS RX T0
MODE 600 bps ASYNC
3-9
RF-5720
OPERATION
The mode is now correct. Press SETUP twice to access the working parameter MODEM PORT:
FSKWS RX T0
SETUP SETUP MODEM PORT ASYNC
To select the synchronous port, press the up arrow:
FSKWS RX T0
MODEM PORT SYNC
To enter this value and to proceed to change the bit rate, press SETUP:
FSKWS RX T0
SETUP RATE 600 bps
Use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to scroll through the available bit rate options. Once the desired bit rate is
flashing, press the ENTR key to enter the rate and return to the operate mode:
FSKWS RX T0
ENTR
75 bps SYNC
3-10
RF-5720
OPERATION
3.5 OPERATION USING THE PROGRAM COMMAND

The PRGM key programs not only the operating parameters, but also the data port, configuration, and zeroize
parameters.
3.5.1 Program Levels
The modem has the following three levels:
• Program Group (1st level) – Pressing the PRGM key accesses the MODEM, DATA PORT, CONFIG and
ZEROIZE program groups.
• Operating Parameter (2nd level) – Pressing the ENTR key when a program group is displayed accesses
and allows selection of operating parameters for that program group.
• Parameter Setting (3rd level) – Because Data Port has two operating choices (ASYNC/SYNC), pressing
the ENTR key and then using the UP/DOWN arrow keys allows selection of a third group of parameter
settings. DTE specifications are determined on this level.
Figure 3-4 is a flow chart that illustrates using the program command to enter and access programming levels.
First, the MODE key is used to select the desired waveform. The PRGM key then scrolls through the categories
that can be selected, i.e., MODEM, DATA PORT, CONFIGURATION, AND ZEROIZE.
Each PRGM group has specific levels and specific options. The ENTR key saves the current state and moves one
level greater (i.e., level 1 to level 2). The ENTR key also takes the user out of PRGM mode to the operation
mode, if the highest PRGM level has been achieved (i.e., DATA PORT level 3 to operation).
The CLR key erases the current display and returns to the PRGM level just previous to that selection without
saving changes made to the current display.
Once the desired level is achieved, press the PRGM key to view the options available (i.e., MODEM PORT,
MODEM TYPE, BAUD, etc.). PRGM scrolls through the options and requires that the ENTR or CLR key be
pressed to exit this cycle into a new level.
The UP/DOWN arrow keys are used to view or change the individual option settings in each level, (i.e., ON/OFF,
SHORT/LONG). FSK-V mark and space frequencies can be entered directly using the numbers on the keypad or
the arrow keys.
To exit the programming mode:
• Press the MODE key. (This returns the user to the operating mode.)
• Press any non-significant program key such as MODE, SETUP, ALPHA, SEND, or TEST.
• Press the ENTR key which also takes the user out of PRGM mode to the operation mode, if the highest
PRGM level has been achieved (i.e., DATA PORT level 3 to operation).
3-11
PROGRAM MODE
3-12
PRGM
SERIAL
RF-5720
MODE PRGM MODEM PRGM DATA PRGM CONFIG. PRGM ZERO

OPERATION
PORT
4285-C
(option)
MODE
ENTR ENTR ENTR ENTR

ENT
4285-U R
(option)
MODE
LCD ZEROIZE
ZER-
PORT BACK LIGHT OIZE
TYPE
39 TONE RATE
INTERLEAVE
SYNC PRGM ASYNC
MODE ACQ ON DATA
TX LEVEL
MARK FREQ
FSK NS SPACE FREQ
CLIPPING ENTR ENTR
DIVERSITY
MODE
DOPPLER
CODING
EOM
FSK WS
TX CLK RATE
MODE INPUT BITS
ENTR STOP BITS
PARITY
FLOW
FSK-A ENTR ECHO
MODE
FSK-V ENTR
MODE 5720–025–MP(A)
ENTR
Figure 3-4. Programming Flow Chart

RF-5720
OPERATION
3.5.2 Access Numbers
Each PRGM group has an access number which can be entered from any operation level. For example, assume
the user has selected 39-tone, but would like to change the TX CLK parameter setting. Figure 3-6 illustrates the
level-by-level keystrokes required and also the one-step access number procedure.
Table 3-6 is a reference table listing programming options, level references, and their corresponding access
numbers. Values for each level option are listed on the table along with text references for a description of these
parameters.
The following paragraphs describe the individual parameters offered in program mode, their values, and the Data
Modes in which these are available.
Program displays are level specific. Level 1 has a different LCD display format from those of levels 2 and 3. See
Figure 3-5 for level 1 and level 2 LCD display formats.
LEVEL 1 LEVEL 2
4 1 6 1
4
3 5
11 PRGM 1 12 PRGM MODEM 2

MODEM MODEM PORT ASYNC
2 3 2
1 PROGRAM LEVEL 1 PROGRAM LEVEL
2 PROGRAM GROUP 2 PARAMETER SELECTION
3 ACCESS NUMBER 3 PROGRAM PARAMETER
4 PROGRAM MODE 4 ACCESS NUMBER
5 PROGRAM MODE
6 PROGRAM GROUP
Figure 3-5. LCD Display Format
3.5.2.1 11 PRGM – Modem Group
The MODEM group parameters define modem characteristics under each waveform. Depending upon the
operating mode selected, specific processing parameters are accessed. Most of the choices are toggle ON/OFF
switches. Other options include ASYNC/SYNC specifications, baud rate, and mark and space frequency for
variable FSK. Programmable features in this group are considered advanced programmable functions.
Inexperienced operators should use MODE/SETUP.
3.5.2.2 12 PRGM – Modem Port
MODEM PORT selects either the asynchronous or synchronous data interface for data transmission and
reception. The selections toggle between ASYNC/SYNC when pressing the UP/DOWN arrow keys. A typical
display is shown below.
3-13
RF-5720
OPERATION
PROGRAM GROUP
PROGRAM LEVEL
ACCESS NUMBER
12 PRGM MODEM 2
MODEM PORT ASYNC
SELECTION
PARAMETER
LEVEL ADVANCE
39
TONE
PRGM
MODEM PRGM DATA

PORT
LEVEL 1
ENTR
ASYNC PRGM SYNC

LEVEL 2
ENTR
LEVEL 3 TXCLK
INPUT
ACCESS NO. ADVANCE

TXCLK
39 40 PRGM INPUT
TONE
5720–026–mp
Figure 3-6. PRGM Level Advance vs. Access Number Advance
3-14
RF-5720
OPERATION
Table 3-6. Single-Tone and 39-Tone Program Reference Table

Level Access No. Option Name Value
1 11 MODEM
2 12 MODEM PORT SYNC/ASYNC
3 13 MODEM TYPE SERIAL/4285-C (option)/4285-U
(option)/39-TONE/FSKNS/FSKWS/
FSK-A/FSK-V
2 14 RATE 75, 150, 300, 600, 1200, 2400, 2400
VOICE, 4800
2 15 INTERLEAVE SHORT/LONG/ZERO
2 16 MARK FREQ 350 – 3250 HZ
2 17 SPACE FREQ 350 – 3250 HZ
2 18 CLIPPING ON/OFF
2 19 DIVERSITY ON/OFF
2 20 DOPPLER ON/OFF
2 21 CODING ON/OFF
2 22 EOM ON/OFF
2 23 KEY DELAY 2, 4, 16, 32
2 24 ACQ ON DATA ON/OFF
2 25 TX LEVEL -20 dBm TO 0 dBm
1 30 DATA PORT
2 31 ASYNC PORT
3 32 ASYNC RATE* 75, 150, 300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800,
9600
3 33 BITS 5, 6, 7, 8
3 34 STOP BITS 1, 2
3 35 PARITY NONE/ODD/EVEN
3 36 ASYNC FLOW XON/XOFF/CTS
3 37 ASYNC ECHO ON/OFF
2 39 SYNC PORT
3 40 TXCLK INPUT ON/OFF
1 50 CONFIG ON/OFF/MOMENT
1 99 ZEROIZE ON/OFF
* MODEM RATE may not exceed PORT BAUD. If a MODEM RATE is chosen greater than the PORT
BAUD, the modem will set the RATE = BAUD.
3-15
RF-5720
OPERATION
3.5.2.3 13 PRGM – Modem Type

The MODEM TYPE command is used to select the desired waveform. The modem is capable of supporting
Serial, 4285-C, 4285-U, 39-Tone, and four FSK waveforms. The Stanag 4285 coded and uncoded modes are
available as a firmware option. A typical display is shown below.
PROGRAM GROUP
ACCESS PROGRAM LEVEL

NUMBER
13 PRGM MODEM 2
MDM_TYPE SERIAL
SELECTION
PARAMETER
3.5.2.4 14 PRGM – Rate

BIT RATE selects the information transmission rate used by the modem. When the modem is enabled for
synchronous data transmission, the over-the-air bit rate command also controls the synchronous port data rate. In
asynchronous mode, the data port rate need not equal the over-the-air-rate.
PROGRAM GROUP

NUMBER
14 PRGM MODEM 2
RATE 2400bps
SELECTION
PARAMETER
3.5.2.5 15 PRGM – Interleave

INTERLEAVE is an option for Serial, 4285-C, 4285-U, and 39-Tone modes. The selections are LONG, SHORT,
and ZERO (Serial mode only). The Stanag 4285 coded and uncoded modes are available as a firmware option.
The long setting results in the lowest bit error rate.
3-16
RF-5720
OPERATION
PROGRAM GROUP

NUMBER
15 PRGM MODEM 2
INTERLEAVE LONG
SELECTION
PARAMETER
3.5.2.6 16 PRGM – Mark Frequency

The MARK FREQ function sets the FSK-V programmable mark frequency. It can be set to a frequency between
350 and 3250 Hz with a resolution of 5 Hz. The UP/DOWN arrow keys step the frequency in 5-Hz increments.
PROGRAM GROUP

NUMBER
16 PRGM MODEM 2
MARK 1070
SELECTION
PARAMETER
For any given pair of mark and space frequencies, there is a limit to the baud rate that can be achieved. For a
narrow mark/space frequency separation, a minimum ratio of frequency separation to baud rate should be 67%.
Freq (mark) – Freq (space) (Hz)

> = 67%
Max Data Baud Rate
Therefore, a 300-baud data rate requires a minimum mark/space frequency separation of 200 Hz.
3-17
RF-5720
OPERATION
3.5.2.7 17 PRGM – Space Frequency

The SPACE FREQ function sets the FSK-V programmable space frequency. It can be set to a frequency between
350 and 3250 Hz and is set internally with a resolution of 5 Hz. The UP/DOWN arrow keys step the frequency in
5-Hz increments.
PROGRAM GROUP

NUMBER
16 PRGM MODEM 2
SPACE 1070
SELECTION
PARAMETER
3.5.2.8 18 PRGM – Clipping

The CLIPPING function limits the peak amplitude of the audio signal in 39-tone mode so the HF radio signal can
be maintained at its maximum average power level. During normal operation, clipping is turned on.
PROGRAM GROUP

NUMBER
18 PRGM MODEM 2
CLIPPING ON
SELECTION
PARAMETER
3-18
RF-5720
OPERATION
3.5.2.9 19 PRGM – Diversity

The DIVERSITY functions is available in the 39-tone mode. At data rates of 600 bps or less, two forms of
diversity are available: in-band and time-frequency. Time-frequency diversity provides better performance during
signal fades byt adds delay. Time-frequency diversity is enabled when the DIVERSITY selection is ON. The
Default setting is ON.
PROGRAM GROUP

NUMBER
19 PRGM MODEM 2
DIVERSITY ON
SELECTION
PARAMETER
3.5.2.10 20 PRGM – Doppler

The DOPPLER function is available in the 39-tone mode. It enables and disables a doppler shift correction filter,
providing continuous correction as part of the demodulation process. This may be disabled if frequency errors due
to motion, ionosphere shifts, or frequency standard inaccuracies are not expected to be greater than 2Hz. The
normal selection is ON.
PROGRAM GROUP

NUMBER
20 PRGM MODEM 2
DOPPLER ON
SELECTION
PARAMETER
3-19
RF-5720
OPERATION
3.5.2.11 21 PRGM – Coding

CODING ON/OFF is a test fundtion. The modem should be operated with CODING set to ON.
PROGRAM GROUP

NUMBER
21 PRGM MODEM 2
CODING ON
SELECTION
PARAMETER
3.5.2.12 22 PRGM – EOM

EOM uses an ON/OFF setting. During the transmission of a 39-tone asynchronous transmission signal, the
End-of-Message (EOM) signal indicates a hang up to the receive modem. Without an EOM, the end of
transmission cannot be distinguished from a fading channel and the modem continues to listen although the
transmission is over. The default setting is ON.
PROGRAM GROUP

NUMBER
22 PRGM MODEM 2
EOM ON
SELECTION
PARAMETER
3-20
RF-5720
OPERATION
3.5.2.13 24 PRGM – Acquisition on Data

The ACQ ON DATA feature (in Serial mode only) allows the modem to acquire selection during a data message
without requiring preamble detection. This feature is useful in broadcast systems, and in systems where the
preamble could be missed due to severe channel fading. In very rare cases, the acquisition on data feature may
interfere with the modem’s ability to acquire on an incoming preamble. Setting ACQ ON DATA OFF will only
allow synchronization on preamble.
PROGRAM GROUP

NUMBER
24 PRGM MODEM 2
ACQ ON DATA ON
SELECTION
PARAMETER
3.5.2.14 25 PRGM – TX Level

The modem normally outputs a 0 dBm nominal signal into 600 ohms. If a radio requires a lower input signal
level, use the arrow keys to set a transmit level between –20 dBm and 0 dBm with 2 dBm increments.
PROGRAM GROUP

NUMBER
25 PRGM MODEM 2
TX LEVEL –10 dBm
SELECTION
PARAMETER
3-21
RF-5720
OPERATION
3.5.3 30 PRGM – Data Port

The DATA PORT group parameters define the asynchronous and synchronous DTE interface. This group of
parameters is usually programmed at the time of installation or when a new data terminal, computer, or
cryptographic unit is interfaced to the modem.
To ensure proper data transfer, care must be taken that the modem data port parameters agree and are compatible
with the DTE SETUP parameters.
PROGRAM GROUP

NUMBER
30 PRGM 1
DATA PORT
PROGRAM GROUP
3.5.3.1 31 PRGM – Async Port

ASYNC PORT parameters allows prgramming of the modem’s J2 asynchronous data interface.
PROGRAM GROUP

NUMBER
31 PRGM DATA 2
DATA PORT
PROGRAM GROUP
3-22
RF-5720
OPERATION
3.5.3.2 32 PRGM – Async Rate

ASYNC RATE defines the baud rate that is used to communicate with an external data device via the
asynchronous data port on J2. The interface baud rate can be greater than over-the-air baud rate as defined by the
MODEM RATE command. This allows a lap-top computer (or other data device) to be used as both the remote
control unit and as a data message device.
The asynchronous rate selections in bps are: 75, 150, 300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, and 9600.
It is recommended that the 2400-bps setting is used for the asynchronous interface, since many lap-top computers,
IBM compatible computers, and communication software packages have exhibited problems operating at 4800
and 9600 bps. Long remote control cables (beyond 10 meters) also limit the speed of operation.
Once reliable operation has been confirmed at 2400 bps, higher baud rates can be attempted.
PROGRAM GROUP

NUMBER
32 PRGM ASYNC 3
ASYNC RATE 2400
SELECTION
PARAMETER
3-23
RF-5720
OPERATION
3.5.3.3 33 PRGM – Async Bits

The BITS command sets the number of bits used to define an asynchronous data character. The range of settings
is from 5 – 8 data bits per character, with 8 data bits per character as the default setting.
PROGRAM GROUP

NUMBER
33 PRGM ASYNC 3
BITS 8
SELECTION
PARAMETER
3.5.3.4 34 PRGM – Async Stop Bits

STOP BITS defines the number of bits used to indicate the end of a data character. The stop bits settings are 1 and
2, with 1 being the default setting.
PROGRAM GROUP

NUMBER
34 PRGM ASYNC 3
STOP BITS 1
SELECTION
PARAMETER
3-24
RF-5720
OPERATION
3.5.3.5 35 PRGM – Async Parity

PARITY describes the type of error checking recognized by the modem asynchronous data port. The parity
settings are: NONE, EVEN, and ODD with NONE being the default setting.
PROGRAM GROUP

NUMBER
35 PRGM ASYNC 3
PARITY NONE
SELECTION
PARAMETER
3.5.3.6 36 PRGM – Async Flow

The ASYNC FLOW command enables use of either a data control character (XON/XOFF) or the asynchronous
port Clear to Send (CTS) to control the flow of data to/from the modem. XON/XOFF readies the modem for a
data control character keyup from a terminal. CTS waits for a RTS asynchronous signal from a data device and
then sends a CTS message to the data device announcing its ability to receive data.
PROGRAM GROUP

NUMBER
36 PRGM ASYNC 3
ASYNC FLOW XON
SELECTION
PARAMETER
3-25
RF-5720
OPERATION
3.5.3.7 37 PRGM – Async Echo

The ASYNC ECHO command causes the modem to transmit back (echo) the asynchronous data characters to the
data device. The normal async port echo setting is ON. Consult the data device manual to determine if ECHO is
required.
PROGRAM GROUP

NUMBER
37 PRGM ASYNC 3
ASYNC ECHO ON
SELECTION
PARAMETER
3.5.3.8 39 PRGM – Sync Port

The SYNC PORT function specifies a synchronous interface for the data on the J2 data connector. Several
devices, including facsimile, cryptographic, and secure voice units, require a synchronous data exchange protocol
in which a data clock specifies the data bit transitions.
PROGRAM GROUP

NUMBER
39 PRGM DATA 2
SYNC PORT
PROGRAM GROUP
3-26
RF-5720
OPERATION
3.5.3.9 40 PRGM – TXCLK Input

The TXCLK INPUT function provides two choices: ON/OFF. If TXCLK INPUT is set ON, the DTE must
provide the TX Data Clock clock on pin M of J2. If it is required for the modem to provide the TX Data Clock,
TXCLK Input should be set to OFF, and the TX clock will be sent on pin R of J2.
PROGRAM GROUP

NUMBER
40 PRGM SYNC 3
TX CLK INPUT OFF
SELECTION
PARAMETER
3.5.4 50 PRGM – Configuration

CONFIG currently controls the LCD display back light. The following three selections are available:
• OFF Backlight is OFF.
• ON Backlight is ON.
• MOMENTARY Backlight turns on for 15 seconds after the FUNCTION control is changed or a key is
pressed.
PROGRAM GROUP

NUMBER
50 PRGM 1
CONFIG
PROGRAM GROUP
PROGRAM GROUP

NUMBER
51 PRGM CONFIG 2
LIGHT MOMENTARY
SELECTION
PARAMETER
3-27
RF-5720
OPERATION
3.5.5 99 PRGM – Zeroize
The ZEROIZE command sequence causes the modem to erase all of the programmed parameter and option
settings. This command forces the modem programmable parameters to their default settings as shown in Table
3-7.
PROGRAM GROUP

NUMBER
99 PRGM ZERO 1
ZEROIZE OFF
SELECTION
PARAMETER
Table 3-7. Modem Default Values

Program Group Parameter Default Setting
MODEM RATE 2400
TYPE SERIAL
PORT ASYNC
INTERLEAVE SHORT
ACQ ON DATA ON
CLIPPING ON
DIVERSITY ON
DOPPLER ON
CODING ON
EOM ON
FSK MARK 1070
FSK SPACE 1270
DATA PORT ASYNC RATE 2400
BITS 8
STOP BITS 1
PARITY NONE
FLOW XON
ECHO ON
DATA PORT SYNC TXCLK INPUT ON
CONFIG LIGHT OFF
ZEROIZE OFF
3-28
RF-5720
OPERATION
3.5.6 PRGM Example

There are two methods of programming using the PRGM key. The first is to use the level-by-level keystrokes to
access the program menus. The second way is to use the one-step access number key to enter information. The
examples below show both methods to program a 39-tone waveform with the following specifications:
MODEM PORT ASYNC
MODEM TYPE 39-TONE
Bit RATE 2400
INTERLEAVE LONG
CLIPPING ON
DIVERSITY ON
DOPPLER ON
CODING ON
EOM ON
KEY DELAY 4 (frames)
DATA PORT ASYNC
DATA RATE 2400
BITS 8
STOP BITS 2
PARITY EVEN
FLOW XON
ECHO ON
CAUTION
It is not recommended that the default values of the modem be
modified. Changing some of the obscure default values, i.e.,
coding, diversity, clipping, etc., may result in operational
difficulties or performance degradation. These PRGM examples
are only provided to illustrate the sequence of keystrokes that are
used during programming.
NOTE
Selected parameters in the display flash during operation. This
manual represents a flashing field in bold face type.
3-29
RF-5720
OPERATION
3.5.6.1 Level-by-Level Keystrokes

Using the PRGM, ENTR, and UP/DOWN arrow keys is useful if the operator needs to check on the previous
values that are set for the modem.
The example begins with the display shown after a zeroize command:
SERIAL RX
2400 bps ASYNC
Press PRGM key to begin:
11 PRGM 1
PRGM MODEM
To access the operating parameters under the MODEM program group, press ENTR:
12 PRGM MODEM 2
ENTR
MODEM PORT ASYNC
The default value ASYNC is correct. (Pressing ENTR at this point will move the display to the next level, not to
the next parameter on this level).
The next operating parameter is found by pressing PRGM:
13 PRGM MODEM 2
PRGM MDM_TYPE SERIAL
The default value SERIAL does not meet our specifications.
13 PRGM MODEM 2
MOD_TYPE
39-tone
3-30
RF-5720
OPERATION
The modem type is not set to our specifications.
14 PRGM MODEM 2
PRGM RATE 2400bps
The default value 2400bps meets our specifications.
15 PRGM MODEM 2
PRGM INTERLEAVE SHORT
The default value SHORT does not meet our specifications.
15 PRGM MODEM 2
INTERLEAVE LONG
The interleave value is now set to our specifications.
18 PRGM MODEM 2
PRGM CLIPPING ON
The default value ON meets our specifications.
19 PRGM MODEM 2
PRGM DIVERSITY ON
20 PRGM MODEM 2
PRGM DOPPLER ON
3-31
RF-5720
OPERATION
21 PRGM MODEM 2
PRGM CODING ON
22 PRGM MODEM 2
PRGM EOM ON
The default value ON does not meet our specifications.
22 PRGM MODEM 2
EOM OFF
The EOM is now set to our specifications.
39 TONE RX
ENTR 2400 bps ASYNC
11 PRGM 1
PRGM MODEM
3-32
RF-5720
OPERATION
30 PRGM 1
PRGM DATA PORT
31 PRGM 2
ENTR ASYNC PORT
32 PRGM 3
ENTR ASYNC RATE 2400
33 PRGM ASYNC 3
PRGM BITS 8
34 PRGM ASYNC 3
PRGM STOP BITS 1
The default value 1 does not meet our specifications.
34 PRGM ASYNC 3
STOP BITS 2
The stop bits is now set to our specifications.
35 PRGM ASYNC 3
PRGM PARITY NONE
3-33
RF-5720
OPERATION
The default value NONE does not meet our specifications.
35 PRGM ASYNC 3
PARITY EVEN
The parity is now set to our specifications.
36 PRGM ASYNC 3
PRGM ASYNC FLOW XON
37 PRGM ASYNC 3
PRGM ASYNC ECHO ON
39 TONE RX
ENTR 2400 bps ASYNC
Programming the modem to the specifications set in the PRGM example is now complete.
3-34
RF-5720
OPERATION
3.5.6.2 One-Step Access Number

The second method of programming the modem is to use access numbers. This method is shown below and is a
valuable short cut if the operator knows the specific parameters that need to be changed.
Using the same specifications as shown above, we know that the parameters that need changing are MODEM
TYPE, INTERLEAVE, STOP BITS, EOM, and PARITY.
The example begins with the display shown after a zeroize command:
SERIAL RX
2400 bps ASYNC
To access the MODEM TYPE menu, directly enter the access number (found in Table 3-6).
13 PRGM MODEM 2
A
1 B
C 3
M
N
O
PRGM MDM_TYPE SERIAL
The default value SERIAL does not meet our specifications.
13 PRGM MODEM 2
MDM_TYPE 39TONE
To access the INTERLEAVE menu directly, enter the access number (found in Table 3-6):
15 PRGM MODEM 2
A
1 B
C 5
M
N
O
PRGM INTERLEAVE SHORT
The default value SHORT does not meet our specifications.
15 PRGM MODEM 2
INTERLEAVE LONG
3-35
RF-5720
OPERATION
The same procedure is followed to change STOP BITS (34 PRGM), EOM (22 PRDM), and PARITY (35 PRGM).
When all the programming changes are made, press the ENTR key. The procedure is finished.
11 PRGM 1
PRGM MODEM
3.6 TRANSMITTING THE SIGNAL

Once the modem parameters are set appropriately, transmission is a matter of keying up to the modem. With any
RS-232 device, the modem keys to a Request-To-Send signal and responds with a Clear-To-Send signal when it is
ready to accept data. If the data device is an ASCII terminal or a laptop computer operating in terminal mode,
Control-B and Control-C keys and unkeys the modem, respectively.
3.7 FSK RECEIVE TUNING
FSK waveform mode selections have a receive tuning feature which corrects for frequency offsets caused by
radio reference oscillator inaccuracies. Internally, the modem continually monitors the incoming signal and
displays a T-meter value proportional to the signal energy. The user can manually tune the center frequency in
increments of 10 Hz to maximize the T-meter energy value.
If the radio has a 1-ppm frequency accuracy, then, at a 30-MHz carrier frequency, the modem signal can have a
30-Hz offset. Two radios of this accuracy communicating with each other create a 60-Hz, worst-case frequency
offset.
In order to monitor the tuning adjustment, a tuning scale (T0-T9) is provided. On the display below, the T meter
represents a signal-to-noise ratio. Manual tuning is accomplished using the UP/DOWN arrow keys to adjust the
frequency offset and maximize the T meter reading.
FSKWS RX T1
75 bps SYNC
3-36
RF-5720
OPERATION
While tuning, an arrow appears in the display. This shows the tune offset direction. The T value is constantly
monitored internally and reflects the change as the arrow keys are pressed. The UP/DOWN arrow keys change the
center frequency in 10-Hz increments in each direction.
FSKWS RX ↓ T1
75 bps SYNC
In SETUP mode, the frequency offset (in the range ±200 Hz) can be displayed, but cannot be changed.
FSKWS RX ↓ T9
Offset -100Hz
The CLR button resets the center frequency to nominal by zeroing the frequency offset.
FSKWS RX T1
CLR
75 bps SYNC
3-37
RF-5720
REMOTE CONTROL
SECTION 4
REMOTE CONTROL
4.1 GENERAL
The modem has a remote control feature which allows the user to program all modem and data port parameters.
For this feature to operate, the data terminal equipment (DTE) settings must be matched to the modem (e.g.,
character bits, stop bits, etc.). Once the interface is correct, the modem can be controlled through the data port
from an ASCII terminal or computer terminal.
The modem incorporates HELP and SHOW menus to assist the user. HELP lists all parameters that can be
changed. SHOW lists the parameters and their values as they are currently programmed.
The operator can program the remote control terminal to any number of different settings (i.e., 9600 bps, 8, N, 2)
as long as the modem’s data port is programmed identically. If the remote control terminal is not functioning
properly, it is usually a cable problem or a parameter setup mismatch.
When the modem is in remote control mode (RMT) and the modem is operating asynchronously, the operator can
key and unkey the modem by typing Control-B and Control-C respectively. After keying the modem manually in
this fashion, the operator can send a data file to the modem’s DTE port for transmission. After transmitting the
message, typing Control-C unkeys the modem. Alternatively, the operator can insert a Control-B character and a
Control-C character at the beginning and end of the file to be transmitted. Transferring such a file to the modem’s
DTE port will key the modem, transmit the ASCII asynchronous data file, and subsequently unkey the modem.
Certain parameter values have limited ranges, and some parameter values are fixed. If remote control commands
attempt to change fixed parameters or exceed the acceptable range of limited parameters, the modem ignores the
command, as shown below:
RMT>modem type fskws
Modem Type FSKWS
RMT>modem rate 1200
** ERROR **
Modem Rate 600 bps
RMT>
The modem substitutes the closest available rate to the one requested by the modem rate command (600 is the
highest rate that FSKNS can achieve).
Remote configuration commands (commands that change parameters) can be issued without their associated
configuration parameter. When this is done, the modem returns the status associated with the command, as shown
below:
RMT>modem rate
Modem Rate 600 bps
RMT>
When the modem is keyed, only the HELP and SHOW commands are valid. The modem responds with an error
message if a configuration command is entered while the modem is keyed.
4-1
RF-5720
REMOTE CONTROL
4.2 DATA TERMINAL EQUIPMENT INTERFACE CRITERIA

Remote control commands are interfaced through the DATA J2 connector on the modem. A text-like ASCII
protocol is used for remote control syntax. Since the ASCII remote control protocol is generated by the modem, a
simple ASCII terminal with an RS-232 interface will suffice as a remote terminal. Alternatively, several
communication terminal emulation programs, such as PROCOMM™, CROSSTALK™, and RELAY GOLD™
can be used with a personal computer to interface with the modem, if desired.
Section 3 discusses programming the modem. If the interface parameters have been changed for any reason, they
must be reprogrammed to match the DTE’s requirements.
To match the DTE interface parameters with the DATA PORT default parameters in the modem, the DTE must be
programmed as follows:
BAUD: 2400
Character Bits: 8
Stop Bits: 1
Parity: NONE
Flow: XONxoff
Echo: ON
The user may set up the DTE interface differently (i.e., BAUD rate = 4800), but this change must also be made in
the modem via the front panel controls.
Personal computers may need additional interface criteria. If applicable, set the following parameters:
Terminal Emulation: VT100
Duplex: HALF
Flow Control: XON
CR Translation (in): CR
CR Translation (out): CR
Line Wrap: OFF
Connection Type: Direct
4-2
RF-5720
REMOTE CONTROL
4.3 REMOTE CONTROL CABLE

The pin out requirement for a remote control cable is shown below in Figure 4-1.
Refer to the asynchronous modem-to-DTE cable (10284-0704) found in Appendix A for a detailed description of
a remote control or asynchronous DTE cable.
RS-232
RF-5720 DTE
CHASSIS GND F SHIELD
GND J GND
TXD ASYNC K TXD
RXD ASYNC N RXD
5720–040–mp
Figure 4-1. Remote Control Cable
4-3
RF-5720
REMOTE CONTROL
4.4 SHOW (SH) AND HELP (HE OR ?) MENUS

Figures 4-2 through 4-9 show examples of the SHOW and HELP menus. The SHOW function displays the
current values that the menu has stored. HELP lists the commands and values that the modem accepts from the
remote terminal.
In the help menus, remote control commands and parameters are listed with certain letters in caps. These are the
minimum number of characters necessary to enter a command or parameter. For example, the SHOW command
can be entered by typing “SH”.
RMT> SHow
Key Off
Modem Port ASYNC
Modem Type SERIAL
Modem Rate 2400
Offset: +00Hz FSK MODES ONLY
RMT>
5720–027
Figure 4-2. Show Menu
4-4
RF-5720
REMOTE CONTROL
RMT> MOdem SHow
Modem Type SERIAL

Modem Port ASYNC
Modem Rate 2400 bps
Modem Interleave SHORT
Modem Acquire On Data ON
Modem Tx Level 0 dBm
RMT>
5720–041(A)
Figure 4-3. Single-Tone (Serial) Modem Show Menu
RMT> MOdem SHow
Modem Type 39TONE

Modem Port ASYNC
Modem Rate 2400 bps
Modem Interleave SHORT
Modem Clipping ON
Modem Doppler ON
Modem Coding ON
Modem EOM ON
RMT>
5720–028(A)
Figure 4-4. 39-Tone Modem Show Menu
4-5
RF-5720
REMOTE CONTROL
RMT> MOdem SHow
Modem Type FSKV

Modem Port ASYNC
Modem Rate 300 bps
Modem Mark 1070
Modem Space 1270
RMT>
5720–029(A)
Figure 4-5. FSK Modem Show Menu
RMT> SYnc SHow

or
RMT> ASync SHow
Async Rate 2400

Async Bits 8
Async Stop Bits 1
ASync Parity NONE
Async Flow XONXOFF
Async Echo ON
Sync Tx clk OUTPUT
RMT>
5720–030
Figure 4-6. Async and Sync Show Menu
4-6
RF-5720
REMOTE CONTROL
RMT> HElp
ASync – async command

FTune – +/–/0
LIght – (ON/OFf/MOmentary)
MOdem – modem command
SHow – show status
SYnc – sync command
TEst – performs self test
ZERO – clear all RAM storage
HElp or ? – display this list
Sample Command: RMT> light off
RMT>
5720–031
Figure 4-7. Help Menu
RMT> MOdem HElp
Modem commands consist of the following, preceded by MOdem
POrt – ASync/SYnc
TYpe – SErial/4285-C/4285-U/39tone/FSKWs/FSKNs/FSKA/FSKV
RAte – 75/150/300/600/1200/2400/VOICE/4800
INterleaving – LOng/SHort/ZEro
ACqondata –ON/OFf
TXlevel – 0/-2/-4/-6/-8/-10/-12/-14/-16/-18/-20
MArk – 350-3250
SPace – 350-3250
CLipping – ON/OFf
DIversity – ON/OFf
DOppler – ON/OFf
COding – ON/OFf
EOm – ON/OFf
SNr – display receive SNR
SHow – show status
Sample Command: RMT> modem rate 600

RMT>
5720–032(A)
Figure 4-8. Modem Help Menu
4-7
RF-5720
REMOTE CONTROL
RMT> ASync HElp
Async commands consist of the following, preceded by Async:
RAte – 75/150/300/600/1200/2400/4800/9600
BIts – 7/8 (character length)
STopbits – 1/2 (stop bits)
PArity – NOne/ODd/EVen
FLow – XOnxoff/CTs
ECho – ON/OFf
SHow – show sync and async status
Sync commands consist of the following, preceded by SYnc:
TXclock – INput/OUtput
SHow – Show sync and async status
Sample Command: – RMT> async parity none
RMT>
5720–033(A)
Figure 4-9. Async and Sync Help Menu
NOTE
Remote control operation does not allow setting the bits per
character parameter to 5 or 6 since this would no longer allow
ASCII remote control.
4-8
RF-5720
THEORY OF OPERATION
SECTION 5
THEORY OF OPERATION
5.1 INTRODUCTION
This section describes the modem theory of operation for its three primary modes of operation (i.e., single-tone,
39-tone, and FSK), followed by descriptions of the major assemblies.
The modem is designed to overcome the problems which limit the rates at which data may be passed over an HF
radio link. Typically, HF radio data links have been confined to low data rates and are subject to high error rates.
The modem overcomes the problems presented by fading, multipath propagation, and interference on HF
channels.
Figure 5-1 is a simplified block diagram of the modem. Although this figure and the details in this section apply
directly to the MIL-STD-188-110A single tone waveform, some concepts also apply to the optional Stanag 4285
coded and uncoded waveforms. For more information about these waveforms, refer to Stanag 4285.
5.2 SINGLE-TONE THEORY OF OPERATION
Figure 5-2 is a functional block diagram for the single-tone modulator. This mode uses M-ary phase shift keying
(PSK) of a single carrier frequency (1800 Hz) as the modulation technique to transmit data. Data accepted at the
modem’s input is converted to a single M-ary PSK-modulated output carrier. Modulation of the carrier frequency
occurs at a constant 2400 M-ary symbols per second rate regardless of the data throughput rate. Data rates of 75,
150, 300, 600, 1200, 2400, and 4800 bits per second (bps) are allowed. The waveform has four transmission
phases:
• Synchronization Preamble Phase
• Data Phase
• End of Message Phase
• Coder and Interleaver Flush Phase
5.2.1 Synchronization Preamble Phase
The synchronization preamble phase lasts 0.6 seconds for zero and short interleaving and 4.8 seconds for long
interleaving. During this phase, the switch positions shown on Figure 5-2 are in the following positions:
• S1 – Unknown data
• S2 – Sync
• S3 – Sync
• S4 – Through (output)
During the preamble phase, the transmitted waveform consists of either three or twenty-four 200 millisecond
segments of sync data. Each 200 millisecond segment contains a known sequence of data representing a
synchronization sequence, and variable data, representing the data rate, interleaver settings of the transmitting
modem, and count data that specifies how many 200 millisecond segments have yet to be transmitted before the
end of the preamble phase.
5-1
RF-5720
THEORY OF OPERATION
5.2.2 Data Phase

During the data phase, the transmitted waveform contains both message information (unknown data) and channel
probes (known data); i.e., training bits reserved for channel equalization by the receiving modem. The switches of
Figure 5-2 are in the following positions:
• S1 – Unknown data (DTE data)
• S2 – Toggles between unknown data and known data positions
• S3 – Unknown data (DTE data)
• S4 – Through (output)
The rate at which S2 toggles depends on the data rate. Thus, the length of the known data sequences (probes) and
unknown data sequences (message data) depends on the data rate.
5.2.2.1 Forward Error Correction in Single-Tone Mode
A 1/2 rate convolutional code is used to provide Forward Error Correction (FEC) on all DTE data rates except
4800 bps, when no coding is used. The convolutional coder block diagram is shown in Figure 5-3. Table 5-1
shows the transmitted data rates after FEC and Repeat Coding (if any) are applied to the DTE message data.
Table 5-1 shows that the modulation changes with the DTE data rate. In fact, 75 bps mode uses an entirely
different data transmission mode, known as spreading.
Figure 5-4 shows the PSK phase angles used to send 3 bits per symbol (8-ary), 2 bits per symbol (4-ary), and 1 bit
per symbol (2-ary). The data patterns transmitted by the phase angle are shown in parentheses.
Interleaving depths of duration, 0, 0.6, and 4.8 seconds, are used to separate adjacent FEC output bits. Separating
adjacent FEC output bits, in time, increases the receive modem’s tolerance to burst noise and fading on the
channel. The increased tolerance to burst noise and fading comes at the expense of throughput delay times. The
throughput delay time is roughly twice the interleaver delay time, since the receiving modem incurs the same
delay while deinterleaving. Therefore, zero, short, and long interleaving will add 0.0, 1.2, and 9.6 seconds to the
inherent buffering delays in the transmit and receive modems.
5-2
RF-5720
THEORY OF OPERATION
EOM
SEQUENCE
SYNC
PREAMBLE
ZERO UNKNOWN SEQUENCE SYNC
(FLUSH) DATA
INTERLEAVE
S1 MATRIX #1
S2
MODIFIED–
FEC GRAY SYMBOL
ENCODER DECODER FORMATION
(MGD)
INTERLEAVE
MATRIX #2 UNKNOWN
DATA KNOWN
DATA
(PROBE) S4
SCRAMBLER
SCRAM- MODULATOR OUTPUT
BLER
INTERLEAVE
LOAD
S3
DATA SYNC
DATA DATA
INTERLEAVE SEQUENCE SEQUENCE
FETCH RANDOMIZING RANDOMIZING
GENERATOR GENERATOR
5720–010–mp
Figure 5-2. Single-tone Waveform Functional Block Diagram
Table 5-1. Error-Correcting Coding

DTE Data Encoder
Rate Rate Coding Modulation
4800 4800 None 8-ary
2400 4800 1/2 Rate 8-ary
1200 2400 1/2 Rate 4-ary
600 1200 1/2 Rate 2-ary
300 1200 1/2 Rate, Repeated 2 times 2-ary
150 1200 1/2 Rate, Repeated 4 times 2-ary
75 150 1/2 Rate, Spread 8-ary
5-5
RF-5720
THEORY OF OPERATION
T1 (x)
SWITCH RATE
= TWICE INPUT
SYMBOL RATE
1 (x) OUTPUT
X6 X5 X4 X3 X2 X1 X0
INPUT
T2 (x)
CONSTRAINT LENGTH = 7
GENERATOR POLYNOMIALS:
FOR T1 X6 + X4 + X3 + X1 + X0
FOR T2 X6 + X5 + X4 + X3 + X0
5720–011–mp
Figure 5-3. Convolutional Coder Block Diagram
5-6
RF-5720
THEORY OF OPERATION
90°
( 01 )
2 (010)
135° 45°
1 (001)
3 (011)
( 1 ) ( 0 )
( 10 ) ( 00 )
4 (100) 0 (000)
180° 0°
7 (111)
5 (101)
225° 315°
( 11 )
6 (110)
270°
LEGEND:
0° . . . 315° = PHASE (DEGREES)

0 . . . 7 = TRIBIT NUMBERS
(000) . . . (111) = THREE-BIT CHANNEL SYMBOLS
(00) . . . (11) = TWO-BIT CHANNEL SYMBOLS
(0) . . . ( 1 ) = ONE-BIT CHANNEL SYMBOLS
5720–012–mp
Figure 5-4. State Constellation Diagram
5-7
RF-5720
THEORY OF OPERATION
5.2.2.2 Interleaving in Single-Tone Mode
The concept behind interleaving is as follows: Imagine that the message, “We hold these truths to be
self-evident,” is to be transmitted. At the modulator, the interleaver begins by loading the message into the
columns of a matrix, with the result shown in Figure 5-5. Subsequently, it reads out the message by rows, with the
following result:
W-TTETRO-HU-HETBOSHELES-D--S
At the demodulator, the process is reversed. The deinterleaver loads by rows and reads out by columns. The
original message will be received correctly, if there are no transmission errors. However, there will be a delay in
recovering the message because each matrix has to be filled before the message can be passed on.
Suppose now that a disturbance on the channel wipes out the entire first row of the matrix, producing the
following four-character error cluster:
XE-HOLD X TH/ESE-XRUTHS/-XO-BE-S
(where the errors are indicated by X)
With a convolutional code, all of the above errors can be corrected. Without interleaving, four errors would be
close together and could not be corrected.
The interleaving factor F is equal to the number of columns in the interleaving matrix (F = 4 in the matrix of
Figure 5-5). The delay incurred in the interleaving process increases with F and can approach 10 seconds at the
maximum value of F in the modem. The modem provides a means for eliminating the interleaving delay by
setting F = 1 (zero interleaving.)
LOAD
SEND W – T T
E T R O
– H U –
H E T B
O S H E
L E S –
D – – S
5720–013–mp
Figure 5-5. Interleaving Matrix
5-8
RF-5720
THEORY OF OPERATION
5.2.2.3 Gray Decoding

Gray decoding is the process of changing data symbols to reduce bit errors involving adjacent phase shifts. Data
symbols for 2400 bps and 4800 bps are 3-bits long while data symbols for 1200 bps are 2-bits long (Gray
decoding is not performed below 1200 bps). Normally a data symbol of 001 would be phase shifted 45° while 010
is shifted 90° . If these two symbols are transmitted immediately following each other (adjacent phase shifts), the
same selective fading that causes and error in one will most likely cause an error in the adjacent shift. By
changing (gray decoding) the adjacent shifts of similar data symbols, we can reduce the number of errors. Tables
5-2 and 5-3 indicate the coding for 2400/4800 and 1200 bps.
Table 5-2. Coding for 2400/4800 bps

Input Bits Coded Bits
000 000
001 001
010 011
011 010
100 111
101 110
110 100
111 101
Table 5-3. Coding for 1200 bps

Input Bits Coded Bits
00 00
01 01
10 11
11 10
5.2.2.4 Symbol Formation

The output data from the Grad Decoder is them “mapped” into one-, two- or three-bit channel symbols,
determined by the bps speed. The symbols are then scrambled with pseudorandom three-bit numbers.
5.2.2.5 Scrambling
the data is scrambled with pseudorandom numbers that are produced by a data sequence randomizing generator.
The purpose of scrambling the data is to prevent loss of data “sync” during periods of constant transmission of
“1s” or “0s”. For example, the constant transmission of “1s” would cause the same phase shifted signal to be
output. This constant phase output can produce clock drifting and make it difficult to detect symbol boundaries.
5-9
RF-5720
THEORY OF OPERATION
5.2.3 End of Message (EOM)
The third phase of a modem transmission is the End-of-Message phase. Removing the DTE Request-To-Send
signal signifies the end of the message. When the last DTE message bit (unknown data) enters the Forward Error
Correction (FEC) encoder, S1 in Figure 5-2 is switched to the EOM position. A fixed 32 bit End-of-Message
pattern is sent to the FEC encoder. The receiving modem always searches for this message and stops
demodulating after detecting the EOM pattern.
5.2.4 Interleaver Flush
Although the EOM can occur at any time in the transmission, it is likely to occur while the interleaver matrix is
only partially full. The interleaver flush phase simply makes sure that a complete interleaver matrix is transmitted
at the end of a message.
5.2.5 Demodulation
The Harris demodulation method has been patented and it is considered proprietary. Functionally, single-tone
demodulation attempts to estimate the HF channel transfer function (characteristics) during the known data
periods, and removes these effects from the transmitted message data in the unknown data periods. This is called
channel equalization. Harris has patented a very effective algorithm called Data Directed Equalization (DDE).
Removing the HF channel effects effectively increases the signal-to-distortion ratio and improves the performance
of the modem. The Forward Error Correction coding and repeat code (at 150 and 300 bps) are used to remove any
symbol errors not removed by the channel equalization.
5.2.6 Automatic Bit Rate Detection
Data transmitted during the preamble and periodically throughout the message conveys the data rate and
interleaver settings of the transmitting modem. This information allows automatic data rate detection at the
receiver. The receiving modem automatically changes the DTE data rate to match the detected data rate. The only
exception to this rule occurs in asynchronous mode where the DTE rate is never changed. If the detected data rate
exceeds the asynchronous DTE rate, data will eventually be lost. After receiving the message, the receiving
modem returns to the original (programmed) bit rate.
5.2.7 Automatic Interleaving Detection
The transmitting modem can select zero, short, or long interleaving. The receiving mode will automatically
distinguish between short and long, OR zero and long interleaving. Unfortunately, there is not enough information
in the transmitted waveform to distinguish among all three possible interleaver settings. The programmed
interleaver setting, at the receiving modem, determines the auto-interleave operation as shown below:
Receive Modem’s Auto-Interleave

Interleaving Setting Ability
Zero Long or Zero
Short Long or Short
Long Long or Short
5.2.8 Signal-to-Noise Ratio Display
The receiving modem will display a measured signal-to-noise ratio (SNR) while actually demodulating a serial
mode message. For data rates from 150 bps to 4800 bps, the maximum SNR display is 23. For 75 bps mode, the
maximum SNR display varies between 7 and 8 (for the optional 4285-C and 4285-U waveforms at all data rates,
the maximum SNR display is 23). Actual SNR values equal to, or above these maximum display values, will
result in essentially 0 errors.
5-10
RF-5720
THEORY OF OPERATION
5.2.9 Acquisition on Data

The modem is capable of acquiring synchronization on a transmitted message during the preamble phase or
during the data phase. Thus, if a severe noise burst or a severe channel fade occurs during the preamble, causing a
missed acquisition, the modem can acquire during the data phase. The time required to acquire depends on the
channel conditions and the SNR. Typically, the modem will acquire in 10s of seconds (long interleave). The
acquisition on data feature can be disabled within the MODEM control group using the PRGM key on the front
panel. Similarly, the remote control command MODEM ACQ ON (OFF) will enable/disable this feature. In very
rare cases, the Acquisition on Data feature may interfere with the modem’s ability to acquire on an incoming
preamble. The modem may miss an acquisition on preamble if it is in the process of acquiring on data.
5.2.10 Stanag 4285 Single Tone Waveform (option)
The Stanag 4285 coded and uncoded waveforms are available as a modem option. These waveforms include the
following features:
• Robust HF modem performance (coded mode)

• Coding, interleaving, SOM, and EOM, as defined in Stanag 4285 ANEX E (coded mode)
• Patented Data Directed Equalization demodulation
• Effective narrow band interference filtering
• Quick synchronization at any point in the message
• Minimal end-to-end throughput delay (uncoded mode)
• Continuous SNR estimates available on front panel and remote port during receive
For more information, refer to Stanag 4285.
5.3 39-TONE THEORY OF OPERATION
The microprocessor-based architecture of the modem combines phase shift keying with digital signal processing,
Forward Error Correction (FEC), data interleaving, and inband diversity to achieve high data rates and minimize
errors.
Figure 5-6 illustrates the modulation and demodulation functions. Modulation begins with the reception of a serial
data stream from the Data Terminal Equipment (DTE). The DTE can be a teletypewriter, voice digitizer, facsimile
unit, or any other device compatible with an EIA RS-232.
FEC codes are calculated and added to the incoming data stream. The data and FEC bits are organized in a matrix.
The matrix configuration allows adjacent groups of data bits to be redistributed in time to reduce burst errors.
This process is called interleaving, and is described in more detail in Paragraph 5.3.5.
The actual modulation is performed by high-speed microprocessors. The digital signal processing produces a
string of 12-bit words that are converted to an audible signal. The audio signal is transmitted to the receive site
and demodulated.
Demodulation recovers the transmitted data from the received audio signal. Like modulation, the actual
demodulation is a digital process. The received audio signal is sampled at a rate of 7200 samples-per-second to
generate a string of 12-bit words that digitally represent the audio signal. The digital signal processing includes
frequency correction calculations and the actual demodulation. A major portion of the demodulation is a lengthy,
continuous calculation called a Fast-Fourier Transform. This calculation recovers phase-shift information that
yields the received data. The interleaving matrix created during the modulation process is reconstructed to put the
data bits in their original order. The FEC code is evaluated and data errors are corrected before the data is sent to
the receiving DTE in a serial stream.
5-11
RF-5720
THEORY OF OPERATION
5-12
RF-5720
THEORY OF OPERATION
5.3.1 39-Tone Modulation
The modulation method employed in 39-tone mode is a type of Phase-Shift-Keying (PSK). PSK shifts a
sinusoidal wave in time to represent a binary data bit. The shift is measured in degrees. The form of PSK used in
the modem is called Time Differential Quaternary Phase Shift Keying (TDQPSK). With this form of PSK, an
individual wave can be shifted by 45, 135, 225, or 315 degrees. With four possibilities, each phase shift can be
used to represent one of four unique two-bit combinations, as listed below:
Phase Shift Data

45 10
135 00
225 01
315 11
The phase shift of a tone must be measured against some reference. In the modem, the phases of individual tones
are changed at regular intervals. The time segments between phase changes are called frames. The phase shift of a
signal in a frame is measured against the position of the signal in the previous frame. Thus the shift becomes time
differential. The fundamentals of TDQPSK are illustrated in Figure 5-7.
The modulated signals in the modem are audible tones. The modem generates, modulates, and broadcasts 39
tones simultaneously. The 39 tones are all whole-integer harmonics of the 56.25 Hz fundamental. This separates
the tones enough to minimize interference while limiting the total bandwidth to 3 kHz. The 39 tones are listed in
Table 5-4. An unmodulated tone at 393.75 Hz is generated and broadcast by the modem to be used for frequency
correction (see Paragraph 5.3.3).
TDQPSK allows each tone to carry two data bits. 78 data bits can be included in each frame. With a frame length
of 22.5 milliseconds, the modem achieves a baud rate of 3466 bits-per-second. FEC reduces the effective data rate
to 2400 bits-per-second.
Tone generation, phase modulation, and signal mixing are done digitally. The digital signal processes are based on
an algorithm called the inverse Fast-Fourier Transform. A digital-to-analog conversion is used to generate the
composite audio signal.
5.3.2 Demodulation
Demodulation is the process of recovering data from the received audio signal. This is done digitally in the
modem. The actual demodulation is preceded by a frequency correction routine to eliminate any error introduced
during transmission. An algorithm based on the Fast-Fourier Transform is used to separate the 39 tones and
determine their phase shifts.
The Fast-Fourier Transform is a mathematical tool used in digital signal processing to convert a variable of time
into a variable of frequency spectrum including the 39 tones listed in Table 5-4. The relative phase of each tone is
expressed as the position of a vector on a coordinate system, where the axes are I and Q. The modulation process
uses four-phase shifts, each separated by 90°. The demodulation process only needs to determine the quadrant of
the signal vector to retrieve the data, as illustrated in Figure 5-8. Confidence values are computed for each bit and
are a function of amplitude and angle. For fixed amplitude, the I data bit confidence value reaches its maximum
for vector positions of 90 and 270 (see Figure 5-7), while the Q data bit confidence value reaches its minimum. At
0 and 180, the roles of the I bit and Q bit are reversed.
The retrieved data is interleaved to reposition the bits in their original order, and run through an FEC routine,
before being sent to the receiving DTE.
5-15
RF-5720
THEORY OF OPERATION
HSM–013
Figure 5-7. TDQPSK Fundamentals
5-16
RF-5720
THEORY OF OPERATION
Table 5-4. 39-Tone Library

Tone Harmonics Frequency (Hz)
0 7 393.75
1 12 675.00
2 13 731.25
3 14 787.50
4 15 843.75
5 16 900.00
6 17 956.25
7 18 1012.50
8 19 1068.75
9 20 1125.00
10 21 1181.25
11 22 1237.50
12 23 1293.75
13 24 1350.00
14 25 1406.25
15 26 1462.50
16 27 1518.75
17 28 1575.00
18 29 1631.25
19 30 1687.50
20 31 1743.25
21 32 1800.00
22 33 1856.25
23 34 1912.50
24 35 1968.75
25 36 2025.00
26 37 2081.25
27 38 2137.50
28 39 2193.75
29 40 2250.00
30 41 2306.25
31 42 2362.50
32 43 2418.75
33 44 2475.00
5-17
RF-5720
THEORY OF OPERATION
Table 5-4. 39-Tone Library (Cont.)

Tone Harmonics Frequency (Hz)
34 45 2531.25
35 46 2587.50
36 47 2643.75
37 48 2700.00
38 49 2756.25
39 50 2812.50
– I, + I,
+Q +Q
–I I
– I, + I,
–Q –Q
–
Q
I Q ANGLE DATA
+ + 45° 1 0
– + 135° 0 0
– – 225° 0 1
+ – 315° 1 1
HSM–014–mp
Figure 5-8. Vector Representation of Phase Shift
5.3.3 Frequency and Frame Synchronization

A two-part preamble is used to synchronize the sending and receiving units at the beginning of each transmission.
The first part of the preamble is used by the receiving unit to correct for frequency errors. Frequency errors can be
introduced by vehicle motion, shifts of the ionosphere, or by the radio equipment. Since the modulated tones are
only 56.25 Hz apart, frequency shifts can cause data errors. Part two of the preamble establishes frame
synchronization.
The part one preamble is characterized by the presence of four unmodulated tones at 787.5, 1462.5, 2137.5, and
2812.5 Hz. This part of the preamble lasts for the equivalent of 14 frames or 315 milliseconds. Upon recognizing
this pattern, the receiving unit initiates an algorithm that can correct for frequency errors up to 75 Hz. The
frequency correction is done digitally and is illustrated in Figure 5-9.
5-18
RF-5720
THEORY OF OPERATION
The principle behind the correction can be demonstrated mathematically for a single received tone S(t). The
received signal can be expressed as:
S(t) = COS (ωS + ωE)t
where ωS is the signal frequency and ωE is the error frequency.
The Hilbert transform is a digital signal processing algorithm that produces a –90 phase shift of the received
signal. The shifted signal S(t) can be expressed as:
S(t) = SIN (ωS + ωE)t
By mixing S(t) with COS (–ωEt) and S(t) with SIN (–ωEt), and combining the results, the error is eliminated to
yield the corrected signal y(t); where:
y(t) = [S(t) COS (–ωEt)] – [S(t) SIN ωEt)] = COS (ωEt)
The same process is performed continuously during the data transmission using the 393.75-Hz doppler tracking
tone as a reference. The modem can correct for shifts up to 3 Hz per second.
The second part of the preamble establishes the frame boundaries. Part two of the preamble is characterized by
the presence of three biphase modulated tones at 1125.0 Hz, 1800 Hz, and 2475.0 Hz. The phase of each tone
alternates between two angles. The receiving unit looks for the phase shift and uses this to locate the frame
boundary.
The signal at the frame boundaries may be unstable due to multipath distortion. The receiving modem splits the
received signal into periods based on the frame boundaries. A guard time of 4.7 milliseconds separates the
integration time periods of two adjacent frames, as illustrated in Figure 5-10. During the guard time phase shift,
information is ignored by the modem. Frequency and phase shift calculations are performed on the signal
received during the integration time.
The preamble is followed by a single frame containing all 39 tones. This frame is used by the receiving modem to
establish an initial phase reference for each tone. Table 5-5 lists the length of the normal acquisition preambles.
HSM-015
Figure 5-9. Frequency Correction
5-19
RF-5720
THEORY OF OPERATION
Table 5-5. Normal Acquisition Preamble Length (Seconds)

Preamble Time Duration
Phase 1 (dop- Phase 2 Phase 3
Mode pler) (sync) (reference) Total
Normal 0.315 0.1800 0.0225 0.5175
HSM–017
Figure 5-10. Frame Boundaries
5-20
RF-5720
THEORY OF OPERATION
5.3.4 Forward Error Correction (FEC) Code in 39-Tone Mode

FEC involves encoding data at the sending station so the receiving station can correct errors introduced during
transmission. The FEC code is derived from, and therefore reflects, the bit pattern in the data stream. Once
computed, this code is inserted into the data stream by the sending unit. The receiving unit computes code bits for
the received data and compares them to those computed by the sending unit. Differences in the codes calculated at
the sending and receiving end of the link are used to locate and correct data errors.
The modem employs a Reed-Solomon code. To implement this, the data stream is divided into four-bit segments
called symbols. At the 2400 bit-per-second rate, the Reed-Solomon (14, 10, 2) code is used. This means that at
this data rate the data is organized into code words 14 symbols long. Each code word has ten data symbols and
four code symbols. Two symbol errors in each received code word can be corrected.
At data rates of 1200 bits-per-second and below, the Reed-Solomon (7, 3, 2) code is employed. In this version, the
code words are seven symbols long, with three data symbols and four code symbols. Two symbol errors in each
word can be corrected.
The Reed-Solomon code is a systematic block code. The code words are always the same length, and the code
symbols follow the data symbols in each word. The code is non-binary with symbols of fixed length to help guard
against burst errors.
A synchronizing sequence is inserted into the data stream so the receiving unit can detect word boundaries.
5.3.5 Interleaving in 39-Tone Mode
Between the encoding and modulation operations, the binary signal undergoes an interleaving process in which
adjacent symbols are intermixed and distributed in time in a systematic way. This produces no net change in
transmission rate, although it may introduce a substantial delay depending on the interleaving factor. Interleaving
enhances the ability of the decoder to correct errors arising from localized channel disturbances, such as short
fades or lightning activity. Between the demodulation and decoder, a deinterleaving process restores the received
data signal to its original order, thereby breaking up error clusters and distributing the damaged symbols over
several code words. The power of the decoding process will then be sufficient to correct many of the errors,
because the number of errors in each code word is small.
The purpose of interleaving is to break up error clusters in the received data. The principle of operation is as
follows:
Imagine that the message “We hold these truths to be self-evident” is to be transmitted. At the modulator, the
interleaver begins by loading the message into the columns of the matrix, with the result shown in Figure 5-11.
Subsequently, it reads out the message by rows, with the following result:
W-TTETRO-HU-HETBOSHELES-D--S.
At the demodulator, the process is reversed. The deinterleaver loads by rows, and reads out by columns. The
original message will be received correctly if there are no transmission errors. However, there will be a delay in
recovering the message because each matrix has to be filled before the message can be passed on.
Suppose now that a disturbance on the channel wipes out the entire first row of the matrix, producing the
following four-character error cluster:
XE-HOLD X TH/ESE-XRUTHS/-XO-BE-S
(where the errors are indicated by X)
Breaking up the message into groups of ten characters, as in the case of a (14, 10, 2) code, no code word contains
more than two errors; all of the above errors can be corrected. Without interleaving, four errors would occur in the
first code character, and could not be corrected.
5-21
RF-5720
THEORY OF OPERATION
The interleaving factor F is equal to the number of columns in the interleaving matrix (F = 4 in the matrix of
Figure 5-11). The delay incurred in the interleaving process increases with F, and can approach 10 seconds at the
maximum value of F in the modem. The modem provides a means for eliminating the interleaving delay by
setting F=1.
LOAD
SEND W – T T
E T R O
– H U –
H E T B
O S H E
L E S –
D – – S
5720–013–mp
Figure 5-11. Interleaving Matrix
5.3.6 Diversity in 39-Tone Mode

Diversity in the modem refers to sending and/or receiving data by more than just one path. Inband diversity is
used in the modem. Inband diversity is the process of modulating more than one tone with the same data.
For inband diversity, each bit of data is modulated onto two to 16 different tones, depending upon the baud rate.
The diversity factors are listed in Table 5-6. Two forms of inband diversity are available: frequency and
time/frequency diversity. This type of diversity is automatically activated when speeds of 600 bps or less are
selected. In frequency diversity, the tones which carry the redundant data are all transmitted within the same
symbol interval. In time/frequency diversity, the redundant tones are transmitted on different frequencies as well
as over successive symbol intervals, thereby achieving a time spread for added protection during fading. For most
types of HF channel conditions, the time/frequency diversity will yield improved performance over the standard
frequency diversity mode, although it will add some additional delay as shown in Table 5-6.
5-22
RF-5720
THEORY OF OPERATION
Table 5-6. Diversity Factors

Additional Delay
Data Rate Diversity Factor (Time/Frequency Mode only)
2400 1 0
1200 1 0
600 2 180 ms
300 4 293 ms
150 8 338 ms
75 16 360 ms
5.3.7 Signal Clipping in 39-Tone Mode

The audio output of the modem may be clipped to improve the system performance by limiting the peak-to-RMS
ratio of the signal. The output signal is made up of 39 tones with equal amplitudes and resembles band-limited
white noise. Periodic high peaks of this signal can be clipped without affecting the performance of the modem.
Limiting the peak-to-RMS ratio of the audio signal allows the power output of the HF transmitter to be increased.
The added RF signal strength improves system performance.
Clipping is part of the digital signal processing and is enabled or disabled at the front panel. When clipping is
enabled, the baseband peak-to-average ratio is maintained at 7 dB.
5.3.8 Keyline Control
A keyline signal is available on the radio interface connectors for controlling the HF transmitter and receiver.
Since the transmitter may require some time (from keyline assertion) before it can properly transmit, the modem
waits for a selectable interval (the keyline delay) following the assertion of the keyline before enabling the
modulator output. If necessary, the modem holds off assertion of CTS to assure that no data is lost during this
keyline/audio delay.
5.4 BINARY FSK THEORY OF OPERATION
In FSK mode, the modem can interoperate with existing binary FSK modulator/demodulators. Mark and space
frequency selections from 350-3250 Hz (5 Hz resolution) are accommodated.
5.4.1 FSK Modulation
As shown in Figure 5-12, external data enters the modem through Interface Assembly A5. Interface Assembly A5
then strips the start and stop bits from the incoming data and sends data-only packets through the FEC Assembly
to MOD/DEMOD Assembly A3A2. For an asynchronous signal, the start and stop bits are inserted on the
MOD/DEMOD software for transmission. In synchronous mode, MOD/DEMOD Assembly A3A2 takes data
from the FEC Assembly and, based upon its transmit clock, feeds the data to the FFT Assembly.
In FSK mode, the FFT Assembly sends mark or space tones based on data from the MOD/DEMOD. A system
RAM, shared by A3A2 and A3A2A1, provides data and command status from the MOD/DEMOD. A transmit
clock is generated by counting samples at the FSK sampling rate of 14.4 kHz. This clock is used to drive the
software USART on the MOD/DEMOD.
5-23
RF-5720
THEORY OF OPERATION
5.4.2 FSK Demodulation

Receive data is reconstructed in the FFT Assembly by the processing shown in Figure 5-12. The method of
waveform sampling depends on the DATA PORT, (sync or async).
In asynchronous mode, a free-running oscillator follows the incoming signal. At the point of data transition,
(1-to-0 or 0-to-1), samples are taken at exactly one-half the baud period or the center of integration where the
energy is the greatest. This sampling technique continually resyncs upon each transition to provide sampling at
the peak energy point on the waveform.
To ensure that an encrypted synchronous signal is sampled properly, a much gentler sample locater is used. In the
sync mode, another free-running oscillator compares its counter with the transition of the signal. It corrects itself
by adding one to the counter valve if the receive clock is behind the signal, and subtracts one if ahead. If the
clocks are in sync, the offset counter is not adjusted. This approach reduces clock jitter that could cause operation
problems when providing a clock to a synchronous data device.
Unlike 39-tone demodulation, which incorporates the Fast-Fourier Transform (FFT), the FFT Assembly performs
the integration process using the algorithm shown in Figure 5-13.
The signal in, labeled S(t) in Figure 5-13, is multiplied by SIN ωmark (t), COS ωmark (t), SIN ωspace (t), and
COS ωspace (t). The mark and space signals are integrated, squared, summed, then square rooted. This gives the
energy of each of the mark and space signals.
Two decisions occur at this point. The first is simply the sum (Emark + Espace) for signal presence. The second
decision is the difference (Emark-Espace). A positive output identifies the signal as Emark and a negative output
as Espace.
The difference decision is combined with a threshold tracking input derived from the difference between a single
waveform peak and valley. The sum of the energy difference and threshold tracker is the data value.
This decoded data is passed from the FFT Assembly through the MOD/DEMOD and FEC PWBs, to the Interface
Assembly where the data is then sent to the DTE.
5.5 MAJOR ASSEMBLIES
The following paragraphs outline the data paths on each assembly. Table 5-7 lists the individual assemblies and
their functions. The microprocessors are identified and their specific functions are highlighted. 39-tone function is
distinguished from FSK functions, as are transmit and receive data paths.
5-24
5720–015
Figure 5-12. FSK Modulation and Demodulation
5-25
THEORY OF OPERATION
RF-5720
RF-5720
THEORY OF OPERATION
5720–016
Figure 5-13. FSK Integration
5-26
RF-5720
THEORY OF OPERATION
Table 5-7. Major Assemblies and Their Functions

Ref. Assembly Functions
A1 Black Power Supply External voltage source is EM filtered and regulated.
Outputs are +5 V, ±6.5 V, ±12 V System Clock. Power
on/low power resets.
A2 Matrix Processors Future Option
A3A1 FFT Assembly TMS320C51 and DSP56156 based. Performs FFT, inv
FFT and Hilbert Xfm. Mod/demod in FSK and serial
mode. 32044C-performs ADC, DAC, LPF, sin(x)/X
filtering.
A3A2 MOD/DEMOD Assembly Performs mod and demod 39-tone processing.
Generates preamble in 39-tone mode.
A3A2A1 FEC Assembly Performs FEC encoding and decoding, interleaving
and deinterleaving.
A4 Red Power Supply Future Option
A5 Interface Assembly 80C31 controls a DUSART for parallel-serial and
serial-parallel interfacing 1 kHz tone generator, plain
text activity monitor, TX and RX muting.
A6 Front Panel Controller Reads front panel keys, updates display.
A7 Digital Voice Module Future Option
A8A1 Front Panel Assembly Radio I/O, Audio/Fill I/O, Keypad I/O
A8A2 Front Panel Filter J1 and J2 filters
A8A3 LCD Liquid Crystal Display
A8A4 Keypad Alphanumeric Input
A11 Encryption Assembly Future Option
5.5.1 Power Supply Assembly A1

A Power Supply Assembly (A1) is included within the modem unit; Figure 5-14 is the block diagram of the
Power Supply Assembly. The assembly has three functions to the modem unit operation:
• Provides +5 V, 12 V and +6.5 V
• Provides System Clock
• Provides Power On/Low Power Resets

Switching Regulator U4 controls transformer power switches Q1 and Q2. The switching regulator, running at a
rate of 200 kHz, switches the transformer to produce +6.5 V, +5 V, and 12 V outputs. These outputs are EMI
filtered to eliminate switching noise.
The System Clock output at 19.2 MHz runs directly to the FEC PWB within the modem module. It is here that a
System Clock Divider provides 1.2 MHz and 9.6 MHz outputs.
A Power On Reset Circuit (U5 and U8) monitors the 5-volt output. U5 will hold the reset line low until the +5 V
supply line reaches 5 volts for 200 milliseconds. At this time, the reset is removed, but the output is continually
monitored by the low power reset circuit U8. If the voltage drops below 4.5 V, the reset activates, until the power
level returns to +5 V.
5-27
5-28
RF-5720
THEORY OF OPERATION
5720–017
Figure 5-14. Power Supply Assembly A1

RF-5720
THEORY OF OPERATION
5.5.2 Matrix Processor Module A2 – Future Option

The modem is designed to accept a two-printed-wiring-board assembly for future waveform capabilities. An
electrical interface is provided in the A2A1 and A2A2 slots of the modem chassis.
5.5.3 Modem Module
The modem module contains an FFT Assembly, a MOD/DEMOD Assembly, and an FEC Assembly (see Figure
5-15). The modem module is responsible for all transmit and receive signal processing.
5.5.3.1 FFT Assembly A3A1
The FFT Assembly contains an Analog Interface Chip (AIC) that performs analog-to-digital conversion (ADC),
digital-to-analog conversion (DAC), low pass filtering (LPF), and sin(x)/x filtering. The AIC accepts a sample
clock from a phase locked loop on the FEC PWB (A3A2A1). A multiple DAC is used to apply receive signal
automatic level control. Two DSP processors (TMS320C51 and DSP56156) are used as necessary for signal
processing tasks described below as a function of the waveform used.
In single-tone mode, this module performs all the transmit and receive processing. The convolutional encoding,
Viterbi decoding, modulation, demodulation, equalization, acquisition, and tracking processes are divided equally
between the two DSP processors shown in Figure 5-15.
In 39-tone mode, this module performs the FFT for receive, in inverse, FFT for transmit, and the Hilbert mixing
to adjust for frequency offset in receive mode.
In FSK mode, this module performs all modulation and demodulation processes.
5.5.3.2 MOD/DEMOD Assembly A3A2
As shown in Figure 5-15, this assembly contains an 80C186 operating at 19.2 MHz, RAM, ROM, and a 2Kx16
Dual Port Ram (DPRAM) that interfaces to FFT Assembly A3A1. In single-tone mode, this processor simply
passes data to and from the FFT Assembly. In 39-tone mode transmission, the 80C186 performs the TDQPSK
modulation process. In receive 39-tone mode, the 80C186 controls the demodulation processing. In FSK mode,
the 80C186 passes data between FEC Assembly A3A3 and FFT Assembly A3A1. Its only function here is to add
start and stop bits to FSK TX data previously stripped on the FEC Assembly.
5.5.3.3 FEC Assembly A3A2A1
This assembly contains an 80C31, RAM, ROM, 1Kx8 DPRAM, (to interface with the 80C186 on A3A2), a
phase-locked-loop (PLL) clock generator and a clock divider (see Figure 5-15). Reed Solomon Coding and data
interleaving are performed by the 80C31 in 39-tone mode transmission. In single-tone mode and FSK-V mode,
this processor simply passes data to and from Interface Assembly A5. During the 39-tone receive processing, the
80C186 encodes the Reed Solomon code word and deinterleaves the data.
5-29
FEC PWB A3A2A1 MOD/DEMOD PWB A3A2 FFT PWB A3A1
5-30
RF-5720
32KX8
32KX8 OR 32KX8 64KX8
SRAM 64KX8 SRAM EEPROM
EPROM
32KX8 32KX8
THEORY OF OPERATION
OR OR 32KX8 64KX8 64KX16

64KX8 64KX8 SRAM EEPROM SRAM
EPROM EPROM
16 16 16 16
HSSB 1KX8 320C51
8 DUAL 8 16 16
8031 2KX16
PORT
RAM DUAL DR DX
INT PORT
RAM 8
16
ANALOG
INTERFACE
CHIP
SAMPLE CLOCK GENERATOR
1.2
MHz 80C186 DR DX
AIC CLK PGA MULT
PLL VCO . + AIC +
DAC – –
RX TX
DMA AUDIO AUDIO
AIC CLK
FEEDBACK LOOP
2KX16
DUAL DSP56156
16 1.2 MHz PORT
19.2 MHz RAM
2 9.6 MHz
SYSTEM CLOCK DIVIDER

64KX16
SRAM
5720–018–mp(a)
Figure 5-15. Modulator/Demodulator Assembly A3
RF-5720
THEORY OF OPERATION
5.5.4 Interface Module

5.5.4.1 Interface Assembly A5
Interface Assembly A5 passes data from outside the modem to and from internal assemblies. Data coming from
the front panel is RS-232 level shifted before entering the DUSART (see Figure 5-16). Asynchronous data is level
shifted on the front panel. Synchronous data is level shifted in U9. The micro-controlled Dual Universal
Synchronous/Asynchronous Receiver-Transmitter (DUSART U10) performs serial-to-parallel and
parallel-to-serial data conversion for both sync and async data.
The DUSART is not a stand-alone chip and must be accompanied by a microprocessor U1. U1 passes data to and
from the Modem Assembly via the High Speed Serial Bus, HSSB.
A 1 kHz tone generator U13 is provided on this module. Its main function is as an error indicator during Built-In
Testing (BIT) and non-BIT operation.
Mute switches are provided to TX audio (U11) and RX audio (U12). Plain Text (PT) and Cypher Text (CT)
switching is also included on this module for application with the ENCRYPTION future option. Testing is applied
here to assure proper plain text audio or cypher text audio transmission. The presence of either at the improper
time indicates a compromise of information, and the TX or RX would cease.
5.5.5 Front Panel Controller Assembly A6
Front Panel Controller Assembly A6 has two primary functions: to provide an interface with the operator via the
front panel controls and LCD, and to store program data in non-volatile RAM and transfer this data to other
assemblies within the modem, as needed.
As shown in Figure 5-17, U1 controls all functions on the front panel controller. U1 is supported by address/data
demultiplex latch U2, program memory U3, and battery backed-up RAM U4. A watchdog timer, U6, is provided
to assert the RESET line to U1 in the event that U1 does not send a continuous string of pulses to U6 within
certain time limits.
Front Panel Controller Assembly A6 communicates with modules other than Front Panel Assembly A8 via the
high speed serial bus (HSSB). Front Panel Assembly A6 data and control line interface is divided between the
output latch U7 and port pins on U1. These lines provide control of the LCD, as well as keypad and function
control information to Front Panel Controller Assembly A6.
5.5.6 LPC-10E Digital Voice Module Option A7
The A7A1 and A7A2 slots are provided with an electrical interface that accepts a digital voice module. The
digital voice module provides two voice-mode data rates: DOD standard LPC-10E (Version 52) at 2400 bps, and a
proprietary 800 bps for more robust operation. The modem has been designed with a handset interface that
provides analog I/O for digital voice operation. The digital voice option, combined with the ENCRYPTION
option, provide secure voice transmission and reception.
5-31
5-32
RF-5720
THEORY OF OPERATION
5720–019
Figure 5-16. Interface Assembly A5

5720-020
Figure 5-17. Front Panel Controller Assembly A6
5-33
THEORY OF OPERATION
RF-5720
RF-5720
THEORY OF OPERATION
5.5.7 Front Panel Module A8

The front panel contains four assemblies. These assemblies control data/audio I/O, user I/O, keypad I/O, and
display.
5.5.7.1 Front Panel Assemblies
Figure 5-18 is a block diagram of the front panel.
Keypad Assembly A8A4 is continuously monitored for activity. Once activity is detected, the 20-position keypad
information is encoded and sent in a serial format to Front Panel Controller Assembly A6. The front panel
controller updates the display information and sends it serially to the Front Panel LCD Assembly.
J1 and J2 are the audio/fill and data connectors, respectively. Both sets of signal lines are filtered on Filter
Assembly A8A2. Transmit (TX) and receive (RX) data/control signals are level shifted on either Front Panel
Assembly A8 or Interface Assembly A5 from RS-232 level to TTL level. Interface Assembly A5 has a dual
USART for monitoring and controlling these signals to create an RS-232 data communication protocol.
An audio/fill detection circuit determines if a fill device or handset is attached to the J1 connector. If a fill device
is attached, the fill data is level shifted and sent to the ENCRYPTION PWB (if present). Handset microphone
transmit audio is preamplified and sent to Interface Assembly A5 for further gain control and/or audio switching.
TX audio returns from A5 and passes through a modem/plain text switch into the radio transmit audio circuitry,
where it can be sent directly to the radio.
Microphone audio is transmitted if the handset keyline is detected. Modem signals are transmitted if the RS-232
Request-to-Send (RTS) signal is detected. Receive audio is always sent through volume control circuits to the
handset connector J1.
A mode control is provided to select plain text (PT), cypher text (CT), remote (RMT), load (LD), and zeroize (Z)
functions. If ENCRYPTION is not installed, only plain text and remote are supported. The mode control is
monitored and encoded similar to the keypad, and mode control data is sent to Front Panel Controller Assembly
A6.
The radio connector J3 is a filtered connector that is driven by transmit and receive 600-ohm interface circuitry.
Figure 5-19 illustrates system audio routing between the Front Panel, Interface, and ENCRYPTION Assemblies.
5-34
ENCRYPTION ASSY
5720-021
Figure 5-18. Front Panel Module Assembly A8
5-35
THEORY OF OPERATION
RF-5720
5-36
RF-5720
FILL A8 A5 A11
DETECT TX MUTE
SWITCH FILL LOGIC SWITCH
LEVEL SHIFTER
FILL
HANDSET GAIN
MICRO-
PHONE AUDIO MICROPHONE
PREAMP TX MUX
& FILL DATA ON/OFF
JUMPER W/O
TX TONE ENCRYPTION SWITCH
THEORY OF OPERATION
ON/OFF
SWITCH
PT/CT
OUTPUT SWITCH
DRIVER
PT
TX AUDIO +
600 OHMS
MATCHING MODEM
TO RADIO –
PT
ACTIVITY
DETECT LPC TX
TX MODEM TONE
ON/OFF AUDIO
AUDIO FROM 1 KHz INPUT
FFT (A3A1) TONE
GENERATOR
AUDIO/FILL EARPHONE
DETECT AMPLIFIER
SWITCH VOLUME CONTROL
TX SIDETONE
AUDIO
HANDSET
EARPHONE FILL
RX MUTE
ON/OFF
LOGIC SWITCH
RX AUDIO RADIO RX AUDIO PT/CT

FROM RECEIVE MUTE TO HANDSET SWITCH
RADIO DRIVER
+ 600 OHMS
MATCHING
–
RX MODEM
AUDIO TO LPC RX AUDIO
FFT ASSY OUTPUT 5720-022
(A3A1)
Figure 5-19. Modem System Audio Routing

RF-5720
MAINTENANCE
SECTION 6
MAINTENANCE
6.1 INTRODUCTION
Advanced hardware and software design techniques have been used in the modem to minimize regular
maintenance and simplify troubleshooting procedures. The Built-In Test (BIT) feature can be used to quickly
identify and replace faulty modules in the field.
The use of high-speed microprocessors and complex programming makes troubleshooting to the component level
difficult even when the proper test equipment is available. Therefore, we recommend that a spares program be
developed through Harris Corporation.
6.1.1 Protection of Static-Sensitive Devices
Diode input protection is provided on all CMOS devices. This protection is designed to guard against adverse
electrical conditions such as electrostatic discharge. Although most static-sensitive devices contain some
protective circuitry, several precautionary steps should be taken to avoid the application of potentially damaging
voltages to the inputs of the device.
To protect static sensitive devices from damage, the following procedures should be followed:
a. Keep all static-sensitive devices in their protective packaging until needed. This packaging is conductive
and should provide adequate protection for the device. Storing or transporting static-sensitive devices in
conventional plastic containers could be destructive to the device.
b. Disconnect power prior to insertion or extraction of sensitive devices. This also applies to PWBs
containing such devices.
c. Double-check test equipment voltages and polarities prior to conducting any tests. Verify that no
transients exist.
d. Use only soldering irons and tools that are properly grounded. Ungrounded soldering tips or tools can
destroy these devices. SOLDERING GUNS MUST NEVER BE USED.
e. Avoid contact with the leads of the device. The component should always be handled very carefully by
the ends or the side opposite the leads.
f. Avoid contact between PWB circuits or component leads and synthetic clothing.
6.2 BIT/BITE DESCRIPTION AND USE
The BIT feature of the modem can be used to quickly identify and replace faulty modules. BIT automatically runs
when the front panel TEST key is pressed. The front panel alphanumeric display displays fault messages, listing
the faulty module and a specific fault code that describes the detected fault.
The BIT routine has two phases. During Phase I, each microprocessor-based module performs its own self-test,
including RAM/ROM tests and on-board loopback tests (when applicable). During Phase II, all inter-module tests
are performed, verifying functional module interface circuitry. Errors are reported back to Front Panel Controller
Module A6 which feeds the fault information to the LCD display.
When multiple faults occur, only the first reported fault is displayed. If no faults are detected, the BIT process
takes approximately 15 seconds to complete and the LCD display will read SELF TEST PASSED. Any key may
be pressed to exit BIT.
6-1
RF-5720
MAINTENANCE
NOTE
BIT routines are not executed upon power up. The TEST key
must be pressed to initiate BIT.
Assembly numbers and locations are shown in Figure 6-1. Fault codes are listed in Table 6-1.
2550
A1 POWER SUPPLY - 2200
5720-034
Figure 6-1. Modem Assembly Locations
6-2
RF-5720
MAINTENANCE
Table 6-1. Modem Fault Codes

Module Code Fault Code Description
Modem Module A3 01 Communication Fault
1F FEC ROM Fault
20 FEC RAM Fault
21 FEC DPRAM Fault
22 MDM Communications Fault
23 MDM/FEC DPRAM Fault
24 MDM/FFT DPRAM Fault
25 80186 ROM Fault
26 80186 RAM Fault
27 Sample Clock Fault
30 FFT Communication Fault
31 FFT DPRAM Fault
32 FFT ROM Fault
33 FFT XRAM Fault
34 FFT ADC Loop Fault
35 Canned FFT Fault
40 DSP56156 Communication Fault
41 DSP56156 Dual Port RAM Fault
42 DSP56156 SRAM Fault
43 TMS320C51 Dual Port RAM Fault
Interface Assembly A5 01 Communications Fault
02 ROM Failure
03 Internal RAM Failure
04 External RAM Failure
05 Async Serial Comm Control Fault
06 Sync Serial Comm Control Fault
07 Tone Generator Fault
08 Tone Detect Fault
09 Other Tone Detect Fault
Front Panel Controller Assembly 02 Internal RAM Fault
03 PROM Fault
044 External RAM Fault
6-3
RF-5720
MAINTENANCE
6.3 TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDELINES

Most major failures are detected and reported by BIT. If a fault code is displayed, the faulty module must be
located and removed. The following steps outline this procedure. Note that each module has specific instructions
for removal; refer to section 6.5.
Perform the following procedure to replace a failed module:
a. Turn the MODE control to the OFF position.
b. Remove the battery or RF-5720PS Power Supply (10284-6000) to expose the rear panel of the modem.
c. Remove the chassis cover by unscrewing the slotted guide pins on the rear panel of the modem (see
Figure 6-2), and sliding the outer chassis away from the front panel.
d. Unscrew the six (6) screws on the inner chassis cover and remove the top cover to expose the modules.
e. Refer to the Paragraph 6.5 to remove and replace the defective module.
f. Check the cable dressing of the interior chassis to ensure that all cables are in the appropriate chassis
chamber. If a ribbon cable is left draped over one of the chassis walls, the cable will be pinched between
the wall and the cover. This will damage the cable. (See Figure 6-3 for an example of proper cable
dressing.)
g. Replace module extraction tool in the A4 cavity.
h. Replace the interior chassis cover by tightening the six (6) captive screws.
i. Replace the external cover and tighten the slotted guide pins on the rear panel.
j. Replace the NICAD battery or power supply.
k. Turn the POWER control to PT (plain text).
l. Push the TEST key to verify that self-test now works.
BATTERY
GUIDE
PIN
BATTERY
GUIDE
PIN
5720–035–mp
Figure 6-2. Modem Rear Panel
6-4
RF-5720
MAINTENANCE
A1
MODULE
HEATSINK SCREWS
5720–036–mp
Figure 6-3. Proper Cable Dressing
6.4 REQUIRED TOOLS AND TEST EQUIPMENT
Table 6-2 lists the tools and test equipment necessary for module-level maintenance of the RF-5720 Modem.
Refer to subsections 6.5 – 6.12. Table 6-3 is the parts list for the RF-5720 Site Spares Kit, which is recommended
for field repairs of the RF-5720.
Table 6-2. Required Tools and Test Equipment

Description Model Number
#2 Flat-Blade Screwdriver
#1 Phillips-Head Screwdriver
Digital Multimeter Fluke 860A or Equivalent
Oscilloscope Tektronics 2220 (60 MHz) or Equivalent
6-5
RF-5720
MAINTENANCE
Table 6-3. RF-5720 Site Spares Kit Parts List (1001-0853 Rev. –)
Ref. Desig. Part Number Description
–– 10284-2000 FRONT PANEL ASSY
–– 10284-2200 ASSY, BLK PWR SUPPLY
–– 10284-2420 MOD/DEMOD PWB
–– 10284-2430 FEC PWB ASSY
–– 10284-2550 PWB ASSY, FFT DSP
–– 10284-2610 INTERFACE
–– 10284-2700 FP CONTROLLER
–– 10284-5700 PWB ASSY,INTERCONNECT BD
–– 10284-6000 BATTERY ELIMINATOR ASSY
6.5 MODULE AND FRONT PANEL REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES

The following sections will provide step-by-step instructions for removing and replacing the modem PWB
modules.
6.5.1 Removal and Replacement of the A6, A5 and A3A1 Modules
Perform the following procedure to remove and replace the A6, A5, and A3A1 modules:
a. Detach the ribbon cable from the faulty module by carefully pulling the ribbon cable from the connector
on the module.
b. Disconnect the faulty module from the motherboard by using the module extraction tool stored in the A4
module cavity. (See Figure 6-1.)
1. Note the orientation of the module within the chassis cavity.
2. Insert the extraction tool in the appropriate hole of the A8 motherboard (see Figure 6-1), and push
gently until the connector releases the module. (See Figure 6-4 for example of extraction tool in
use.)
3. Pull the disconnected module out of its chassis cavity by its edges. Be sure not to handle the faces of
the PWBs.
c. Insert the replacement module with the same orientation as noted above. Gently press the module down
into the motherboard until the connector is fully engaged.
WARNING
Do not force the module into the chassis, since this may damage
the motherboard connector.
d. If the module does not engage easily, remove the module and repeat step c. Refer to Paragraph 6.5.4 if the
module consistently resists insertion.
e. Once the replacement module is connected, attach the ribbon cable to the module. Be sure to place the
ribbon cable between the module and the chassis wall.
6-6
RF-5720
MAINTENANCE
6.5.2 Removal and Replacement of the A1 Module

Perform the follow procedure to remove and replace the A1 module:
a. Remove the four (4) screws and washers that secure the heatsink to the chassis (see Figure 6-3).
b. Use the module extraction tool to disconnect the A1 module from the motherboard.
c. Remove cable P1 from connector A1J1 and slide A1 out of the chassis.
d. Insert the A1 replacement half-way into the chassis.
e. Reattach cable P1 (removed in step b), and replace A1 as described in Paragraph 6.5.1, step c.
f. Replace the heatsink screws and lockwashers.
6.5.3 Removal and Replacement of the A3A2/A3A2A1 Module
Perform the following procedure to remove and replace the A3A2/A3A2A1 module:
a. Remove the A3A2/A3A2A1 module from the motherboard. This is a piggyback module which contains
the A3A2 PWB and A3A2A1 PWB. In order to replace either PWB, the entire module must be
disconnected from the motherboard.
b. Remove the three (3) nylon screws holding A3A2 and A3A3 together (see Figure 6-5).
c. Replace the faulty module and reinstall the three (3) nylon screws.
d. Insert the module into the chassis and into its motherboard connector, as described in Paragraph 6.5.1,
step c. Be sure the A3A2 board is installed next to the A3A1 module.
6-7
RF-5720
MAINTENANCE
MODULE
EXTRACTION
TOOL
A3A2/A3A2A1
MODULES
A3A2
MOTHERBOARD
HOLE
5720–037–mp
Figure 6-4. Module Extraction Tool
6-8
RF-5720
MAINTENANCE
MODULE
MOUNTING
SCREWS
A3A2A1
MODULE
A3A2
MODULE
5720–038–mp
Figure 6-5. A3A2/A3A2A1 Mounting Screws
6.5.4 Replacing the Motherboard A9A2
Perform the following procedure to remove and replace the A9A2 motherboard:
a. Remove all the modules using the module extraction tool.
b. Remove six (6) screws and lockwashers which mount the motherboard to the internal chassis.
c. Install the replacement motherboard, but do not completely tighten the six (6) screws.
d. Install the A3A1 and A6 modules.
e. Do not force A3A1 and A6 to engage with the motherboard connectors. Adjust the position of the
motherboard to allow easy connector mating.
f. Tighten the six (6) screws after A3A1 and A6 have mated properly with the motherboard.
g. Install the remaining modules and their respective cables.
h. Continue with Paragraph 6.3, steps f through k.
6-9
RF-5720
MAINTENANCE
6.5.5 Removal and Replacement of Front Panel Assembly A8

Perform the follow procedure to remove and replace the front panel:
a. Carefully disconnect the ribbon cables running from the front panel to modules A6, A5 and A3A1.
b. Remove the four (4) screws holding the Front Panel Assembly to the interior chassis and pull the front
panel away from the modem.
c. Install the replacement front panel.
6.6 FAULT ISOLATING POWER SUPPLY A1
BIT does not test Power Supply Module A1 for proper voltages or for the system frequency references; however,
a fault on this assembly is easy to detect.
Before assuming a power supply failure, test the modem’s NICAD battery or other power source for 10 to 32
Vdc. If adequate voltage is supplied to the modem, proceed with the following tests.
A symptom of a power supply module failure is the lack of LCD display upon power up of the modem.
If the display does not operate, attach the handset, place the MODE control in the PT position, set the VOLUME
control to maximum, and press the handset keyline.
Speaking into the microphone should provide audio to the earpiece. If not, A1 should be replaced. (Refer to
Paragraph 6.5.2.)
6.7 FAULT ISOLATING FRONT PANEL ASSEMBLY A8
BIT does not test all elements of the front panel. If the display works and self-test passes, the following procedure
can verify a front panel module failure.
a. Keyline Detection Test
1. Attach a handset to the J1 AUDIO/FILL connector.
2. Press the PTT keyline.
3. Verify that RX changes to MIC on the display.
b. Audio Output Test
1. Set the VOLUME control to maximum.
2. Press the handset PTT and speak into the microphone.
3. Verify audio sidetone at the earpiece.
c. J3 Audio Output
1. With the MODE control in the PT position, press the handset PTT.
2. Speak into the microphone.
3. Verify audio output on pins D and F of the J3 radio connector with an oscilloscope.
d. Keypad Test
1. Test all keypad functions and verify that the display changes appropriately for each keypad entry.
6-10
RF-5720
MAINTENANCE
e. Mode Switch Test
1. The display should show NOT INSTALLED when the MODE control is in the CT, LD, or Z
positions.
2. The display should show --REMOTE-- on the bottom line of the LCD display when the MODE
control is in the RMT position.
f. Radio Receive Path Test
1. With the mode switch in the PT position, connect a 1000 Hz, 0 dBm, 600 ohm signal into pins B and
E of the J3 radio connector. This should result in 1000-Hz audio at the handset earpiece.
2. Pressing the handset PTT should remove the earpiece audio.
If the display does not work, but the audio tests pass, the front panel must be replaced.
If the display does not work and none of the above tests pass, a power supply failure or an external power source
failure should be suspected.
6.8 TROUBLESHOOTING POWER SUPPLY A1
The following sections contain information on step-by-step instructions for troubleshooting Power Supply A1.
There are no fault codes for A1, and these procedures have been provided to allow the user to isolate faulty
components on this PWB.
6.8.1 No +5 or +12 Volts Present at P1
If there is no +5 or +12 V present at the output of connector P1, use the following steps to isolate the problem.
a. Ensure the MODE control is not in the OFF position.
b. Using a multimeter, check the voltage at A1J1 pins 3 and 5 for 10 – 32 Vdc with respect to ground.
1. If this voltage is not present at A1J1 pins 3 and 5 and the dc power source is active, an EMI filter
inside the 10284-5629 filter box is burned out.
c. If this voltage is present at A1J1 pins 3 and 5, check T1-2 for the same voltage. If the voltage is not
present at T1-2, the fuse F1 should be changed.
1. If the F1 fuse is blown repeatedly, Q1, Q2, or both may need to be replaced.
2. If the voltage is present at T1-2, check T1-1 or T1-3 with an oscilloscope. There should be a
switching waveform present which has a frequency of approximately 200 kHz. The waveform
should also have an amplitude from 0 V to 2 x (dc voltage measured at A1J1-3 and A1J1-5).
3. If the waveform at T1-1 and T1-3 is present, check C18 or C19 for 5 volts.
4. If 5 volts is not present at C18 or C19, check the cathode of CR10 for 5 – 15 volts.
5. If the voltage is not present at CR10, check T1-4 or T1-6 for the waveform seen at T1-1 (step d).
This waveform appears above and below ground equally.
6. If the waveform at T1-4 is present, replace CR10.
7. If the waveform at T1-4 is not present, replace T1.
6-11
RF-5720
MAINTENANCE
d. If the voltage is not present at T1-2, check U4-13 and U4-16 for pulse trains of approximately 100 kHz
with an amplitude from 0 V to at least 8 V.
1. If the signal is present at U4-13 and U4-16, Q1 and Q2 and their associated circuits should be
suspected.
2. If the signal is not present at U4-13 and U4-16, check U4-17 for at least 8 V with respect to ground.
3. If U4-17 is at least 8 V, check that U4-15 measures 0 V with respect to ground.
4. If U4-15 has the same voltage as A1J1, replace R20.
5. If U4-17 ≥ 8 V and U4-15 = 0 V, replace U4.
6. If no voltage is present at U4-17, check the the collector of Q5 for a voltage near that of A1J1.
7. If the voltage at Q5-C = A1J1, replace Q5.
8. If Q5-C has no voltage, check the anode of CR1 or CR9 for 1.5 volts or less.
9. If the anode of CR1 or CR9 has 1.5 volts or less, replace Q3.
10. If the anode of CR1 or CR9 has greater than 1.5 volts, replace CR1 and CR9.
6.8.2 No –12 Volts Present at P1
If there is +5 V and +12 V, but no –12 V at the output of connector P1, use the following procedure to
troubleshoot A1.
a. Use a multimeter to check that the negative terminal C25 is equal to –14 V or more with respect to
ground.
1. If the voltage at C25 ≤ -14 V, replace U1.
2. If there is no voltage at C25, use an oscilloscope to check T1-7 or T1-9 for a switching waveform
with a frequency of approximately 200 kHz, an amplitude that measures equally above and below
ground and that is equal to 4 x (dc voltage at A1J1-3 and A1J1-5).
3. If the waveform at T1-7 or T1-9 is present, replace CR5, CR8, or L5.
4. IF the waveform at T1-7 or T1-9 is not present, replace T1.
6.8.3 No +12 Volts Present at P1
If there is +5 V and –12 V but no +12 V at the output of connector P1, use the following procedure to
troubleshoot A1.
a. Use a multimeter to check that the positive terminal of C23 ≥ +14 V.
1. If the voltage at C23 ≥ +14 V, replace U2.
2. If there is no voltage, use an oscilloscope to check T1-7 or T1-9 for a switching waveform with a
frequency of 200 kHz, an amplitude that measures equally above and below ground and that is equal
to 2 x (dc voltage at A1J1-3 and A1J1-5).
3. If the waveform is present at T1-7 or T1-9, replace CR6, CR7, or L4.
4. If the waveform is not present at T1-7 or T1-9, replace T1.
6-12
RF-5720
MAINTENANCE
6.9 TROUBLESHOOTING MODEM MODULE A3

Fault codes and troubleshooting procedures associated with Modem Module A3 are described in the following
Paragraphs.
6.9.1 Fault A301 – Communication Fault
A301 implies that the 2430 PWB processor U2 could not reply to the Front Panel Controller upon power-on-reset
signal. The following 2430 U2 microcontroller requirements must be verified.
a. Verify reset is low at U2-9.
b. Verify clock at 9.6 MHz to U2-19.
c. Verify power and ground to U2, U3, U4, U5, and U8.
d. Verify PSEN to U4 after a power on.
e. Verify ALE to U3 after a power on.
f. Verify RD and WR to U5 (active low) after a power on.
g. Verify activity on HSSB P1-33 and P1-29.
h. Verify ground on U4-22.
i. Verify U10-13 has a 10 kHz clock. If it does, U2, U3, and U4 are not defective and U10 has been
programmed properly.
6.9.2 Fault A31F – FEC ROM Fault
A31F implies that the 2430 PWB has failed its ROM additive checksum test.
a. Check for short and open circuits in the U4 address and buses.
b. Verify +5 V on U4-1 and U4-28 during TEST.
c. Verify activity on U4-20 after power up.
d. Verify ground on U4-22 during TEST.
e. Verify activity on all U4 data and address lines during TEST.
f. If above signals do not appear normal, trace back to the source of the problem or replace U4.
g. If all signals appear normal, reprogram U4.
6.9.3 Fault A320 – FEC RAM Fault
This fault implies that microcontroller U2 could not read/write to all locations in the static RAM. However, since
BIT got to this level, some read/write functions are operable.
a. Verify the presence of ground and +5 Vdc on all ICs of the 10284-2430 PWB.
b. Confirm that U5-27, U5-22, and U5-20 are selected during the test.
c. Verify that all data and address lines toggle during the test.
d. If the above tests are normal, replace U5.
6-13
RF-5720
MAINTENANCE
6.9.4 Fault A321 – Dual Port RAM Fault

This fault implies that the microcontroller U2 could not read/write to all locations in DPRAM U8.
a. Verify the presence of +5 Vdc on all ICs of the 10284-2430 PWB.
b. Verify that the 2420 side of U8 is not accessed during the test; this causes errors.
c. U8 should be selected during the test and can be monitored with an oscilloscope. Check that all data and
address lines are toggling on pins U8-25 through U8-47.
d. If the above tests are normal, replace U8.
6.9.5 Fault A322 – Modem Communications Fault
The A322 fault occurs when the 2430 microcontroller initiates a self-test command to the 2420, and the 2420
cannot respond.
a. Verify +5 V and ground on all the 2420 ICs.
b. Verify U4-59 has 19.2 MHz clock.
c. Verify that U4-41 goes high, then low, after power up reset.
d. Verify that U4-24 goes high after power up.
e. Verify activity on U4-61, U4-62, U4-63, U4-34, and U4-35 after power up.
f. Verify that U4-55 is normally high.
g. Verify proper activity on the address and data lines of U4.
h. Verify proper EPROM access on U8 and U9. Check the address and data lines and pins 20 and 22 of U8
and U9.
i. Verify proper latching on U5 and U6.
6.9.6 Fault A323 – Modem/FEC DPRAM Fault
This fault occurs when the 80C186 does not read/write the 2420 side of the DPRAM. In order for BIT to get to
A323, the 80C186 on the 2430 PWB can read/write DPRAM.
b. Verify that during BIT the chip selects go active and the busy line remains inactive.
c. If all chip selects are present, check for possible shorted data or address lines. During BIT, each data and
address line should toggle. Use an oscilloscope to verify this.
d. Once the problem is located, replace the DPRAM and retry BIT.
6-14
RF-5720
MAINTENANCE
6.9.7 Fault A324 – MODEM/FFT DPRAM Fault

This fault recognizes a read/write problem of the 80C186 microprocessor to all locations of the DPRAM U10.
b. During this fault test, the FFT processor should not be able to access DPRAM, and U10-44 (busy) should
be inactive.
c. Check to see that all DPRAM selectives go active during BIT. Use an oscilloscope probe to verify that all
address and data lines toggle.
d. If the problem cannot be located at this point, replace the DPRAM and retry BIT.
6.9.8 Fault A325 – MODEM ROM Fault
This fault implies that the 80C186 on the 2420 PWB could not verify the EPROM checksum with the checksum
stored in high ROM.
b. Using an oscilloscope, probe the address, data, and chip selects on U8 and U9.
c. If the above tests are normal, reprogram the EPROMs.
6.9.9 Fault A326 – MODEM RAM Fault
This fault indicates that the 80C186 on the 2420 PWB could not read/write to all locations of RAM (U2 and U3).
In order to get to this level in BIT, the 80C186 must have been able to access the RAM. The following procedure
will identify why reading/writing is prevented.
b. Verify that the chip selects go active during BIT.
c. During BIT, all data and address lines should toggle.
d. If a, b, and c are normal, replace both static RAMs (U2 and U3) and retry BIT.
6.9.10 Fault A327 – MODEM Sample Clock Fault
The fault occurs when the 80C186 detects that the sample clock is at the incorrect frequency. The 80C186 uses an
internal timer to compare with the sample clock.
Unfortunately, this fault could mean a problem anywhere on the 10284-2400 assembly. This is true because the
sample clock is generated on the 10284-2550 PWB by the Analog Interface Chip (AIC). A divided version of this
clock is used by the 80C186.
a. Ensure that the 80C186 clock is 19.2 MHz for comparison.
b. Ensure that the sample clock has a frequency = 14.4 kHz (or 9.6 kHz); check 10284-2550 PWB (U20-14).
c. Ensure that the AIC CLK is running at 2.88 MHz (U1-6 on the 10284-2420 PWB).
6-15
RF-5720
MAINTENANCE
d. If the AIC CLK is not at the proper frequency, check the AIC (U1 on the 10284-2420 PWB) for its
required signals.
1. Check power-on-reset, U1-2, and power and ground on U1.
2. Verify activity on U1-5 and U1-4.
3. If the programming signals are normal, replace U1.
e. If the AIC CLK is not 2.88 MHz, the PLL circuitry on the 10284-2430 PWB (U9 and U10) should be
checked. The 80C31 on the 10284-2430 PWB programs the PLL (U10).
f. Verify U10-13 to have a 10 kHz waveform, and confirm U10 input signals after power up. If the input
signals are normal, but U10-13 is not 10 kHz, replace U10.
g. If the 10 kHz waveform is present and AIC CLK is incorrect, VCO (U9) is possibly not performing.
h. Verify the presence of proper signals on U9-6 (about 2.5 volts).
i. Verify that R11, C3, C4, and C5 are functioning properly. If they are, replace U9.
6.9.11 Fault A330 – FFT Communications Fault
This fault implies that the TMS320 on the 10284-2550 was unable to respond to a command from MOD/DEMOD
PWB A6.
a. Verify that the mailbox interrupt from the 10284-2420 (U11-8) goes active during BIT. If the
TMS320C51 does not receive the interrupt, it is unable to perform the test.
b. Check for +5 V on all ICs.
c. Verify that the TMS320 has a 40 MHz clock and that it can execute code. The TMS320 programmed the
AIC properly to pass the A329 Fault. A330 fault is usually located in a defective DPRAM, or in the
inability of the TMS320 to access the DPRAM.
d. Verify access to the DPRAM. If the TMS320 is accessing, replace the DPRAM.
6.9.12 Fault A331 – FFT Dual Port RAM Fault
This fault implies that the TMS320C51 could not read/write to all locations of DPRAM. Reaching this BIT level
assures that some read/write functions are correct.
a. Verify the presence of +5 Vdc on all ICs of the 10284-2550 PWB.
b. Verify that all DPRAM data and address lines toggle during TEST (U10 on the 10284-2550 PWB).
c. If the above signals are normal, replace the DPRAM and retry BIT.
d. If the above signals are not normal, check for proper activity on pins 26 through 47 of 10284-2550 (U11
and U12 bus transceivers). Replace if necessary.
6-16
RF-5720
MAINTENANCE
6.9.13 Fault A332 – FFT ROM Fault

After turning the power on, reset the TMS320 (U5) downloads code from the flash EPROMS (U8 and U9) into its
own SRAM U7, and into the DSP56156’s SRAM.
Detection of this fault requires almost perfect code download and BIT software execution. It is most likely that
the contents of U8 and U9 are contaminated and must be reprogrammed. Extreme static discharge could cause
this rare problem.
Send the module back to the depot for flash programming.
6.9.14 Fault A333 – FFT External RAM Fault
The TMS320 executes code from the U7 SRAM. Detecting a SRAM fault guarantees partial SRAM functionality
and probably a faulty block or segment of SRAM.
a. Verify +5 V and ground on all ICs.
b. Verify manual activity on all of the address lines of the SRAM U7. Suspicious address lines should be
checked during BIT since all addresses are exercised at this time.
c. Replace U7 if all the signals appear normal.
6.9.15 Fault A334 – FFT D/A to A/D Loopback Fault
This test implies that the Analog Interface Chip (AIC) did not loop the D/A to the A/D. The TMS320 programs
the AIC for this mode and then must reprogram back to normal operation. Once in this mode, the TMS320 sends
time samples to the D/A section of the AIC. The AIC then returns the time samples and compares them to what
was sent.
a. Verify that the AIC has digital +5 Vdc, analog +5 Vdc, and analog –5 Vdc.
b. Verify that the voltage reference on U1-8 is +3 Vdc.
c. The AIC requires a clock on U20 pin 6 of 2.88 MHz. Verify that a 14.4 kHz or 9.6 kHz clock exists on
U20-14.
d. Replace U20 and retry BIT.
6.9.16 Fault A335 – Canned FFT Fault
This fault implies that the MOD/DEMOD sent time samples from PROM for the FFT processor to perform a Fast
Fourier Transform and reported results. The MOD/DEMOD compares the results with the stored results. This
fault occurs when there is a difference between the FFT results and the results stored in ROM.
a. Verify clear +5 Vdc ground on all ICs.
b. Verify activity on pins 27 through 47 of the U12 bus transceiver. Replace if necessary.
c. Verify activity on pins 26 through 47 of the U11 bus transceiver while pin 48 is high. Replace if
necessary.
6-17
RF-5720
MAINTENANCE
6.9.17 Fault A340 – DSP56156 Communication Fault

This fault has identified that the DSP56156 processor (U4 on 10284-2550) has not responded to control signals
sent by the TMS320.
a. Place the modem in serial-tone mode.
b. Verify +5 V and ground on all ICs. Check for proper soldering of all ICs and chop components
(capacitors and resistors).
c. Verify a normal 40 MHz clock signal on U4 pin 51.
d. Verify that the reset signal goes high after power up/reset on U4 pin 83.
e. Verify activity on the R/W signal of U4 pin 42, and the PS/DS signal of U4 pin 40, immediately after the
reset signal goes high on U4 pin 83.
f. Check for shorted address (A0-A15) and data signals (D0-D15) of U4.
g. Replace U4 if activity on U4 pins seem abnormal.
6.9.18 Fault A341 – DSP56156 Dual Port RAM Fault
This fault has identified a dual port RAM fault on U2 of the 10284-2550 PWB.
b. Verify +5 Vdc and ground on all ICs.
c. Verify normal activity on the TMS320C51 address, control, and data lines on U2 pins 19 through 50.
d. Verify normal activity on the DSP56156 address, control, and data lines on U2 pins 2 through 16, and
pins 52 through 65.
e. Replace U2 if necessary.
6.9.19 Fault A342 – DSP56156 SRAM Fault
This fault identifies a defective SRAM on 10284-2550 (U3).
After power up/reset in serial-tone mode, the TMS320 downloads software to the DSP56156 through dual port
RAM (U2). The U4 DSP56156 processor executes start up code from the dual port ram to transfer code into its
high speed SRAM (U3).
The DSP56156 must have executed BIT code using its SRAM (U3), and detected a faulty address or block of
addresses.
b. Verify +5 V and ground on all ICs.
c. Verify a normal 40 MHz (+0%, –1%) clock on U4 pin 51.
d. Verify normal activity on all DSP56156 address and data lines (U3 pins 1 through 21, and 24 through 38).
6-18
RF-5720
MAINTENANCE
6.9.20 Fault A343 – TMS320C51 Dual Port RAM Fault

This fault identifies a dual port RAM fault on U2 of the 10284-2550 PWB.
b. Verify +5Vdc, and ground on all ICs.
c. Verify normal activity on the TMS320C51 address, control, and data lines on U2 pins 19 through 50.
d. Verify normal activity on the DSP56156 address, control, and data lines on U2 pins 2 through 16, and
pins 52 through 65.
6.10 TROUBLESHOOTING INTERFACE ASSEMBLY A5
Interface Assembly A5, like the Assembly A3, provides fault codes during BIT. Perform the following procedure
to begin investigating any fault presented by A5:
a. Verify all components are properly installed.
b. Verify power and ground connections to the PWB.
6.10.1 Fault A501 – Communications Fault
This fault occurs when the main controller is unable to communicate with the Interface PWB.
a. Verify reset is low at U1-9.
b. Verify clock at 9.6 MHz to U1-19.
c. Verify power and ground to U1, U2, U3, and U4.
d. Verify interrupt from SCC (U1-13) is inactive (high) or, at most, only occasionally active.
e. Verify that chip select to the SCC (U10-33) is inactive (high).
f. Verify PSEN to U3.
g. Verify ALE to U2.
h. Check for shorts and opens in the data and address lines.
i. Verify RD and WR to U4 (low active).
j. Verify activity on HSSB at U1 after test command.
k. Verify +5 V on PGM pin U3-1.
l. Verify ground on OE U3-22.
m. If BIT does not pass, replace U1, U2, U3, and U4.
6-19
RF-5720
MAINTENANCE
6.10.2 Fault A502 – ROM Fault

The A502 Fault fails when the ROM checksum fails.
a. Check for shorts and opens in the address bus, especially the higher bits.
b. Verify that the interrupt from SCC (U1-13) is inactive (high) or, at most, occasionally active.
c. Verify that frame clock (U1-12) is inactive (high) or, at most, occasionally active.
d. Verify that chip select to the SCC (U10-33) is inactive (high) during the test.
e. Verify programming of U3.
f. Verify +5 V on PGM (U3-1) during the test.
g. Verify ground on OE U3-22 during the test.
h. Erase and reprogram U3 using known working software.
i. Replace U3 if necessary.
6.10.3 Fault A503 – IRAM Fault
U1 failed a pattern test. Replace U1.
6.10.4 Fault A504 – XRAM Fault
The external RAM U4 failed a pattern test.
a. Verify address and data connections to U4.
b. Verify power and ground to U4 during the test.
c. Verify RD and WR connections to U4 during the test.
d. Verify that interrupts to U1-12 and U1-13 are inactive (high) or, at most, occasionally active.
e. Verify that the chip select to the SCC (U10-33) is inactive (high) during the test.
f. Replace U4 if necessary.
6.10.5 Fault A505 – SCC ASYNC Fault
This fault implies the SCC (U10) failed internal loopback on the asynchronous channel.
a. If an asynchronous terminal is connected to the modem, set it to 4800 bps and verify receipt of a C.
Otherwise, disconnect the DTE from the front panel J2 connector and repeat test. The modem and DTE
drivers may be cross-connected.
b. Verify power and ground to U5, U6, and U10.
c. Verify 1.2 MHz clock to U10-20.
d. Verify activity at A5 J1-9 during the test.
e. Check for opens in data bus and A0 and A1 at U10.
f. Verify chip select, RD, and WR at U10 during test.
g. Replace U107 if necessary.
6-20
RF-5720
MAINTENANCE
6.10.6 Fault A506 – SCC SYNC Fault

This fault occurs when the SCC (U10) fails internal loopback on the synchronous channel.
a. Disconnect the DTE from the front panel J2 connector and repeat test. The modem and DTE drivers may
have been cross-connected.
b. Verify activity at A5 J1-11 during test.
c. Verify clock at 4800 bps at A5 J1-12 during test.
d. If all else fails, replace U10.
6.10.7 Fault A507 – No Tone Fault
This fault is displayed when the plain text detector does not see activity when the tone generator is enabled.
a. Verify power and ground to U6, U11, U13, and U14.
b. Verify chip enable and data bus to U6.
c. Verify that Tone On (U13-2) goes low during the test.
d. Verify that U11-1 and U11-16 go low during the test.
e. Verify that PT detector rest U14-2 goes to 0.5 V during the test.
f. Verify that U13-1 goes high during the test.
g. Verify that Tone Enable U11-9 goes low.
h. Verify that TX Mute U11-8 goes low.
i. Verify that the Tone Generator at U14-3 oscillates for about 3 cycles (3 msec). The peak at U14-3 should
be greater than 0.5 V.
j. If PT Detector at U1-4 goes high for more than an oscillator period during test, replace U1. The parallel
port input is bad.
k. If U1-4 is only high when J14-3 is high, check feedback circuit R77 and R76; the level at U14-3 should
have a dc offset of 2.5 V when U14-1 is high.
6.10.8 Fault A508 – PT Detector Fault
This fault has the Plain Text Detector showing activity even when reset or tone is not enabled.
a. Verify power and ground to U6, U11, U13, and U14.
b. Verify chip enable and data bus to U6.
c. Verify that PT Detector Reset U14-2 goes to 5 V during the test.
d. If PT Detector at U1-4 goes low twice during the test, replace U1; the parallel port input is bad.
e. Verify U14-3 goes low (less than 0.5 V) during the test.
6-21
RF-5720
MAINTENANCE
6.10.9 Fault A509 – Other Tone Fault

This fault indicates the plain text detector shows activity when the tone is on and the audio path is cipher text.
a. Verify that C_Not_P (U11-1 and U11-16) goes high during the test.
b. Set the modem to CT, and check for activity at U14-3.
c. Replace U11 if necessary.
6.11 TROUBLESHOOTING FRONT PANEL CONTROLLER ASSEMBLY A6
Front Panel Controller Assembly A6 provides fault codes during BIT. Use the following procedure to begin
troubleshooting any fault presented by A6:
a. Verify all components are properly installed.
b. Verify power and ground connections to the PWB.
6.11.1 Fault A602 – IRAM Fault
U1 failed a pattern test. Replace U1.
6.11.2 Fault A603 – ROM Fault
The A603 fault fails when the ROM checksum fails.
a. Check for shorts and opens in the address bus, especially the higher bits.
b. Verify programming of U3.
c. Verify ground on OE U3-22 during the test.
d. Erase and reprogram U3 using known working software.
6.11.3 Fault A604 – XRAM Fault
The external RAM, U4, failed a pattern test.
a. Verify address and data connections to U4.
b. Verify power and ground to U4 during test.
c. Verify RD and WR connections to U4 during the test.
d. Verify that interrupts to U1-12 and U1-13 are inactive (high) or, at most, occasionally active.
6.11.4 Incorrect or No Response to Keyboard/Function Control
Perform the following procedure if there is an incorrect or no response to keyboard/function control:
a. Verify that the interrupt line to U1-13 is normally high, and pulses low either when a key is pressed, or
when the FUNCTION control is rotated.
b. Verify that Keyboard-Data-Avail-N line at U1-15 goes low when a key is pressed, and remains low until
the key is released.
6-22
RF-5720
MAINTENANCE
c. Verify that the keyboard latch output at U5-13 is normally high, and pulses low when a key is pressed.
d. Verify that the FUNCTION control latch output at U5-8 is normally high, and pulses low each time the
FUNCTION control position is changed.
e. For each key press /FUNCTION control change, verify the presence of the following:
• There is at least one pulse at U7-14 (FP READ STB).
• A short pulse string is present at TP2 (FP DATA CLK).
• Front panel data is clocked in via FP READ CLK at U1-4
f. Refer to Paragraph 6.12.5.

6.11.5 LCD Displays BACKUP MEMORY FAILURE at Power Up
This message is displayed the first time power is applied, or after any component of the battery backed-up RAM
circuit is removed (e.g., JMP3). At any other time, it is an indication of a fault.
a. Verify the presence of JMP3.
b. Verify that the backup battery voltage at U4-26 is at least 2.0 V with power turned off.
c. Verify that when power is turned off, chip select at U4-26 is disabled before the +5 V supply drops below
4.4 V.
d. Verify that chip select at U4-26 is disabled for at least 150 msec after +5 V is present when power is
turned on.
6.11.6 No Message Displayed on LCD at Power Up
Perform the following procedure if no message is displayed on the LCD at power up:
a. Verify the presence of +5 Vdc at P1-2.
b. Verify the 9.6 MHz clock at U1-19.
c. Verify that the RESET pin at U1-9 is at ground.
d. Verify activity on the LCD control lines to Front Panel A8 at power up:
• J1-3 LCD DATA OUT

• J1-4 FP DATA CLK
• J1-5 LCD STB
e. Refer to Paragraph 6.12.4.

6.12 TROUBLESHOOTING FRONT PANEL A8
This paragraph is composed of general procedures for audio, display, and user input troubleshooting on the front
panel. Each section has specific SYMPTOMS listed for ease in determining the front panel problem.
If it is determined that an IC should be replaced, check the power and ground connections to ensure they are
correct.
6-23
RF-5720
MAINTENANCE
6.12.1 General Preliminary Procedures

Perform the following general preliminary procedures:
a. Set the MODE control on the front panel to PT.
b. Check P2-22 and P2-23 for 5 V.
c. Check P2-28 for 12 V.
d. Check P2-29 for –12 V.
If any of these voltages are not present, check the troubleshooting guide for Interface Assembly A5.
a. Check P1-5 and P1-11 for 5 V.
b. Check P1-7 and P1-8 for +12 V.
c. Check P1-9 and P1-10 for –12 V.
If any of these voltages are not present, check the troubleshooting guide for FFT Assembly A3.
6.12.2 Audio Troubleshooting in the Receive Audio Path
Symptoms:
• No handset earphone audio
• Modem doesn’t receive data.
• FSK Audio T meter is stuck at T0.
Procedure:
a. Verify the MODE control is set to PT.
b. Connect a 2.2 Vpp, 1 kHz audio signal to the radio receive audio input pins J3-B and J3-E. The audio
signal should appear at both P2-7 (handset earphone) and P1-3 (modem receive audio).
c. If no audio is seen at P1-3 and P2-7, check T1-5.
1. If audio is present at T1-5, check U1-1. If audio is not present at U1-1, replace U1.
2. If audio is not present at T1-5, check T1-1.
3. If audio is present at T1-1, replace T1.
4. If audio is not present at T1-1, recheck the signal hookup at J3. If signal hookup is correct, replace
either J3 or the connecting cable.
d. If audio is seen at P1-3 and not seen at P2-7, check that U2-15 is low.
1. If U2-15 is low, replace U2.
2. If U2-15 is high, check for the presence of audio on U2-1. If audio is seen here, there is a problem
on the 2610 Interface PWB A5. U2-15 should be low unless there is a PTT key from the handset.
3. If audio is not seen at U2-3 or U2-1, replace U2.
6-24
RF-5720
MAINTENANCE
e. The audio signal should be heard in the handset earphone under control of volume switch S1. If audio is
not heard in the handset, check P2-8 for the presence of audio.
1. If audio is not present at P2-8, but is present at P2-7, there is a problem with Interface A5 Assembly.
2. If audio is present at P2-8, check U7-1 for audio presence.
3. If audio is not present at U7-1, replace U7.
4. If audio is seen at U7-1, check U18-7 for audio presence. Be sure that volume control S1 is turned
up at least 75% of full volume.
5. If audio is not present at U18-7, replace U18 or S1. Try replacing U18 first.
6. If audio is present at U18-7, check U3-16 or U3-3.
7. If audio is not present at U3-16 OR U3-3, check that U3-10 and U3-15 are low.
8. If U3-10 and U3-15 are not low, U7 and Q3 could be the problem. Connect a handset to the J1
connector on the front panel. Verify that U7-7 is high (9 V-11 V) and the collector of Q3 is low.
9. If U7-7 is not high, check that U7-5 is 5 V. If U7-5 is 5 V, replace U7.
10. If U7-7 is high, replace Q3.
11. If U3-10 and U3-15 are low, replace U3.
12. If audio is present at U3-16 or U3-3, A8A2, then check the front panel filter.
f. Connect a multimeter from J1-B to U3-16 or U3-3. If continuity in the filter is bad, troubleshoot the Front
Panel Filter Assembly. Check for high resistance to ground. If this does not exist, the Front Panel Filter
Assembly may be shorted out. If continuity is good, then either J1 or its cable is bad.
6.12.3 Audio Troubleshooting in the Transmit Audio Path
Symptoms:
• No sidetone audio heard in handset earphone when speaking into handset with PTT pushed.
• Radio is not modulated when handset is used for communication.
• Modem does not transmit; no audio tones at J3-D or J3-F.
• Radio is not keyed when handset PTT is pushed.
• Radio is not keyed when modem is trying to transmit.

Procedure:
a. Simulate a PTT key by connecting J1-C to J1-A. The LCD display should now read MIC in the upper
right area.
1. If MIC does not appear in the display, check that P2-4 is at ground.
2. If MIC does not appear in the display, the problem is Front Panel Controller Assembly A6 or
Interface Assembly A5.
3. If MIC does appear, J3-C should be low resistance dc path to ground (J3-A) when measured with an
ohmmeter.
6-25
RF-5720
MAINTENANCE
4. If J3-C is not low impedance to ground, check P2-18 for high level (≥3.5 V).
5. If P2-18 is high, replace Q1.
6. If P2-18 is not high, the problem is with Interface Assembly A5.
7. If MIC does not appear and J3-C is low impedance, check that the MODE control is set to PT and
P3-9 is low.
8. If P3-9 is not low, there is a problem in the MODE control S2 or R42 is bad.
9. If P3-9 is low, the problem is with Front Panel Controller Assembly A6.
10. Check P3-10 for a low. If P3-10 is not low, the handset transmit audio is blocked by analog switch
U1 and only modem audio is allowed to go out J3 to the radio. Troubleshoot Front Panel Controller
Assembly A6 to allow the handset to transmit properly.
11. If P3-10 is low, MIC should be displayed on the LCD and an actual audio problem is present.
Follow procedure 2 below:
b. Keep the PTT circuit connected for this section. The input impedance of the measuring device should be
at least 33 kohms to avoid loading down the microphone pre-amp.
1. Connect a 5 mVpp, 1 kHz audio signal to the handset microphone input J1-D. The negative side of
the signal should be connected to ground at J1-A. The audio signal should be seen at P2-5 with at
level of at least 1 Vpp, and closer to 2.5 Vpp.
2. If the audio is not present at P2-5, check U9-7. The signal should be the same amplitude as
described above. In addition, the audio should be present at U9-1 at a level of at least 0.1 Vpp, but
closer to 0.25 Vpp.
3. If the signal is not present, check U4-3 for the 5 mV audio signal.
4. If the 5 mV signal is present, replace U9.
5. If the 5 mV signal is not present, check that U4-15 is low.
6. If U4-15 is not low, U7 and Q3 could be the problem. With a handset connected to the J1 connector
on the front panel, U7-7 should be high (9-11 V) and the collector of Q3 should be low.
7. If U7-7 is not high, replace U7.
8. If U7-7 is high, replace Q3.
9. If U4-15 is high, check for 5 mV audio at U4-16 or U4-4.
10. If the 5 mV audio is present, replace U4.
11. If the 5 mV audio is not present, recheck the input connections at J1. If it is correct, the problem
may be the Front Panel Filter Assembly.
12. Connect a multimeter from J1-D to U4-16 or U4-4. If the continuity is bad, troubleshoot the Front
Panel Filter Assembly. If continuity is good, then either J1 or its cable is bad. Check also for high
resistance to ground. See Paragraph 6.12.2, step e.
6-26
RF-5720
MAINTENANCE
13. If audio is present at P2-5, it should also be present at P2-6 from Interface Assembly A5.
14. If audio is not present at P2-6, be sure the MODE control is set to PT. If so, the problem lies in the
audio routing on Interface Assembly A5. Refer to the A5 troubleshooting guide to resolve the
problem.
15. If audio is present at P2-6, it should be present at J3-D and J3-F.
16. If audio is seen at J3-D and J3-F, there is a radio cabling problem.
17. If audio is not seen at J3-D and J3-F, check U1-7.
18. If audio is present at U1-7, replace T2.
19. If audio is not present at U1-7, check U2-6 or U2-8.
20. If audio is present at U2-6 or U2-8, replace U1.
21. If audio is not present at U2-6 or U2-8, check that U2-10 is low.
22. If U2-10 is low, replace U2.
23. If U2-10 is not low, check that the MODE control is set to PT, that the PTT is keyed, and that MIC is
displayed on the LCD display. If these conditions are met, there is a cable problem in P3 or on Front
Panel Controller Assembly A6.
6.12.4 Troubleshooting the LCD Display
Symptoms:
• No message displayed upon power up.
• Upper row of display shows as all blocks (the entire 5x7 matrix is on).
Procedure:
a. When the pattern described above is displayed, it implies that the display is working, but no commands
are being sent/accepted.
1. Check U16-1 and U16-2 for bursts of serial data while repeatedly pressing the PRGM key on the
keypad. Pressing the PRGM key should cause the display to be updated.
2. If no serial stream is observed, check for a clock signal at U16 and U17-8.
3. If no clock is seen, the problem is Front Panel Controller Assembly A6.
4. If the clock is seen, but the outputs of the shift registers do not change, replace the shift registers
U16 and U17.
5. If serial stream is observed, check J6-6 for periodic pulses when the PRGM key is pressed
repeatedly.
6. If pulses are present, replace the LCD module.
6-27
RF-5720
MAINTENANCE
Symptom:
• No messages displayed upon power up; LCD is blank.
Procedure:
a. Check J6-2 for 5 V.
1. If J6-2 voltage is not present, there is no power to the display. Check that 5 V is present elsewhere.
2. If 5 V is present, there is a connector problem with J6 or with the PWB. Inspect for obvious damage.
3. If J6-2 voltage is present, check J6-3 for –3 V to –4 V.
4. If J6-3 voltage is not present, check U18-1 for the same level.
5. If U18-1 voltage is present, there is a problem with J6 or the PWB.
6. If U18-1 voltage is not present, check U18-3 for a level of 5.5 V and check VR8-2 (cathode) for 3 V.
7. If the voltages are present, replace U18.
8. If voltage at VR8 is not present, replace VR8.
9. If voltages at J6-2 and J6-3 are present, perform the tests outlined above for U16 and the LCD
Interface Connector J6 (Paragraph 6.11.4, step a).
6.12.5 Troubleshooting User Input
The LCD must be operational to troubleshoot the keypad and the MODE control.
Symptoms:
• No response from display when keypad is pressed.
• Only certain keys appear to work.
Procedure:
a. Check for P3-7 to go low when any key is pressed and held down. This line should stay low as long as the
key is pressed.
1. If P3-7 does not go low when a key is pressed, check U11-13 for a high logic level when any key is
pressed and held down.
2. If U11 does go high when a key is pressed, replace U8.
3. If U11 does not go high when a key is pressed, check U11-6 for a 100-Hz triangular waveform.
4. If U11-6 does not have the waveform, replace U11.
5. If U11-6 has the waveform, check for bursts of serial data at U10-9 and check for a clock at U10-2.
6. If the serial data and clock are not present, check Front Panel Controller Assembly A6.
7. If the clock is present, but not the serial data, check shift register pin 1 for a read strobe pulse when a
key is pressed.
6-28
RF-5720
MAINTENANCE
8. If the read strobe is present, replace U10.

9. If the read strobe is not present, check Front Panel Controller Assembly A6.
b. If only certain keys appear to work, there may be a physical problem in the keypad itself. Press all the
keys and check for the key pushing in and popping back when released.
1. If a key feels stuck, replace the keypad assembly.
2. If the keys feel ok, then the accuracy of the keypad scan IC U11 should be checked. Any pressed
key should give a unique code at the output of U11. Refer to Table 6-4 for reference.
3. If the code seen at U11 does not match Table 6-4, replace U11.
Symptom:
• The MODE control is not working properly.
Procedure:
a. MODE control S2 is used to input the modes of operation to the modem. It should affect the display as
the position of the control is changed. When CT, LD, or Z is selected, the display should read
ENCRYPTION NOT INSTALLED. When RMT is selected, the display should read --REMOTE--. If this
operation is not observed, there is a problem in the mode input circuits.
1. Set the MODE control to its various positions, and check that U12 outputs and inputs follow the
inputs and outputs listed in Table 6-5.
2. If the inputs to U12 do not follow Table 6-5, check for physical damage to the MODE control and
replace U12.
3. If U12 input/output is correct, check that U13-6 pulses low when modes are changed.
4. If U13 does not pulse low, replace U13.
5. If U13 does pulse low, check U14-9 for a pulse when the MODE control is changed.
6. If U14-9 does not have a pulse, check Front Panel Controller Assembly A6.
7. If U14-9 does have a pulse, check for serial data bursts at U10-9 and a clock at U10-2.
8. If the serial data and clock are not present, check Front Panel Controller Assembly A6.
9. If the clock is present without the serial data, shift register pin 1 should be checked for a read strobe
pulse when the MODE control is changed.
10. If the read strobe is present, replace U10.
11. If the read strobe is not present, check Front Panel Controller Assembly A6.
6-29
RF-5720
MAINTENANCE
Table 6-4. Keypad Assembly A8A4 Output at U11

U11 Pins
Key Pressed 15 16 17 18 19
PRGM 0 0 0 0 0
ALPHA 0 0 0 0 1
SETUP 0 0 0 1 0
MODE 0 0 0 1 1
SEND 0 0 1 0 0
3 0 0 1 0 1
2 0 0 1 1 0
1 0 0 1 1 1
TEST 0 1 0 0 0
6 0 1 0 0 1
5 0 1 0 1 0
4 0 1 0 1 1
CLR 0 1 1 0 0
9 0 1 1 0 1
8 0 1 1 1 0
7 0 1 1 1 1
ENTR 1 0 0 0 0
↓ 1 0 0 0 1
0 1 0 0 1 0
↑ 1 0 0 1 1
1 = High, 0 = Low
Table 6-5. MODE Control Input/Output at U12

U12 Input Pins U12 Output Pins
1 10 11 12 13 Mode 6 7 9
1 0 1 1 1 PT 1 1 1
1 1 0 1 1 CT 1 1 0
1 1 1 0 1 LD 1 0 1
1 1 1 1 0 RMT 1 0 0
0 1 1 1 1 Z 0 1 1
1 = High, 0 = Low
6-30
RF-5720
PARTS LISTS AND SCHEMATICS
SECTION 7

7.1 INTRODUCTION
This section contains parts lists, assembly diagrams, and schematics for each assembly contained in the modem.
7.1.1 RF-5720 Modem Unit (10284-1000-01)
Table 7-1 is the parts list for the modem. This includes the callouts for the specific assemblies of the modem.
Figure 7-1 is the interconnect diagram for the modem assemblies.
Table 7-1. RF-5720 Modem Unit Parts List (10284-1000-01 Rev. A)
–– 10284-5600 CHASSIS ASSY, RF-5720
A1 10284-2200 ASSY, BLK PWR SUPPLY
A3 10284-2400-01 MODEM MODULE, MULTI-WAVE
A5 10284-2610 INTERFACE
A6 10284-2700 FP CONTROLLER
A8 10284-2000 FRONT PANEL ASSY
7.2 RF-5720 CHASSIS ASSEMBLY (10284-5600)

Table 7-2 is the parts list for the RF-5720 Chassis Assembly.
Table 7-2. RF-5720 Chassis Assembly Parts List (10284-5600 Rev. E)
–– J45-0039-000 KEYING PLUG
–– 10284-5609 CHASSIS, RF-5466
–– 10012-5610 PIN BATTERY
A1 10284-5700 PWB ASSY, INTERCONNECT BD
FL1 10075-1090 FILTER EMI/RFI
FL2 10075-1090 FILTER EMI/RFI
P1 J46-0016-105 CONN HOUSING 5 POS 22AWG
7-1
RF-5720
7.2.1 A9A2 Interconnect PWB Assembly

Table 7-3 is the parts list, Figures 7-2 and 7-3 are assembly diagrams, and Figure 7-4 is the schematic for A9A2
Interconnect PWB Assembly (10284-5700).
Table 7-3. Interconnect PWB Assembly A9A2 Parts List (10284-5700 Rev. –)
J1 J46-0004-030 30 POS. DUAL ROW HEADER
J3 J46-0004-064 HEADER, 64 PIN
J4 J46-0004-064 HEADER, 64 PIN
J7 J46-0004-064 HEADER, 64 PIN
J8 J46-0004-030 30 POS. DUAL ROW HEADER
R1 – R36 R85-0125-101 RES 100 5% 1/8W FILM
7-2
Figure 7-2. A9A2 Interconnect PWB Assembly Component Side Assembly Diagram (10284-5700 Rev. –)
7-19
RF-5720
7-20
RF-5720
Figure 7-3. A9A2 Interconnect PWB Assembly Wide Side Assembly Diagram (10284-5700 Rev. –)
RF-5720
7.3 A1 BLACK POWER SUPPLY PWB ASSEMBLY

Table 7-4 is the parts list, Figures 7-5 and 7-6 are the assembly diagrams, and Figure 7-7 is the schematic diagram
for A1 Black Power Supply PWB Assembly (10284-2200).
Table 7-4. A1 Black Power Supply PWB Assembly Parts List (10284-2200 Rev. E)
C1 C22-0035-154 .15UF 10% 35V T
C2 C13-0103-102 CAP 1000PF 10% 100V SMD
C3 C13-0103-473 CAP .047UF 10% 100V SMD
C4 C13-0103-103 CAP .01UF 10% 100V SMD
C5 C13-0103-102 CAP 1000PF 10% 100V SMD
C6 C13-0103-103 CAP .01UF 10% 100V SMD
C7 C22-0035-684 CAP 0.68UF 10%
C8 C22-0025-155 CAP 1.5UF 10% 25V TANT
C9 C22-0025-155 CAP 1.5UF 10% 25V TANT
C11 M39014/01-1311V CAP 470PF 10% 200V CER-R
C12 C14-0001-106 CAP 10UF 50V MLC
C13 C78-0040-107 CAP 100UF 20% 40V ELEC.
C14 C14-0001-106 CAP 10UF 50V MLC
C15 M39014/01-1311V CAP 470PF 10% 200V CER-R
C16 C13-0103-103 CAP .01UF 10% 100V SMD
C17 M39014/02-1292V CAP 4700PF 10% 200V CER-R
C18 C78-0016-391 CAP, ELECT 390UF 16V
C19 C78-0016-391 CAP, ELECT 390UF 16V
C20 C14-0000-225 CAP 2.2UF MLC
C22 C22-0025-156 CAP 15UF 10% 25V TANT
C23 C78-0050-101 CAP 100UF 20% 50V
C24 C14-0000-225 CAP 2.2UF MLC
C25 C78-0050-101 CAP 100UF 20% 50V
C26 C22-0025-156 CAP 15UF 10% 25V TANT
C27 C14-0000-225 CAP 2.2UF MLC
C28 C22-0025-156 CAP 15UF 10% 25V TANT
C29 C22-0020-105 CAP 1.0UF 10% 20V TANT
C30 C13-0103-103 CAP .01UF 10% 100V SMD
C31 C14-0000-225 CAP 2.2UF MLC
C32 M39014/02-1310V CAP .1UF 10% 100V CER-R
C33 C13-0103-473 CAP .047UF 10% 100V SMD
C34 C13-0105-470 CAP 47PF 10% 100V SMD
C35 C13-0103-473 CAP .047UF 10% 100V SMD
C37 C13-0103-473 CAP .047UF 10% 100V SMD
C38 C13-0103-473 CAP .047UF 10% 100V SMD
CR1 1N4454 DIODE 200MA 75V SW
7-27
RF-5720
Table 7-4. A1 Black Power Supply PWB Assembly Parts List (10284-2200 Rev. E) (Cont.)
CR3 D22-0023-002 DIODE 1A 200V ULTRAFAST
CR10 D22-0027-001 DIODE 15A 45V SCHOTTKY
CR15 1N5401 DIODE 3A 100V RECT GP
E5 E-1314 TERM FKD SM
E6 E-1314 TERM FKD SM
F1 F15-0001-012 FUSE 3-1/2A QA 125V PIC
J1 J46-0022-005 HDR 5 PIN 0.100” SR LKG
JMP2 MP-1142 RES ZERO OHM (CKT JMPR)
JMP3 MP-1142 RES ZERO OHM (CKT JMPR)
L2 10284-7401 CHOKE, DC, 100UH
L4 10284-7402 CHOKE, DC, 500UH
L5 10284-7402 CHOKE, DC, 500UH
P1 10181-2511-30 CONN, 30 POS
Q1 Q26-0017-001 TRANSISTOR NMOS 25A 100V
Q2 Q26-0017-001 TRANSISTOR NMOS 25A 100V
Q3 Q26-0058-001 TRANSISTOR PMOS 5A
Q5 Q50-0016-001 TRANSISTOR, NPN DARLINGTON
R1 R40-0016-202 RES VAR 2K OHM PCB
R2 R85-0004-201 RES 1000 1% 1/8W FLM
R3 R85-0004-247 RES 3010 1% 1/8W FLM
R4 R85-0125-473 RES 47K 5% 1/8W FILM
R5 R85-0004-330 RES 20.0K 1% 1/8W FLM
R6 R85-0125-222 RES 2.2K 5% 1/8W FILM
R7 R85-0004-279 RES 6490 1% 1/8W FLM
R8 R65-0003-229 RES 2.2 5% 1/4W CAR FILM
R9 R85-0125-101 RES 100 5% 1/8W FILM
R10 R85-0125-102 RES 1.0K 5% 1/8W FILM
R11 R85-0125-220 RES 22 5% 1/8W FILM
R12 R65-0003-270 RES 27 5% 1/4W CAR FILM
R13 R85-0125-102 RES 1.0K 5% 1/8W FILM
R14 R65-0003-471 RES 470 5% 1/4W CAR FILM
7-28
RF-5720
R15 R65-0003-100 RES 10 5% 1/4W CAR FILM
R16 R65-0003-270 RES 27 5% 1/4W CAR FILM
R17 R85-0125-102 RES 1.0K 5% 1/8W FILM
R18 R65-0003-471 RES 470 5% 1/4W CAR FILM
R19 R65-0003-100 RES 10 5% 1/4W CAR FILM
R20 R15-0002-338 RES,FXD,0.33 OHM,1W
R21 R85-0125-334 RES 330K 5% 1/8W FILM
R22 R85-0125-334 RES 330K 5% 1/8W FILM
R23 R85-0004-276 RES 6.04K 1% 1/8W
R24 R85-0004-336 RES 23.2K 1% 1/8W FLM
R25 R65-0003-279 RES 2.7 5% 1/4W CAR FILM
R26 R85-0004-268 RES 4990 1% 1/8W FLM
R27 R85-0004-330 RES 20.0K 1% 1/8W FLM
R28 R85-0004-412 RES 130K 1% 1/8W FLM
R29 R85-0125-102 RES 1.0K 5% 1/8W FILM
R30 R85-0125-104 RES 100K 5% 1/8W FILM
R31 R85-0125-105 RES 1.0M 5% 1/8W FILM
R32 R40-0016-103 RES VAR 10K OHM PCB
R33 R85-0125-471 RES 470 5% 1/8W FILM
R35 R85-0125-101 RES 100 5% 1/8W FILM
R36 R85-0125-390 RES 39 5% 1/8W FILM
R37 R85-0125-101 RES 100 5% 1/8W FILM
R38 R85-0125-101 RES 100 5% 1/8W FILM
R39 R85-0125-222 RES 2.2K 5% 1/8W FILM
T1 10284-7403 TRANSFORMER, POWER
T2 L61-0001-006 TRANSFORMER,CURRENT
U1 I10-0003-112 -12V LOW DROP-OUT REG.
U2 I12-0013-001 12V LOW DROP-OUT REG. IC
U3 I12-0014-005 5V LOW DROP-OUT REG. IC
U4 I62-0012-002 IC, PWM CONTROL SG2526N
U5 I20-0010-000 IC LM2903 COMPARATOR PL
U6 Y01-0010-001 TCXO 19.2MHZ H12BV-19.2M
U7 I15-0000-000 IC 74HC00 PLASTIC CMOS
U8 I14-0016-001 UND VOLT IC, MC33064P-5
VR1 1N5242B DIODE 12V 5% .5W ZENER
Z2 L50-0003-001 BEAD FERITE .130D X .226L
7-29
RF-5720
7-30
Figure 7-5. A1 Black Power Supply PWB Assembly Component Side Assembly Drawing (10284-2200 Rev. –)
RF-5720
7-31
7-32
RF-5720
Figure 7-6. A1 Black Power Supply PWB Assembly Wire Side Assembly Drawing
RF-5720
7.4 A3 MULTI-WAVE MODEM MODULE

The A3 Multi-Wave Modem Module (10284-2400-01) contains an FFT-DSP PWB Assembly, a Mod/Demod
PWB Assembly, and an FEC PWB Assembly. Table 7-5 is the parts list for A3 Multi-Wave Modem Module
Assembly.
Table 7-5. A3 Multi-Wave Modem Module Parts List (10284-2400-01 Rev. –)
A1 10284-2550 FFT PWB ASSEMBLY
A2 10284-2420 MOD/DEMOD PWB ASSEMBLY
A2A1 10284-2430 FEC PWB ASSEMBLY
7.4.1 A3A1 FFT-DSP PWB ASSEMBLY

Table 7-6 is the parts list, Figures 7-8 and 7-9 are the assembly drawings, and Figure 7-10 is the schematic
diagram for A3A1 FFT-DSP PWB Assembly (10284-2550).
Table 7-6. A3A1 FFT-DSP PWB Assembly Parts List (10284-2550 Rev. D)
–– 10284-2559 PWB, SERIAL TONE MODEM
–– 10012-2214 END SHROUD RIGHT
–– 10012-2215 END SHROUD LEFT
C1 C13-0103-473 CAP .047UF 10% 100V SMD
C2 C13-0103-473 CAP .047UF 10% 100V SMD
C3 C13-0103-473 CAP .047UF 10% 100V SMD
C6 C13-0103-473 CAP .047UF 10% 100V SMD
C7 C13-0103-473 CAP .047UF 10% 100V SMD
C8 C13-0103-473 CAP .047UF 10% 100V SMD
C9 C13-0103-473 CAP .047UF 10% 100V SMD
C10 C36-0010-476 CAP, 47UF 10V TANT SMD
C11 C13-0103-473 CAP .047UF 10% 100V SMD
C12 C13-0103-473 CAP .047UF 10% 100V SMD
C13 C13-0103-473 CAP .047UF 10% 100V SMD
C14 C13-0103-473 CAP .047UF 10% 100V SMD
C16 C13-0103-473 CAP .047UF 10% 100V SMD
C17 C13-0103-473 CAP .047UF 10% 100V SMD
C18 C13-0103-473 CAP .047UF 10% 100V SMD
C19 C13-0103-473 CAP .047UF 10% 100V SMD
C20 C13-0103-473 CAP .047UF 10% 100V SMD
C21 C13-0103-473 CAP .047UF 10% 100V SMD
C26 C13-0103-473 CAP .047UF 10% 100V SMD
C27 C13-0103-473 CAP .047UF 10% 100V SMD
C28 C13-0103-473 CAP .047UF 10% 100V SMD
7-35
RF-5720
Table 7-6. A3A1 FFT-DSP PWB Assembly Parts List (10284-2550 Rev. D) (Cont.)
C29 C13-0103-473 CAP .047UF 10% 100V SMD
C30 C13-0103-473 CAP .047UF 10% 100V SMD
C31 C13-0103-473 CAP .047UF 10% 100V SMD
C32 C13-0103-473 CAP .047UF 10% 100V SMD
C33 C13-0101-470 CAP 47PF 10% 50V CER
C34 C36-0025-105 CAP, 1.0UF 25V 10% TANT
C35 C36-0025-105 CAP, 1.0UF 25V 10% TANT
C36 C36-0010-685 CAP 6.8UF 10V TANT
C37 C36-0010-685 CAP 6.8UF 10V TANT
C38 C13-0103-473 CAP .047UF 10% 100V SMD
C39 C36-0025-105 CAP, 1.0UF 25V 10% TANT
C40 C13-0103-473 CAP .047UF 10% 100V SMD
C41 C13-0101-470 CAP 47PF 10% 50V CER
C42 C13-0103-473 CAP .047UF 10% 100V SMD
C43 C13-0101-100 CAP 10PF 10% 100V SMD
C44 C13-0103-473 CAP .047UF 10% 100V SMD
C45 C13-0103-473 CAP .047UF 10% 100V SMD
C48 C13-0103-473 CAP .047UF 10% 100V SMD
C49 C13-0103-473 CAP .047UF 10% 100V SMD
C50 C13-0103-473 CAP .047UF 10% 100V SMD
C51 C13-0103-473 CAP .047UF 10% 100V SMD
C52 C13-0103-473 CAP .047UF 10% 100V SMD
C55 C13-0103-473 CAP .047UF 10% 100V SMD
CR1 D20-0005-001 DIODE, SOT-23
CR2 D20-0005-001 DIODE, SOT-23
J1 J46-0120-030 CONN MALE 30 PIN
J5 J46-0007-014 HEADER, RIGHT ANGLE
J6 10181-2511-64 CONN RECEPTACLE 64 PIN
L3 L06-0004-050 CHOKE,DC 50UH
Q1 Q26-0030-001 FET P-CHANNEL 9020 SMD
R1 R85-0125-223 RES 22K 5% 1/8W FILM
R2 R85-0125-100 RES 10 5% 1/8W FILM
R4 R85-0125-102 RES 1.0K 5% 1/8W FILM
R5 R85-0125-103 RES 10K 5% 1/8W FILM
R6 R85-0125-103 RES 10K 5% 1/8W FILM
R7 R85-0125-103 RES 10K 5% 1/8W FILM
R10 R85-0004-051 RES 33.2 1% 1/8W CHIP
R11 R85-0004-051 RES 33.2 1% 1/8W CHIP
7-36
RF-5720
R12 R85-0004-051 RES 33.2 1% 1/8W CHIP
R13 R85-0125-103 RES 10K 5% 1/8W FILM
R14 R50-0010-223 RES 22K 2% 10SIP 9RES
R15 R50-0010-223 RES 22K 2% 10SIP 9RES
R16 R85-0125-103 RES 10K 5% 1/8W FILM
R17 R85-0125-103 RES 10K 5% 1/8W FILM
R18 R85-0125-102 RES 1.0K 5% 1/8W FILM
R19 R85-0125-223 RES 22K 5% 1/8W FILM
R20 R50-0008-223 RES 22K 2% 8SIP 7RES
R21 R50-0008-223 RES 22K 2% 8SIP 7RES
R22 R85-0004-051 RES 33.2 1% 1/8W CHIP
R23 R85-0004-051 RES 33.2 1% 1/8W CHIP
R24 R85-0004-051 RES 33.2 1% 1/8W CHIP
R25 R85-0004-051 RES 33.2 1% 1/8W CHIP
R26 R85-0004-051 RES 33.2 1% 1/8W CHIP
R27 R85-0004-051 RES 33.2 1% 1/8W CHIP
R28 R85-0004-051 RES 33.2 1% 1/8W CHIP
R29 R85-0004-051 RES 33.2 1% 1/8W CHIP
R30 R85-0004-051 RES 33.2 1% 1/8W CHIP
R31 R50-0010-223 RES 22K 2% 10SIP 9RES
R32 R50-0010-223 RES 22K 2% 10SIP 9RES
R33 R85-0125-223 RES 22K 5% 1/8W FILM
R34 R85-0125-223 RES 22K 5% 1/8W FILM
R35 R85-0004-401 RES 100K 1% 1/8W FLM
R36 R85-0004-401 RES 100K 1% 1/8W FLM
R37 R85-0125-101 RES 100 5% 1/8W FILM
R38 R85-0125-474 RES 470K 5% 1/8W FILM
R39 R85-0004-251 RES 3320 1% 1/8W
R40 R85-0004-269 RES 5110 1% 1/8W FLM
R41 R85-0125-101 RES 100 5% 1/8W FILM
R42 R85-0005-025 RES 100 5% 1/2W FLM
R43 R85-0005-025 RES 100 5% 1/2W FLM
R44 R85-0125-101 RES 100 5% 1/8W FILM
R45 R85-0004-401 RES 100K 1% 1/8W FLM
R46 R85-0125-222 RES 2.2K 5% 1/8W FILM
R47 R85-0125-100 RES 10 5% 1/8W FILM
R49 R85-0004-377 RES 61.9K 1% 1/8W FLM
R50 R85-0004-401 RES 100K 1% 1/8W FLM
R51 R50-0006-474 RES 470K 2% 6SIP 5RES
7-37
RF-5720
R53 R85-0004-051 RES 33.2 1% 1/8W CHIP
R54 R85-0004-051 RES 33.2 1% 1/8W CHIP
R55 R85-0004-051 RES 33.2 1% 1/8W CHIP
U1 I01-6000-004 IC, 74AC04
U2 I26-0029-002 2KX16 DP RAM IDT7133L90J
U3 10284-2443 IC, 64K X 16 STATIC RAM
U4 I87-0006-001 IC, DSP, DSP56156FE40QFP
U5 I87-0005-001 IC, DSP, TMX320C51QFP
U6 10284-8001 PROGRAMMED IC, U6
U7 10284-2443 IC, 64K X 16 STATIC RAM
U8 10284-8002 PROGRAMMED IC, U8
U9 10284-8003 PROGRAMMED IC,U9
U10 I01-6000-032 IC QUAD 2-IN OR SMT
U11 10075-1254 IC 74ACT16245 XCVR SOIC
U12 10075-1254 IC 74ACT16245 XCVR SOIC
U13 I12-0006-005 IC VR 78L05A +5V .10A 4%
U14 I12-0010-005 IC VR 79L05A -5V .10A 4%
U15 I30-0035-101 IC OPAMP TL072ACD
U16 I30-0035-101 IC OPAMP TL072ACD
U17 I03-0015-007 IC TLC7524 DAC SOIC
U18 I38-0005-002 IC MOSFET DRVR SMD 4426
U20 I59-0013-003 IC ANLG INTFC TLC32044C
U21 I01-5000-273 IC 74HC273 CMOS SMD
U23 I01-5000-553 IC, ANALOG MUX/DEMUX
Y1 Y01-0017-001 OSC 40 MHZ SMD
7-38
RF-5720
E1 E4 E3 E2 2 30 JMP11
R14
1 29
C10
J1
R31
R32
U5
U7
U4 U6 2 J5 14
R15
C15
R20
R21
U2 13
1
U14
Q1
C51
U21
C52
U15
U13
U9 U8
U16
U11
C46
U12
U18
U17
Y1
U1
U3
33 64
U10
P1 U20
U23
32 1
L3
R51
Figure 7-8. A3A1 FFT-DSP PWB Assembly Component Side Assembly Drawing
(10284-2550 Rev. –)
R46 C16 C30 R6 C12

R47
R16 R5
CR1
JMP10 R3
R2 R8
C37 C48 C18
C7 R52
JMP9
C35 R33 R55 C55
J4 C19 C14
R43 R18 R1
R28 R9
C26 R13 J2
R27 R54
R22
CR2
R34 C1 R53
R4
R36 C43 R26 R29
C41 C36 R38 R25 R23 C2
C17 R30
R35 R37 R24
C40 R45 R19 C11
C42 R7
R50 C34 C13
C33 R44 C21 C20 C3
R42 C28 C29 R11
C38 R10
R39
C39 C6
C27 C9
R40 R49
R41 C49
C31 C8
C32 C50
R12
C44
C45
Figure 7-9. A3A1 FFT-DSP PWB Assembly Wire Side Assembly Drawing (10284-2550 Rev. –)
7-39
RF-5720
7-40
RF-5720
7.4.2 A3A2 MOD/DEMOD PWB ASSEMBLY

diagram for A3A2 Mod/Demod PWB Assembly (10284-2420).
Table 7-7. A3A2 Mod/Demod PWB Assembly Parts List (10284-2420 Rev. F)
C1 C13-0103-473 CAP .047UF 10% 100V SMD
C2 C13-0103-473 CAP .047UF 10% 100V SMD
C3 C13-0103-473 CAP .047UF 10% 100V SMD
C4 C13-0103-473 CAP .047UF 10% 100V SMD
C5 C13-0103-473 CAP .047UF 10% 100V SMD
C6 C13-0103-473 CAP .047UF 10% 100V SMD
C7 C13-0103-473 CAP .047UF 10% 100V SMD
C8 C13-0103-473 CAP .047UF 10% 100V SMD
C9 C13-0103-473 CAP .047UF 10% 100V SMD
C10 C13-0103-473 CAP .047UF 10% 100V SMD
C11 C13-0103-473 CAP .047UF 10% 100V SMD
C12 C13-0103-473 CAP .047UF 10% 100V SMD
C13 C22-0025-106 CAP, 10UF 25V 10% TANT
C14 C13-0103-473 CAP .047UF 10% 100V SMD
C15 C13-0103-473 CAP .047UF 10% 100V SMD
C16 C13-0103-473 CAP .047UF 10% 100V SMD
C17 C22-0025-106 CAP, 10UF 25V 10% TANT
C18 C13-0103-473 CAP .047UF 10% 100V SMD
C19 C13-0103-473 CAP .047UF 10% 100V SMD
C20 C13-0103-102 CAP 1000PF 10% 100V SMD
C21 C13-0103-473 CAP .047UF 10% 100V SMD
C22 C13-0103-473 CAP .047UF 10% 100V SMD
J1 J46-0004-040 CONN RIBBON 40 PIN
J2 10181-2511-64 CONN RECEPTACLE 64 PIN
L1 10284-7404 CHOKE
R1 R85-0125-100 RES 10 5% 1/8W FILM
R3 R85-0125-100 RES 10 5% 1/8W FILM
R5 R85-0125-103 RES 10K 5% 1/8W FILM
R6 R85-0125-222 RES 2.2K 5% 1/8W FILM
R7 R85-0125-103 RES 10K 5% 1/8W FILM
R8 R85-0125-103 RES 10K 5% 1/8W FILM
R9 R85-0125-103 RES 10K 5% 1/8W FILM
R10 R85-0125-103 RES 10K 5% 1/8W FILM
R11 R85-0125-101 RES 100 5% 1/8W FILM
7-53
RF-5720
Table 7-7. A3A2 Mod/Demod PWB Assembly Parts List (10284-2420 Rev. F) (Cont.)
R12 R85-0125-101 RES 100 5% 1/8W FILM
R13 R85-0125-101 RES 100 5% 1/8W FILM
R14 R85-0125-101 RES 100 5% 1/8W FILM
R15 R85-0125-101 RES 100 5% 1/8W FILM
R16 R85-0125-101 RES 100 5% 1/8W FILM
R17 R85-0125-101 RES 100 5% 1/8W FILM
R18 R85-0125-472 RES 4.7K 5% 1/8W FILM
R19 R85-0125-103 RES 10K 5% 1/8W FILM
R20 R85-0125-103 RES 10K 5% 1/8W FILM
R21 R85-0125-104 RES 100K 5% 1/8W FILM
R22 R85-0125-101 RES 100 5% 1/8W FILM
R23 R85-0125-103 RES 10K 5% 1/8W FILM
U2 I26-0021-005 IC,32KX8 S-RAM
U3 I26-0021-005 IC,32KX8 S-RAM
U4 I27-0020-132 IC, UP 16-BIT CMOS
U10 I26-0029-001 IC 7133S90G D. P. RAM
XU8 J78-0011-628 HIGH VIBE SOCKET, 28 POS
7-54
E5 E4 E3
C13
2 1
U5 U6
U4
U2 U3 U8 U9
(XU8) (XU9)
U10
J1
JMP1
U13 U11
CR1
C17 CR2
U7 U1
U12 U14
33 64 L1
J2
32 1
40
39
Figure 7-11. A3A2 Mod/Demod PWB Assembly Component Side Assembly Drawing
(10284-2420 Rev. B)
7-55
RF-5720
7-56
RF-5720
C14
R19
R6
C22
R20
C18
R5 C16 C15
R4 R2
R3 R1 R8 C21 R18
C9 C3 C8 C2 C6 C5 R9
R7
R23
R10
C7 R13
R14 C4 C10 R15
R12
R17
R22 C20 R21
C1 R16
C12
C19 C11
R11
10284-2420b
Figure 7-12. A3A2 Mod/Demod PWB Assembly Wire Side Assembly Drawing
(10284-2420 Rev. B)
RF-5720
7.4.3 A3A2A1 FEC PWB ASSEMBLY
diagram for A3A2A1 FEC PWB Assembly (10284-2430).
Table 7-8. A3A2A1 FEC PWB Assembly Parts List (10284-2430 Rev. E)
C2 C22-0025-106 CAP, 10UF 25V 10% TANT
C3 C13-0105-101 CAP, NPO, 100PF 5%
C4 – C8 C13-0103-473 CAP .047UF 10% 100V SMD
C10 C22-0025-106 CAP, 10UF 25V 10% TANT
C13 – C21 C13-0103-473 CAP .047UF 10% 100V SMD
C22 C22-0025-106 CAP, 10UF 25V 10% TANT
C23 C13-0103-473 CAP .047UF 10% 100V SMD
CR1 1N6263 DIODE .40W 60V HOT CARR
J1 J46-0087-140 CONN PC.1 TOP ENTR 40 PIN
L2 MS90538-16 COIL 150UH 5% FXD RF
Q1 2N2222A XSTR SS/GP NPN TO-18
R1 R85-0125-103 RES 10K 5% 1/8W FILM
R2 R85-0125-474 RES 470K 5% 1/8W FILM
R3 R85-0125-472 RES 4.7K 5% 1/8W FILM
R4 R85-0125-222 RES 2.2K 5% 1/8W FILM
R5 R85-0125-103 RES 10K 5% 1/8W FILM
R6 R85-0125-100 RES 10 5% 1/8W FILM
R8 R85-0125-473 RES 47K 5% 1/8W FILM
R9 R85-0125-472 RES 4.7K 5% 1/8W FILM
R10 R85-0125-103 RES 10K 5% 1/8W FILM
R11 R85-0125-272 RES 2.7K 5% 1/8W FILM
R12 R85-0125-101 RES 100 5% 1/8W FILM
R17 – R20 R85-0125-103 RES 10K 5% 1/8W FILM
U2 I27-0017-311 IC MICMPTR 8-BIT 80C31
U4 10284-8041 PROM, PROGRAMMED
U5 I26-0021-005 IC,32KX8 S-RAM
U8 I26-0025-005 IDT7130SA100P D.P. RAM
U9 I15-0000-406 IC, CD74HC4046E PLL CMOS
U10 I70-0005-001 IC FREQ SYNTH 145158
7-61
7-62
RF-5720
TP1 TP2 TP5

TP4
TP3
CR1
ÁÁÁÁÁ
1 2
C22
L2
ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁ
Á
U9
U7
U3
U5
U4
(XU4)
U2
CR2
U8
J1
C2
U6
U11
Q1
U10
C10
39 40
Figure 7-14. A3A2A1 FEC PWB Assembly Component Side Assembly Drawing (10284-2430 Rev. A)
C3
C23
R1 R10
R2
C7
C6
R12
R17
R11 C5
R8 R18
C20
R4 C4
C13 R3
R5
C14
C15 R7 C1
R6
C8
R20 C18 C21
R19 R9
C17
10284-2430b
Figure 7-15. A3A2A1 FEC PWB Asssembly Wire Side Assembly Drawing (10284-2430 Rev. A)
7-63/7-64
RF-5720
RF-5720
7-64
RF-5720
7.5 A5 INTERFACE PWB ASSEMBLY

diagram for A5 Interface PWB Assembly (10284-2610).
Table 7-9. A5 Interface PWB Assembly Parts List (10284-2610 Rev. D)
C1 C13-0103-473 CAP .047UF 10% 100V SMD
C2 C13-0103-473 CAP .047UF 10% 100V SMD
C3 C13-0103-473 CAP .047UF 10% 100V SMD
C4 C13-0103-473 CAP .047UF 10% 100V SMD
C5 C13-0103-473 CAP .047UF 10% 100V SMD
C6 C13-0103-473 CAP .047UF 10% 100V SMD
C7 C13-0103-473 CAP .047UF 10% 100V SMD
C8 C13-0103-473 CAP .047UF 10% 100V SMD
C10 C13-0103-473 CAP .047UF 10% 100V SMD
C12 C13-0103-473 CAP .047UF 10% 100V SMD
C14 C13-0103-473 CAP .047UF 10% 100V SMD
C16 C13-0101-270 CAP 27PF 10% 100V SMD
C17 C13-0101-270 CAP 27PF 10% 100V SMD
C18 C13-0103-473 CAP .047UF 10% 100V SMD
C19 C13-0103-103 CAP .01UF 10% 100V SMD
C21 C13-0103-103 CAP .01UF 10% 100V SMD
C22 C13-0103-473 CAP .047UF 10% 100V SMD
C23 C13-0103-473 CAP .047UF 10% 100V SMD
C24 C13-0103-473 CAP .047UF 10% 100V SMD
C25 C13-0103-473 CAP .047UF 10% 100V SMD
C26 C13-0103-473 CAP .047UF 10% 100V SMD
C27 C13-0103-473 CAP .047UF 10% 100V SMD
C28 C22-0010-226 CAP 22UF 10% 10V TANT
C29 C22-0010-226 CAP 22UF 10% 10V TANT
C30 C22-0010-226 CAP 22UF 10% 10V TANT
C31 C13-0103-473 CAP .047UF 10% 100V SMD
C32 C13-0103-473 CAP .047UF 10% 100V SMD
C33 C13-0103-473 CAP .047UF 10% 100V SMD
C34 C13-0103-103 CAP .01UF 10% 100V SMD
C35 C13-0103-103 CAP .01UF 10% 100V SMD
J1 J46-0055-040 HEADER RT ANGLE 40 PIN
JMP2 R85-0125-100 RES 10 5% 1/8W FILM
7-69
RF-5720
Table 7-9. A5 Interface PWB Assembly Parts List (10284-2610 Rev. D) (Cont.)
JMP3 R85-0125-101 RES 100 5% 1/8W FILM
P1 10181-2511-64 CONN RECEPTACLE 64 PIN
R1 R85-0125-102 RES 1.0K 5% 1/8W FILM
R2 R85-0125-101 RES 100 5% 1/8W FILM
R3 R85-0125-103 RES 10K 5% 1/8W FILM
R4 R85-0125-101 RES 100 5% 1/8W FILM
R5 R85-0125-101 RES 100 5% 1/8W FILM
R6 R85-0125-101 RES 100 5% 1/8W FILM
R7 R85-0125-103 RES 10K 5% 1/8W FILM
R9 R85-0125-103 RES 10K 5% 1/8W FILM
R10 R85-0125-473 RES 47K 5% 1/8W FILM
R11 R85-0125-101 RES 100 5% 1/8W FILM
R12 R85-0125-103 RES 10K 5% 1/8W FILM
R13 R85-0125-101 RES 100 5% 1/8W FILM
R17 R85-0125-101 RES 100 5% 1/8W FILM
R18 R85-0125-472 RES 4.7K 5% 1/8W FILM
R29 R85-0125-100 RES 10 5% 1/8W FILM
R30 R85-0125-100 RES 10 5% 1/8W FILM
R31 R85-0125-100 RES 10 5% 1/8W FILM
R32 R85-0125-101 RES 100 5% 1/8W FILM
R33 R85-0125-101 RES 100 5% 1/8W FILM
R34 R85-0125-101 RES 100 5% 1/8W FILM
R35 R85-0125-101 RES 100 5% 1/8W FILM
R37 R85-0125-103 RES 10K 5% 1/8W FILM
R38 R85-0125-103 RES 10K 5% 1/8W FILM
R39 R85-0125-103 RES 10K 5% 1/8W FILM
R40 R85-0125-103 RES 10K 5% 1/8W FILM
R42 R85-0125-101 RES 100 5% 1/8W FILM
R43 R85-0125-101 RES 100 5% 1/8W FILM
R44 R85-0125-101 RES 100 5% 1/8W FILM
R53 R85-0125-101 RES 100 5% 1/8W FILM
R54 R85-0125-101 RES 100 5% 1/8W FILM
R55 R85-0125-101 RES 100 5% 1/8W FILM
R56 R85-0125-101 RES 100 5% 1/8W FILM
R57 R85-0125-101 RES 100 5% 1/8W FILM
R58 R85-0125-101 RES 100 5% 1/8W FILM
R59 R85-0125-101 RES 100 5% 1/8W FILM
R60 R85-0125-101 RES 100 5% 1/8W FILM
7-70
RF-5720
R61 R85-0125-101 RES 100 5% 1/8W FILM
R62 R85-0125-101 RES 100 5% 1/8W FILM
R63 R85-0125-101 RES 100 5% 1/8W FILM
R64 R85-0125-101 RES 100 5% 1/8W FILM
R68 R85-0125-153 RES 15K 5% 1/8W FILM
R69 R85-0125-153 RES 15K 5% 1/8W FILM
R70 R85-0125-154 RES 150K 5% 1/8W FILM
R71 R85-0004-334 RES 22.1K 1% 1/8W FLM
R72 R85-0004-334 RES 22.1K 1% 1/8W FLM
R73 R85-0125-472 RES 4.7K 5% 1/8W FILM
R74 R85-0125-104 RES 100K 5% 1/8W FILM
R75 R85-0125-104 RES 100K 5% 1/8W FILM
R76 R85-0125-563 RES 56K 5% 1/8W FILM
R77 R85-0125-563 RES 56K 5% 1/8W FILM
R78 R85-0125-273 RES 27K 5% 1/8W FILM
R79 R85-0125-100 RES 10 5% 1/8W FILM
R80 R85-0125-101 RES 100 5% 1/8W FILM
R81 R85-0125-101 RES 100 5% 1/8W FILM
R82 R85-0125-153 RES 15K 5% 1/8W FILM
R83 R85-0125-101 RES 100 5% 1/8W FILM
R84 R85-0125-101 RES 100 5% 1/8W FILM
R86 R85-0125-101 RES 100 5% 1/8W FILM
R87 R85-0125-101 RES 100 5% 1/8W FILM
R89 R85-0125-101 RES 100 5% 1/8W FILM
R90 R85-0125-101 RES 100 5% 1/8W FILM
R91 R85-0125-274 RES 270K 5% 1/8W FILM
R92 R85-0125-103 RES 10K 5% 1/8W FILM
R93 R85-0125-101 RES 100 5% 1/8W FILM
R97 R85-0125-393 RES 39K 5% 1/8W FILM
R98 R85-0125-223 RES 22K 5% 1/8W FILM
R99 R85-0125-183 RES 18K 5% 1/8W FILM
R101 – R103 R85-0125-103 RES 10K 5% 1/8W FILM
R104 R85-0125-100 RES 10 5% 1/8W FILM
U1 I27-0017-311 IC MICMPTR 8-BIT 80C31
U4 I26-0017-002 IC 8KX8 SRAM 6264
U9 I17-0007-001 IC 145406 DRVR/RCVR PLA
7-71
RF-5720
U10 I61-0009-001 IC DUSART 85C30
U11 – U12 I06-0015-001 IC ANALOG SWITCH DG413
U13 I30-0032-001 IC OP AMP DUAL 062
U14 I20-0010-000 IC LM2903 COMPARATOR PL
Y1 Y15-0004-037 XTAL 3.6864 MHZ
7-72
CR1 CR2
J1
U6
U2
C28
2
1
U4
U3
(XU3)
CR4
U10
CR3
U1
U7
U14
U13
U11
U12
U9
U5
C29
64
P1
1
C30
Y1
Q1
Figure 7-17. A5 Interface PWB Assembly Component Side Assembly Drawing (10284-2610 Rev. A)
7-73
RF-5720
RF-5720
R5 R6 R37 R2
R4 R18
R38 R7
R40
R29 R39
C2
R1
Figure 7-18. A5 Interface PWB Assembly Wire Side Assembly Drawing (10284-2610 Rev. A)
R3
R30
R12
C3 C6 R33
JMP1
R11 C1
R31 C4 R10 R9
C8
R32 C5
R42
R64
R35 R77 C21

R92
R91 R93 R76
R57 R78 C33 C32
R43 C19
R90 R68
R17
C35 R69
C14 C31 R98 R99
R89
R74 R55 C34 R82
R97
R70
R84
R13
C25 R73 R72
C24 R80
R83 C22
JMP2 R87 R71

C27 R79
C10
R102
R54 C26 C23
R103
R86 R81
R56
C12
R75 R58
C7 R59
C17
R104
R34 R44 R61

R53
R62 R101
C18
R60
JMP3 R63 C16
7-74
RF-5720
7.6 A6 FRONT PANEL CONTROLLER PWB ASSEMBLY
diagram for A6 Front Panel Controller PWB Assembly (10284-2700).
Table 7-10. A6 Front Panel Controller PWB Assembly Parts List (10284-2700 Rev. D)
BT1 B41-0013-002 BAT LITHIUM 3.5V
C2 C13-0103-102 CAP 1000PF 10% 100V SMD
C3 C13-0103-102 CAP 1000PF 10% 100V SMD
C4 C13-0103-102 CAP 1000PF 10% 100V SMD
C5 C13-0103-102 CAP 1000PF 10% 100V SMD
C6 C13-0103-102 CAP 1000PF 10% 100V SMD
C7 C13-0103-103 CAP .01UF 10% 100V SMD
C8 C13-0103-103 CAP .01UF 10% 100V SMD
C9 C13-0103-103 CAP .01UF 10% 100V SMD
C10 C13-0103-103 CAP .01UF 10% 100V SMD
C12 C13-0103-103 CAP .01UF 10% 100V SMD
C13 C13-0103-103 CAP .01UF 10% 100V SMD
C14 C13-0103-103 CAP .01UF 10% 100V SMD
C15 C13-0103-103 CAP .01UF 10% 100V SMD
C16 C22-0015-226 CAP 22UF 10% 15V TANT
C18 C13-0103-102 CAP 1000PF 10% 100V SMD
C19 C13-0103-103 CAP .01UF 10% 100V SMD
C20 C13-0103-102 CAP 1000PF 10% 100V SMD
C21 C13-0103-102 CAP 1000PF 10% 100V SMD
C22 C13-0103-102 CAP 1000PF 10% 100V SMD
C23 C13-0103-102 CAP 1000PF 10% 100V SMD
J1 J46-0007-014 HEADER, RIGHT ANGLE
JMP2 R85-0125-100 RES 10 5% 1/8W FILM
JMP3 R85-0125-100 RES 10 5% 1/8W FILM
P1 10181-2511-30 CONN, 30 POS
R1 R85-0125-101 RES 100 5% 1/8W FILM
R2 R85-0125-101 RES 100 5% 1/8W FILM
R3 R85-0125-100 RES 10 5% 1/8W FILM
R4 R85-0125-101 RES 100 5% 1/8W FILM
R5 R85-0125-101 RES 100 5% 1/8W FILM
7-83
RF-5720
Table 7-10. A6 Front Panel Controller PWB Assembly Parts List (10284-2700 Rev. D) (Cont.)
R6 R85-0125-101 RES 100 5% 1/8W FILM
R7 R85-0125-101 RES 100 5% 1/8W FILM
R8 R85-0125-101 RES 100 5% 1/8W FILM
R9 R85-0125-103 RES 10K 5% 1/8W FILM
R10 R85-0125-101 RES 100 5% 1/8W FILM
R11 R85-0125-103 RES 10K 5% 1/8W FILM
R12 R85-0125-101 RES 100 5% 1/8W FILM
R13 R85-0125-101 RES 100 5% 1/8W FILM
R14 R85-0125-101 RES 100 5% 1/8W FILM
R15 R85-0125-102 RES 1.0K 5% 1/8W FILM
R16 R85-0125-473 RES 47K 5% 1/8W FILM
R17 R85-0125-100 RES 10 5% 1/8W FILM
R19 R85-0125-103 RES 10K 5% 1/8W FILM
R20 R85-0125-102 RES 1.0K 5% 1/8W FILM
R21 R85-0125-101 RES 100 5% 1/8W FILM
R22 R85-0125-101 RES 100 5% 1/8W FILM
R23 R85-0125-472 RES 4.7K 5% 1/8W FILM
R24 R85-0125-103 RES 10K 5% 1/8W FILM
R25 R85-0125-101 RES 100 5% 1/8W FILM
R26 R85-0125-103 RES 10K 5% 1/8W FILM
R27 R85-0125-101 RES 100 5% 1/8W FILM
R28 R85-0125-474 RES 470K 5% 1/8W FILM
R29 R85-0125-101 RES 100 5% 1/8W FILM
U1 I27-0017-001 IC, MICMPTR 8-BIT TP80C51
U4 I26-0017-002 IC 8KX8 SRAM 6264
U6 I01-0000-102 IC 4020B PLASTIC CMOS
7-84
CR4 CR6
CR3
J1
U5
U7 U2
BT1
2 14
1 13
CR1 U1
U4 U3
CR5
(XU3)
CR2
U8
U6
U9
16 30 C16
P1
15 1
Figure 7-20. A6 Front Panel Controller PWB Assembly Component Side Assembly Drawing (10284-2700 Rev. A)
7-85
RF-5720
7-86
RF-5720
R18 C11 JMP3 C9 C15 C8 C7 R12 C6

R29
R17 R20 R11 C4
C23
R6 C1
C10 C12
R25 R3 C2
R24 R4 C21
R14 C20
R16 R23
R22 C18
R27 C22
R15 R7
R5 R26
R8 R21
C19
C13 R10 C3
C14 C17
C5
JMP2 R9
R19
R1 R28
R2
R13
Figure 7-21. A6 Front Panel Controller PWB Assembly Wire Side Assembly Drawing (10284-2700 Rev. A)
RF-5720
7.7 A8 FRONT PANEL MODULE

Front Panel Module A8 contains the Front Panel PWB Assembly, Filter Board PWB Assembly, and LCD PWB
Assembly. Table 7-11 is the parts list for A8 Front Panel Module (10284-2000).
Table 7-11. A8 Front Panel Module Parts List (10284-2000 Rev. H)
–– 10181-2017 BEZEL, KEYPAD
–– 10181-2018-02 KEYPAD, SILICONE RUBBER
–– 10284-2019 LENS, DISPLAY
–– 10012-2021 KNOB CONTROL
–– 10243-2021 CASTING, CONTROL KNOB
–– 10012-2028 HANDLE FRONT PANEL
–– 10284-3200-05 CAP ASSY
–– 10284-3200-02 CAP ASSY
–– MS51957-15 PHS SS 4-40X3/8
A1 10284-2110 PWB ASSY, FRONT PANEL
A2 10284-2120 PWB ASSY, FILTER BOARD
A3 10284-2130 PWB ASSY, LCD
A4 10181-2150 PWB ASSY, KEYPAD
7.7.1 A8A1 Front Panel PWB Assembly

diagram for A8A1 Front Panel PWB Assembly (10284-2110).
Table 7-12. A8A1 Front Panel PWB Assembly Parts List (10284-2110 Rev. D)
C1 C13-0103-473 CAP .047UF 10% 100V SMD
C2 C13-0101-680 CAP 68PF 10% 100V SMD
C3 C13-0103-473 CAP .047UF 10% 100V SMD
C4 C13-0103-473 CAP .047UF 10% 100V SMD
C5 C13-0101-151 CAP 150PF 10% 100V SMD
C6 C13-0103-473 CAP .047UF 10% 100V SMD
C7 C13-0103-473 CAP .047UF 10% 100V SMD
C8 C13-0103-473 CAP .047UF 10% 100V SMD
C9 C13-0103-473 CAP .047UF 10% 100V SMD
C10 C13-0103-473 CAP .047UF 10% 100V SMD
C11 C13-0103-473 CAP .047UF 10% 100V SMD
C12 C13-0103-473 CAP .047UF 10% 100V SMD
C13 C13-0103-473 CAP .047UF 10% 100V SMD
C14 C13-0103-473 CAP .047UF 10% 100V SMD
C15 C13-0103-473 CAP .047UF 10% 100V SMD
C16 C13-0103-473 CAP .047UF 10% 100V SMD
7-89
RF-5720
Table 7-12. A8A1 Front Panel PWB Assembly Parts List (10284-2110 Rev. D) (Cont.)
C17 C13-0103-473 CAP .047UF 10% 100V SMD
C18 C13-0103-473 CAP .047UF 10% 100V SMD
C19 C13-0103-473 CAP .047UF 10% 100V SMD
C20 C22-0020-475 CAP 4.7UF 10% 20V TANT
C21 C22-0020-475 CAP 4.7UF 10% 20V TANT
C23 C13-0103-102 CAP 1000PF 10% 100V SMD
C25 C13-0103-473 CAP .047UF 10% 100V SMD
C26 M39003/01-6184 CAP .47UF 10% 50V TANT-M
C27 C13-0103-223 CAP .022UF 10% 100V SMD
C28 C13-0103-473 CAP .047UF 10% 100V SMD
C29 C13-0101-151 CAP 150PF 10% 100V SMD
C30 C13-0103-473 CAP .047UF 10% 100V SMD
C31 C13-0103-473 CAP .047UF 10% 100V SMD
C32 C13-0103-473 CAP .047UF 10% 100V SMD
C33 C13-0103-473 CAP .047UF 10% 100V SMD
C34 C13-0103-473 CAP .047UF 10% 100V SMD
C35 C13-0103-473 CAP .047UF 10% 100V SMD
C36 C13-0103-473 CAP .047UF 10% 100V SMD
C37 C13-0103-473 CAP .047UF 10% 100V SMD
C38 C13-0103-471 CAP 470PF 10% 100V SMD
C39 C13-0103-473 CAP .047UF 10% 100V SMD
C40 C13-0103-473 CAP .047UF 10% 100V SMD
C41 C13-0103-473 CAP .047UF 10% 100V SMD
C42 C22-0010-475 CAP 4.7UF 10% 10V TANT
C43 M39014/02-1320V CAP .47UF 10% 50V CER-R
C44 C13-0103-473 CAP .047UF 10% 100V SMD
C45 C13-0103-473 CAP .047UF 10% 100V SMD
C46 C13-0103-473 CAP .047UF 10% 100V SMD
C47 C13-0103-473 CAP .047UF 10% 100V SMD
C48 C13-0103-473 CAP .047UF 10% 100V SMD
C49 C13-0103-473 CAP .047UF 10% 100V SMD
C50 C13-0103-473 CAP .047UF 10% 100V SMD
C51 C13-0103-473 CAP .047UF 10% 100V SMD
C52 C13-0103-473 CAP .047UF 10% 100V SMD
C53 C13-0103-473 CAP .047UF 10% 100V SMD
C54 C13-0103-473 CAP .047UF 10% 100V SMD
C55 C13-0103-473 CAP .047UF 10% 100V SMD
C56 C13-0103-473 CAP .047UF 10% 100V SMD
C57 C13-0103-473 CAP .047UF 10% 100V SMD
7-90
RF-5720
C58 C13-0103-473 CAP .047UF 10% 100V SMD
C59 C13-0103-473 CAP .047UF 10% 100V SMD
C60 C13-0103-473 CAP .047UF 10% 100V SMD
C61 C13-0103-473 CAP .047UF 10% 100V SMD
C62 C13-0103-473 CAP .047UF 10% 100V SMD
C63 C13-0103-473 CAP .047UF 10% 100V SMD
C64 C13-0103-473 CAP .047UF 10% 100V SMD
C65 C13-0103-473 CAP .047UF 10% 100V SMD
C66 C13-0103-473 CAP .047UF 10% 100V SMD
C67 C13-0103-473 CAP .047UF 10% 100V SMD
C68 C13-0103-152 CAP 1500PF 10% 100V SMD
CR4 1N5711 DIODE SCHOTTKY 70V .25W
J3 J69-0005-001 6 PIN AUDIO CONNECTOR
J4 J46-0087-120 CONN PC.1 TOP ENTR 20 PIN
J5 J46-0088-010 CONN 10 POS SINGLE ROW
J6 J46-0087-114 CONN PC .1 TOP ENT 14 PIN
J7 J46-0088-103 CONN PCMT TOP ENTR 3 PIN
L1 10284-7400 CHOKE DC 60UH
L2 10284-7400 CHOKE DC 60UH
P1 10284-2118 CABLE ASSY. RIBBON 14
Q2 2N2907A XSTR SS/GP PNP TO-18
R1 R85-0125-224 RES 220K 5% 1/8W FILM
R2 R85-0125-104 RES 100K 5% 1/8W FILM
R3 R85-0125-104 RES 100K 5% 1/8W FILM
R4 R85-0125-621 RES 620 5% 1/8W FILM
R5 R85-0125-621 RES 620 5% 1/8W FILM
R6 R85-0125-104 RES 100K 5% 1/8W FILM
R7 R85-0125-103 RES 10K 5% 1/8W FILM
R8 R85-0125-223 RES 22K 5% 1/8W FILM
R9 R85-0125-103 RES 10K 5% 1/8W FILM
R10 R85-0125-103 RES 10K 5% 1/8W FILM
R11 R85-0125-153 RES 15K 5% 1/8W FILM
7-91
RF-5720
R12 R85-0125-153 RES 15K 5% 1/8W FILM
R13 R85-0125-153 RES 15K 5% 1/8W FILM
R14 R85-0125-104 RES 100K 5% 1/8W FILM
R15 R85-0125-104 RES 100K 5% 1/8W FILM
R16 R85-0125-273 RES 27K 5% 1/8W FILM
R17 R85-0125-510 RES 51 5% 1/8W FILM
R18 R85-0125-680 RES 68 5% 1/8W FILM
R19 R85-0125-820 RES 82 5% 1/8W FILM
R20 R85-0125-101 RES 100 5% 1/8W FILM
R21 R85-0125-181 RES 180 5% 1/8W FILM
R22 R85-0125-271 RES 270 5% 1/8W FILM
R23 R85-0125-511 RES 510 5% 1/8W FILM
R24 R85-0125-102 RES 1.0K 5% 1/8W FILM
R25 R85-0125-182 RES 1.8K 5% 1/8W FILM
R26 R85-0125-332 RES 3.3K 5% 1/8W FILM
R27 R85-0125-103 RES 10K 5% 1/8W FILM
R28 R85-0125-621 RES 620 5% 1/8W FILM
R29 R85-0125-103 RES 10K 5% 1/8W FILM
R31 R85-0125-223 RES 22K 5% 1/8W FILM
R32 R85-0125-511 RES 510 5% 1/8W FILM
R33 R85-0125-221 RES 220 5% 1/8W FILM
R34 R85-0125-273 RES 27K 5% 1/8W FILM
R35 R85-0125-104 RES 100K 5% 1/8W FILM
R36 R85-0125-103 RES 10K 5% 1/8W FILM
R37 R85-0125-103 RES 10K 5% 1/8W FILM
R38 R85-0125-103 RES 10K 5% 1/8W FILM
R39 R85-0125-103 RES 10K 5% 1/8W FILM
R40 R85-0125-103 RES 10K 5% 1/8W FILM
R41 R85-0125-103 RES 10K 5% 1/8W FILM
R42 R85-0125-100 RES 10 5% 1/8W FILM
R43 R85-0125-333 RES 33K 5% 1/8W FILM
R44 R85-0125-102 RES 1.0K 5% 1/8W FILM
R45 R85-0125-102 RES 1.0K 5% 1/8W FILM
R46 R85-0125-102 RES 1.0K 5% 1/8W FILM
R47 R85-0125-102 RES 1.0K 5% 1/8W FILM
R48 R85-0125-102 RES 1.0K 5% 1/8W FILM
R49 R85-0125-102 RES 1.0K 5% 1/8W FILM
R50 R85-0125-102 RES 1.0K 5% 1/8W FILM
R51 R85-0125-102 RES 1.0K 5% 1/8W FILM
7-92
RF-5720
R52 R85-0125-472 RES 4.7K 5% 1/8W FILM
R53 R85-0125-222 RES 2.2K 5% 1/8W FILM
R54 R85-0125-101 RES 100 5% 1/8W FILM
R55 R85-0125-101 RES 100 5% 1/8W FILM
R56 R85-0125-101 RES 100 5% 1/8W FILM
R57 R85-0125-101 RES 100 5% 1/8W FILM
R58 R85-0125-101 RES 100 5% 1/8W FILM
R59 R85-0125-101 RES 100 5% 1/8W FILM
R60 R85-0125-101 RES 100 5% 1/8W FILM
R61 R85-0125-101 RES 100 5% 1/8W FILM
R65 R85-0125-101 RES 100 5% 1/8W FILM
R66 R85-0125-101 RES 100 5% 1/8W FILM
R67 R85-0125-101 RES 100 5% 1/8W FILM
R68 R85-0125-101 RES 100 5% 1/8W FILM
R69 R85-0125-101 RES 100 5% 1/8W FILM
R70 R85-0125-101 RES 100 5% 1/8W FILM
R71 R85-0125-101 RES 100 5% 1/8W FILM
R72 R85-0125-101 RES 100 5% 1/8W FILM
R73 R85-0125-101 RES 100 5% 1/8W FILM
R74 R85-0125-101 RES 100 5% 1/8W FILM
R75 R85-0125-101 RES 100 5% 1/8W FILM
R76 R85-0125-101 RES 100 5% 1/8W FILM
R77 R85-0125-101 RES 100 5% 1/8W FILM
R78 R85-0125-101 RES 100 5% 1/8W FILM
R79 R85-0125-101 RES 100 5% 1/8W FILM
R80 R85-0125-101 RES 100 5% 1/8W FILM
R81 R85-0125-101 RES 100 5% 1/8W FILM
R82 R85-0125-112 RES 1.1K 5% 1/8W FILM
R83 R85-0125-153 RES 15K 5% 1/8W FILM
R84 R85-0004-409 RES 121K 1% 1/8W FLM
R85 R85-0004-366 RES 47.5K 1% 1/8W FLM
R86 R85-0125-122 RES 1.2K 5% 1/8W FILM
R87 R85-0125-101 RES 100 5% 1/8W FILM
R88 R85-0125-101 RES 100 5% 1/8W FILM
R89 R85-0125-103 RES 10K 5% 1/8W FILM
R90 R85-0125-103 RES 10K 5% 1/8W FILM
R92 R85-0125-223 RES 22K 5% 1/8W FILM
R93 R65-0003-153 RES 15K 5% 1/4W CAR FILM
R94 R65-0003-472 RES 4.7K 5% 1/4W CAR FILM
7-93
RF-5720
S1 10243-7601 SW RTRY 12 POS
S2 10284-7602 SWITCH, MODE
T1 T20-0003-001 TRANSFORMER
T2 T20-0003-001 TRANSFORMER
U1 I30-0032-001 IC OP AMP DUAL 062
U2 I06-0013-001 IC, ANALOG SW DPDT, CMOS
U7 I30-0035-001 IC, TLO72IP OP AMP
U8 I01-0000-018 IC 4049UB PLASTIC CMOS
U9 I30-0035-001 IC, TLO72IP OP AMP
U11 I36-0005-002 IC CMOS ENCODER
U18 I30-0043-001 IC OP AMP DUAL 33072
VR1 1N5226B DIODE 3.3V 5% .5W ZENER
VR8 I23-0001-001 IC LM135H TEMP SEN TO-46
7-94
Q3
Q2
R93
R94
U8
U16 U17 U2
CR4
U12
U11
C43
J7
J6 VR8
U7 U10 S2
VR5
VR4
CR1
C42
U18 U1
Q1
J4
CR3
VR3
U15 U5
VR1
U3
VR2
T2
CR2
J3
S1 U9 U13 U14
U4
T1
C26
C20
P3 P2 C21 JMP1
P1
Figure 7-23. A8A1 Front Panel PWB Assembly Component Side Assembly Drawing (10284-2110 Rev. A)
7-95
RF-5720
RF-5720
R26
R25
R27
R24
R46 R23
R82
C62
R84
R22
R86
R49 R47 R21
Figure 7-24. A8A1 Front Panel PWB Assembly Wire Side Assembly Drawing (10284-2110 Rev. A)
R51
R50 R48 R20
R85
R87
R19
C63 C64
R77 R18 R17
C51
R44
C27
C52 R45 R83 R88 C49
R28
C48 C50
C53 R53 R78 C47
R31
C54 R52 R79 R80 R81
C46 R11 R67
C45
C44
C61
C15 R12 C14

C16 R13 C13
C18
C17 R66 C66
R65 C67
C68
R92
R57 C8
R71
C7
C9 R56 R58
C28 C25
R15
R70
R16
C58 R68
C59
C57
C60 R29
C19 R14
C38
C29
R34
R35
R36
C23
R69
C10
R60
C31 R33 R32 C11

C30 R59
R73
R90
R61 C12
C41
C40
C37
R74
R72
R76 C36
C39
C33
C32 R42 C34
R75 C35
C4 C65 R6 R55
C3 C5 C55
R4
R54 R5
C1 R2
R89
C56
R1
R41
R7
C2
R43
R3
C6
R38
R39
R10
R9
R40
R37 R8
7-96
RF-5720
7.7.2 A8A2 Front Panel Filter Board PWB Assembly

diagram for A8A2 Front Panel Filter Board PWB Assembly (10284-2120).
Table 7-13. A8A2 Front Panel Filter Board PWB Assembly Parts List (10284-2120 Rev. A)
C1 C13-0103-103 CAP .01UF 10% 100V SMD
C2 – C7 C13-0103-222 CAP 2200PF 10% 100V SMD
C8 C13-0103-222 CAP 2200PF 10% 100V SMD
C9 C13-0103-222 CAP 2200PF 10% 100V SMD
C10 C13-0103-222 CAP 2200PF 10% 100V SMD
C11 C13-0103-222 CAP 2200PF 10% 100V SMD
C12 C13-0103-222 CAP 2200PF 10% 100V SMD
C13 C13-0103-222 CAP 2200PF 10% 100V SMD
C14 C13-0103-222 CAP 2200PF 10% 100V SMD
C15 C13-0103-222 CAP 2200PF 10% 100V SMD
C16 C13-0103-222 CAP 2200PF 10% 100V SMD
C17 C13-0103-222 CAP 2200PF 10% 100V SMD
C18 C13-0103-222 CAP 2200PF 10% 100V SMD
C19 C13-0103-222 CAP 2200PF 10% 100V SMD
C20 C13-0103-222 CAP 2200PF 10% 100V SMD
C21 C13-0103-222 CAP 2200PF 10% 100V SMD
C22 C13-0103-222 CAP 2200PF 10% 100V SMD
C23 C13-0103-222 CAP 2200PF 10% 100V SMD
C24 C13-0103-222 CAP 2200PF 10% 100V SMD
C25 C13-0103-222 CAP 2200PF 10% 100V SMD
C26 C13-0103-222 CAP 2200PF 10% 100V SMD
C27 C13-0103-222 CAP 2200PF 10% 100V SMD
C28 C13-0103-222 CAP 2200PF 10% 100V SMD
C29 C13-0103-222 CAP 2200PF 10% 100V SMD
C30 C13-0103-103 CAP .01UF 10% 100V SMD
C31, C32 C13-0103-222 CAP 2200PF 10% 100V SMD
J1 J69-0001-621 CONN AUDIO 6 PIN
J2 U-318/U-1 CONN,14 SKT,DATA,PWB
L2 – L15 L45-0005-472 INDUCTOR CHIP 4.7 UH
L17 L45-0005-472 INDUCTOR CHIP 4.7 UH
L18 L45-0005-472 INDUCTOR CHIP 4.7 UH
P4 J46-0084-320 HDR 2ROW .400/.120 20 PIN
7-107
RF-5720
J1 J2
A
E B
1
F
C
2 P4 1
Figure 7-26. A8A2 Front Panel Filter Board PWB Assembly Component Side
Assembly Drawing (10284-2120 Rev. A)
L7 C9 C10
C32
C31
C30
C29
C6
C5
L8
L10
C12
C22
C23
C19
C21
C27
C25
L2
C28
C3
L5
L11
L14
L18
L3
C1
C13
C11
C8
C18
C17
L15
L9
C15
C26
C24
L12
L17
C20
C7
L6
C4
C2
L4
C14 C16 L13
10284-2120b
Figure 7-27. A8A2 Front Panel Filter Board PWB Assembly Wire Side Assembly Drawing
(10284-2120 Rev. A)
7-108
RF-5720
7.7.3 A8A3 LCD PWB Assembly

Table 7-14 is the parts list and Figure 7-29 is the assembly drawing for LCD PWB Assembly A8A3
(10284-2130).
Table 7-14. A8A3 LCD PWB Assembly Parts List (10284-2130 Rev. –)
A1 10284-7000 LCD ASSEMBLY
J1 J46-0084-314 HEADER 14 POS DUAL ROW
J2 J46-0074-703 CONN, 3PIN SINGLE
7-111
7-112
RF-5720
Figure 7-29. A8A3 LCD PWB Assembly Component Side Assembly Drawing (10284-2130 Rev. –)
RF-5720
7.8 POWER SUPPLY: BATTERY ELIMINATOR ASSEMBLY
The power supply used with the RF-5720 Modem is the Battery Eliminator Assembly (10284-6000). Tables 7-15
through 7-18 are the parts lists, Figure 7-30 is the assembly drawing, and Figure 7-31 is the schematic diagram for
the Battery Eliminator Assembly (10284-6000)
Table 7-15. Battery Eliminator Assembly Parts List (10284-6000 Rev. G)

A1 10284-6010 HEATSINK ASSEMBLY
J1 MS3110J8-4PW CONNECTOR, WATERTIGHT SEAL
P1 J46-0017-006 CONN 6 PIN
P3 J46-0017-004 CONN 4 PIN F/M .156X22GA
Table 7-16. Battery Eliminator Heatsink Assembly A1 Parts List (10284-6010 Rev. A)
A1 10284-6020 INPUT PWB ASSEMBLY
A2 10091-3060 ASSY,BRIDGE RECTIFIER
CR1 D22-0017-000 DIODE 10A 100V RECT GP
Q1 Q50-0015-001 TRANSISTOR NPN MJH11018
T1 T40-0002-013 XFMR 20V C.T. 2.80A
Table 7-17. Battery Eliminator Input PWB Assembly Parts List (10284-6020 Rev. C)
C1 10075-1213 CAP, 2700UF, 80V, ELEC.
C2 C28-0050-122 CAP 1200UF 50V ELEC
F1 F-0010 FUSE 1.0A QA 250V 3AG
J1 J46-0035-004 CONN 4 PIN
J2 J46-0035-005 CONN. .156 CTC 5 PIN
J3 J46-0035-006 CONN 6 PIN SINGLE 156
L1 L13-0003-471 CHOKE, DC 470UH D2420470
Q2 Q15-0006-001 TRANSISTOR, NPN, MJD47-1
R1 RCR42G471JM RES 470 5% 2W CAR COMP
R2 R12-0012-027 RES, 0.27, 1% 5W
R3 R65-0003-223 RES 22K 5% 1/4W CAR FILM
R4 RCR20G332JM RES 3.3K 5% 1/2W CAR COMP
S1 S30-0005-000 SW DPDT 3A 115/230V PNLMT
VR1 1N4752A DIODE 33V 5% 1W ZENER
VR2 1N4759 DIODE, 62V, 10%, 1W, ZENER
7-113
RF-5720
Table 7-18. Battery Eliminator Bridge Rectifier Assembly Parts List (10091-3060 Rev. B)
–– J45-0008-003 KEYING PLUG
–– J55-0013-005 COVER, CONN, 5 PIN
CR2 D23-0001-201 DIODE 25A 200V RECT BR
P1 J46-0017-005 CONN, 5 PIN
ÁÁ
ÁÁ CR1 ÁÁ
ÁÁ Q1
ÁÁ
ÁÁ ÁÁ ÁÁ
VR1
CR3
CR4
CR5
L1
ÁÁ
C2 T1
ÁÁ
J1
R2
Q2
ÁÁF1
ÁÁ
VR2
R3
ÁÁ ÁÁ
J3
R1
C1
ÁÁ ÁÁ
R4
J2
S1
Figure 7-30. Battery Eliminator Input PWB Assembly Component Side Assembly Drawing
(10284-6020 Rev. A)
7-114
RF-5720
APPENDIX A
APPENDIX A
ACCESSORIES
A.1 CABLE ACCESSORIES
This section describes the cable accessories available for the modem.
A.1.1 RF-5720 DC Power Cable
The DC Power Cable (10284-0707) is wired to provide DC input voltages for the battery eliminator. It is wired
identically to the KW-7 DC power cable CX-10524/G. It has an MS3116E8-4SW connector on one end and
pigtails (loose wires) on the other end. Table A-1 is the parts list and Figure A-1 is the cable drawing with wire
run list.
Table A-1. RF-5720 DC Power Cable Parts List (10284-0707 Rev. A)
–– W40-0010-002 CABLE SHIELDED 2 COND
P1 MS3116J8-4SW PLUG, POWER
A.1.2 RF-5720 AC Power Cable

The AC Power Cable (10284-0705) can also be used with the RF-5720PS Power Supply. Table A-2 is the parts
list and Figure A-2 is the cable drawing with the wire run list.
Table A-2. RF-5720 AC Power Cable Parts List (10284-0705 Rev. B)
P1 MS3116J8-4SW PLUG, POWER
P2 W-0023 LINE CORD, 6 FT
A.1.3 RF-5720/DTE Cables

The parts lists for the synchronous and asynchronous data terminal interface cables (10284-0703 and 10284-0704)
are shown in Tables A-3 and A-4. Figures A-3 and A-4 are their drawings.
Table A-3. Synchronous DTE Cable Parts List (10284-0703 Rev. B)
–– 10012-0712 CABLE, 12 CONDUCTOR, SHIELD
P1 U-316/U CONNECTOR
P2 J22-0057-103 D CONN 25S SLDR CUP
Table A-4. Asynchronous DTE Cable Parts List (10284-0704 Rev. B)

–– 10012-0712 CABLE, 12 COND. W/SHIELD
–– U-316/U CONNECTOR
P2 J22-0057-103 CONN., 25 SLDR CUP
A-1
RF-5720
APPENDIX A
A.1.4 PRC-104 Audio Cable

Table A-5 is the parts list and Figure A-5 is the cable drawing for the PRC-104 Audio Cable (10284-0723).
Table A-5. PRC-104 Audio Cable (10284-0723 Rev. B)
–– 10012-0705 CABLE, 6 COND. W/SHIELD
P1 P-0339 CONN., AUDIO, 6 PIN
P2 P-0339 CONN., AUDIO, 6 PIN
A.2 MOUNTING SYSTEMS

Table A-6 is the parts list and Figure A-6 is the RF-5720VSM Vehicular Shock Mount for the modem and the
RF-5720PS Power Supply. The shock mount provides isolation from high-impact shock and vibration in vehicular
installations. The modem with power supply is secured by sliding it into two pins on the shock mount.
Table A-6. RF-5720 Vehicular Shock Mount Parts List (10284-0820-01 Rev. B)
–– 10284-0829 TRAY UPPER
–– 10284-0828 PLATE, LOWER
–– 10089-0017 NUT WING
–– 10089-0013 CLAMP, RT (2)
–– W46-0002-001 GROUND STRAP
–– E80-0002-005 SHOCK ISOLATOR (4)
–– 10299-0104 SHOCK PIN (2)
–– 10284-0814 GUIDE (2)
A-2
Figure A-1. DC Power Cable Drawing (10284-0707 Rev. –)
A-3
RF-5720
APPENDIX A
RF-5720
APPENDIX A
NOTES:
1. THIS COMPLETED ASSEMBLY SHALL BE IN ACCORDANCE WITH QC–3000.
2. THE LENGTH OF THIS CABLE IS VARIABLE,
TO BE CALLED OUT ON SALES ORDER AS A DASH NUMBER.
EXAMPLE; 10284–0705–10 FOR A 10’ ASSY.
IF NO LENGTH IS SPECIFIED, THE LENGTH OF THIS
ASSY IS TO BE 6 FEET.
CABLE LENGTH
SEE NOTE 2
2.00” .25”
LINE
GND P2 3 P1
NEUT
P2
FACE VIEW
(REF)
WIRE
WIRE RUN
RUN LIST
LIST
FROM TO ITEM # COLOR

SIGNAL REMARKS
TERM SLV TERM SLV (REF)
P2–LINE P1–B 4 BLACK AC LINE

P2–NEUT P1–D 4 WHITE AC NEUTRAL
P2–GND P1–C 4 GREEN GROUND
NC A
BLACK BLACK
AC LINE B
GREEN GREEN
GROUND C
WHITE WHITE
AC NEUT D
Figure A-2. AC Power Cable Drawing (10284-0705 Rev. A)
A-4
RF-5720
GLOSSARY
GLOSSARY
AC Alternating Current
ADC Analog to Digital Conversion
AIC Analog Interface Chip
ASSY Assembly
BIT Built in Test
bps Bits per second
CT Cypher Text (Encryption Mode)
CTS Clear to Send
DAC Digital to Analog Conversion
dB Decibel, logarithmic voltage ratio
DC Direct Current
DEMOD Demodulation
DPRAM Dual Port Random Access Memory
DTE Data Terminal Equipment
DUSART Dual Universal Synchronous/Asynchronous RX/TX
EMI Electro-Magnetic Interference
ENCRYPTION Digital Data Ciphering and Deciphering
FEC Forward Error Correction
FFT Fast Fourier Transform
FSK Frequency Shift Keying
FSKNS FSK - Narrow Shift
FSKWS FSK - Wide Shift
FSK-A FSK - Narrow shift 2
FSK-V FSK - Variable
GND Ground
HF High Frequency
Hz Hertz (cycles/sec)
IC Integrated Circuit
IFFT Inverse Fast Fourier Transform
I/O Input/Output
LCD Liquid Crystal Display
LD Load on Mode Switch
LED Light Emitting Diode
LPF Low Pass Filter
G-1
RF-5720
GLOSSARY
GLOSSARY (Cont.)
MI Message Indicator
MOD Modulation
MUTE Controlled no output condition
PEP Peak Envelope Power
PLL Phase Lock Loop
PROM Programmable ROM
ppm Parts Per Million
PTT Push to Talk
PWB Printed Wire Board
QPSK Quadrinary Phase Shift Keying
RAM Random Access Memory
RLSD Receive Line Signal Detect
RMT REMOTE on Mode Switch
ROM Read Only Memory
RTS Request to Send
RX Reception
SMD Surface Mounted Device
SNR Signal to Noise Ratio
SSB Single Side Band
STD Standard
TDQPSK Time Differential Quaternary Phase Shift Keying
TX Transmission
UHF Ultra High Frequency
XFMR Transformer
XMTR Transmitter
Z Zeroize on Mode Switch
G-2
TECHNICAL PUBLICATION
EVALUATION FORM
To the User of this Instruction Manual:
HARRIS Corporation, RF Communications Division continually evaluates its technical publications for
completeness, technical accuracy, and organization. You can assist in this process by completing and
returning this form. Please specify section, page number, figure or table number where applicable.
MANUAL TITLE:
MANUAL NUMBER: REVISION: COVER DATE:
GENERAL EXCELLENT GOOD FAIR POOR
TEXT [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]
SETUP/ALIGNMENT INST. [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]
TROUBLESHOOTING INST. [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]
TABLES [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]
ILLUSTRATIONS [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]
PARTS LISTS [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]
CHAPTER EXCELLENT GOOD FAIR POOR
INTRODUCTION/GENERAL INFORMATION [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]
OPERATION [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]
FUNCTIONAL DESC/THEORY OF OPERATION [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]
SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]
TROUBLESHOOTING [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]
CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]
DOCUMENTATION [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]
INSTALLATION [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]
ACCESSORIES [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]
GENERAL COMMENTS: Please include your suggestions for improvements to the manual. Specify chapter,
page, paragraph, figure number, or table number as applicable. Attach examples or extra pages if more
space is needed.
CUT HERE LEAF-043 MAP

NAME: DATE:
CUT HERE
COMPANY:
ADDRESS:
CITY: STATE:
ZIP: COUNTRY:
PHONE NUMBER (INCLUDE AREA CODE):
NOTE
U.S. POSTAL REGULATIONS NO LONGER PERMIT THE USE OF STAPLES. PLEASE SEAL THIS FORM WITH TAPE.
MAKE FIRST FOLD HERE
MAKE LAST FOLD HERE
NO POSTAGE
NECESSARY
IF MAILED
IN THE
UNITED STATES
BUSINESS REPLY MAIL

FIRST CLASS PERMIT NO. 4033 ROCHESTER, N.Y.
POSTAGE WILL BE PAID BY ADDRESSEE
HARRIS CORPORATION
RF COMMUNICATIONS DIVISION
1680 UNIVERSITY AVENUE
ROCHESTER, NEW YORK 14610-1887
ATTN: ACQUISITION LOGISTICS

HARRIS CORPORATION RF COMMUNICATIONS DIVISION
1680 University Avenue Rochester, New York 14610-1887 USA
Tel: 716-244-5830. Fax: 716-242-4755. http://www.harris.com/communications
RF-5720
OPERATION
MODE
SERIAL 4285-U (option) FSK NS FSK–A
SETUP SETUP SETUP SETUP
Bit RATE INTERLEAVING MODEM Bit RATE OFFSET MODEM Bit RATE MARK SPACE OFFSET MODEM Bit RATE MARK SPACE
PORT (± 200 Hz) PORT FREQ FREQ (± 200 Hz) PORT FREQ FREQ
–75 bps – SHORT –1200 bps 10 Hz res 10 Hz res
–150 bps – LONG – SYNC –2400 bps – SYNC –75 bps 2762.5 Hz 2847.5 Hz – SYNC –75 bps 1915 Hz 2085 Hz
–300 bps – ZERO – ASYNC – ASYNC – ASYNC –150 bps
–600 bps
–1200 bps
–2400 bps
–4800 bps
4285-C (option) 39 TONE FSK WS FSK–V
SETUP SETUP SETUP SETUP
MODEM PORT Bit RATE INTERLEAVING MODEM PORT Bit RATE INTERLEAVING OFFSET MODEM Bit RATE MARK SPACE OFFSET MODEM Bit RATE MARK SPACE
(± 200 Hz) PORT FREQ FREQ (± 200 Hz) PORT FREQ FREQz
– SYNC –75 bps – SHORT – SYNC –75 bps – SHORT 10 Hz res 10 Hz res
– ASYNC –150 bps – LONG – ASYNC –150 bps – LONG – SYNC –75 bps 1575 Hz 2425 Hz – SYNC –75 bps (350–3250 Hz)
–300 bps –300 bps – ASYNC –150 bps – ASYNC –150 bps 5 Hz res
–600 bps –600 bps –300 bps –300 bps
–1200 bps –1200 bps –600 bps –600 bps
–2400 bps –2400 bps
–VOICE
5720–024–mp
Figure 3-3. SETUP Flow Chart
3-7/3-8
RF-5720
THEORY OF OPERATION
J3 J1 J2
A8A2 A8A4 A8A3

2X16
FRONT PANEL FILTER KEYPAD LCD A5A1
INTERFACE ASSY TONE

GENERATOR
FRONT PANEL ASSY A8A1
RADIO AUDIO DATA USER

I/O FILL I/O I/O DISPLAY
I/O MICROPROCESSOR
RS–232 ANALOG
I/O I/O
CIRCUITS CIRCUITS
INTERFACE I/O RIBBON 40 80C31
BLACK AUDIO RIBBON CABLE 14 FRONT PANEL CONTROLLER CABLE

A3A3 14
SAMPLE CLOCK PLL
A3A1 A3A2 A1 A6
FFT MOD/DEMOD FEC SYSTEM SWITCHING F PANEL NON

PROCESSOR ANALOG DPRAM PROCESSOR DPRAM PROCESSOR OSCILLATOR BLACK CONTROLLER VOLATILE
INTERFACE INTERFACE POWER MEMORY
CHIP SUPPLY
TMS 320C51 80C186 80C31 80C31
HIGH SPEED SYSTEM BUS
A2A1 A2A2 A4 A5A2 A7A1 A7A2
DPRAM MATRIX DPRAM MATRIX ENCRYPTION LPC–10E LPC–10E

PROCESSOR PROCESSOR POWER ENCRYPTION DIGITAL DIGITAL
#1 #2 SUPPLY VOICE #1 VOICE #2
5720–009–mp
Figure 5-1. Modem Simplified Block

Diagram
5-3/5-4
RF-5720
THEORY OF OPERATION
5720-014
Figure 5-6. 39-Tone Modulation and

Demodulation
5-13/5-14
RF-5720
Figure 7-1. RF-5720 Modem Assemblies

Interconnect Diagram
(10284-5700 Rev. –)
Sheet 1 of 8)
7-3/7-4
RF-5720

(10284-5700 Rev. –)
(Sheet 2 of 8)
7-5/7-6
RF-5720

(10284-5700 Rev. –)
(Sheet 4 of 8)
7-9/7-10
RF-5720

(10284-5700 Rev. –)
(Sheet 3 of 8)
7-7/7-8
RF-5720

(10284-5700 Rev. –)
(Sheet 5 of 8)
7-11/7-12
RF-5720

(10284-5700 Rev. –)
(Sheet 6 of 8)
7-13/7-14
RF-5720

(10284-5700 Rev. –)
(Sheet 7 of 8)
7-15/7-16
RF-5720

(10284-5700 Rev. –)
(Sheet 8 of 8)
7-17/7-18
48
8
J3 J2 J1
AGND 1 AGND 1
+12V 2 +12V 2 AGND 1
FFTREQ 3 NC 3 +12V 2
–12V 4 –12V 4 NC 3
RST FFT 5 RST FFT 5 –12V 4
NC 6 NC 6 19.2 MHZ 5
C30INT 7 C30INT 7 FP POWER ON 6
NC 8 NC 8 NC 7
NC 9 NC 9 NC 8
MP1DPCS 10 MP1DPCS 10 NC 9
RORW 11 RORW 11 NC 10
320MBINT 12 320MBINT 12 NC 11
NC 13 NC 13 NC 12
–BUSY_186 14 NC 14 NC 13
FFT D14 15 FFT D14 15 +5V 14
FFT D12 16 FFT D12 16 DGND 15
FFT D10 17 FFT D10 17 DGND 16
FFT D8 18 FFT D8 18 +5V 17
FFT D6 19 FFT D6 19 POR 18
FFT D4 20 FFT D4 20 NC 19
FFT A9 23 FFT A9 23 NC 22
FFT A3 26 FFT A3 26 RMT PWR ON 25
FRAME CLK 28 FRAME CLK 28 –12V 27
9.6 MHZ CLK 29 9.6 MHZ CLK 29 NC 28
1.2 MHZ CLK 30 1.2 MHZ CLK 30 +12V 29
+5V 31 +5V 31 AGND 30
DGND 32 DGND 32
DGND 33 DGND 33
+5V 34 +5V 34
POR 35 POR 35
HOP CLK 36 HOP CLK 36
NC 37 NC 37
FFT A0 38 FFT A0 38
FFT A2 39 FFT A2 39
FFT A4 40 FFT A4 40
FFT A6 41 FFT A6 41
FFT A8 42 FFT A8 42
FFT A10 43 FFT A10 43
FFT D1 44 FFT D1 44
FFT D3 45 FFT D3 45
FFT D5 46 FFT D5 46
FFT D7 47 FFT D7 47
FFT D9 48 FFT D9 48
FFT D11 49 FFT D11 49
FFT D13 50 FFT D13 50
FFT D15 51 FFT D15 51
SAMPLE CLK 52 SAMPLE CLK 52
MP1MBINT 53 MP1MBINT 53
320DPCS 54 320DPCS 54
NC 55 NC 55
AIC CLK 56 AIC CLK 56
NC 57 NC 57
9
NC 58 NC 58
NC 59 NC 59
NC 60 NC 60
–12V 61 –12V 61
DPINT 62 NC 62
+12V 63 +12V 63
AGND 64 AGND 64
Figure 7-4.
(Sheet 1 of 3)
48
Schematic Diagram
(10284-5701 Rev. B)
48
SHEET 1 OF 3
10284-5701 REV B
(SH 2)
A9A2 Interconnect PWB
7-21/7-22
RF-5720
(SH 1)
14
48
J4
DGND 1
+5V 2
POR 3
HSSB TX
NOTE: ALL RESISTORS ARE 100 OHM 5% 1/8 WATT.
HSSB RX HOP CLK 4

HSSB TX 5
FFT A0 R1
6
HSSB FFT A2 R2
7
FFT A4 R3
8
FFT A6 R4
9
FFT A8 R5
13
10
FFT A10 R6
11
FFT D1 R7
12
FFT D3 R8
13
FFT D5 R9
14
FFT D7 R10
15
FFT D9 R11
16
FFT D11 R12
17
FFT D13 R13
J6 18
FFT D15 R14
19
50
J7 HNDST TX AUD IN 1
CA0 HNDST RX AUD IN SAMPLE CLK R15
1 2 20
CA1 2 HNDST TX AUD OUT 3
CA2 3 HNDST RX AUD OUT 4 NC 21
CA3 4 ZEROIZE 5 320DPCS R16
CA4 FILL CLK 22
5 6
CA5 6 FILL DATA 7 RD 23
CA6 7 CUINT 8 R17
CDPINT AIC CLK 24
NC 8 9
AGND 9 DGND 10 UCSOUT
+12V +5V 25
10 11
NC 11 NC 12 OELOW 26
–12V 12 LPCRXDATA 13
LPCRXAU 2400B CLK A16OUT 27
13 14
FP PWR ON 14 1.2 MHZ CLK 15 HSSB RX
CA7 HSSB 28
15 16
FRAME CLK 16 HOP CLK 17 –12V 29
9.6 MHZ CLK 17 CDPBUSY 18 R18
POR RMT PWR ON DPINT 30
18 19
LPCTXDATA 19 LPCTXAU 20 +12V
REQ –12V 31
20 21
MUX OVRD 21 NC 22 AGND 32
+5V 22 +12V 23
DGND AGND AGND 33
23 24
NC 24 NC 25 +12V 34
D0 25 CDPCS 26
D1 CRORW FFTREQ R19
26 27 35
D2 27 NC 28
D3 CUES –12V 36
28 29
D4 29 FILL DET 30 RST FFT R20
D5 CA8 37
30 31
D6 31 CA9 32 A16IN 38
D7 32 CA0 33
HNDST TX AUD IN 33 CA1 34 NC 39
HNDST RX AUD IN 34 CA2 35 UCSIN
HNDST TX AUD OUT CA3 40
35 36
HNDST RX AUD OUT 36 CA4 37 OEHIGH 41
ZEROIZE 37 CA5 38
FILL CLK 38 CA6 39 NC 42
FILL DATA 39 NC 40 RORW R21
CUINT AGND 43
40 41 R22
CDPINT 41 +12V 42 320MBINT 44
DGND 42 NC 43 R23
+5V –12V 19.2 MHZ 45
43 44
NC 44 LPCRXAU 45 –BUSY_186
LPCRXDATA FP PWR ON 46
45 46 R24
2400B CLK 46 CA7 47 FFT D14 47
1.2 MHZ CLK 47 FRAME CLK 48 R25
HSSB 9.6 MHZ CLK FFT D12 48
48 49
HOP CLK 49 POR 50 FFT D10 R26
CDPBUSY LPCTXDATA 49
50 51 R27
RMT PWR ON 51 REQ 52 FFT D8 50
LPCTXAU 52 MUX OVRD 53 R28
–12V +5V FFT D6 51
53 54
NC 54 DGND 55 FFT D4 R29
+12V 52
55 NC 56 R30
AGND 56 D0 57 FFT D2 53
NC 57 D1 58 R31
CDPCS D2 FFT D0 54
58 59
CRORW 59 D3 60 FFT A9 R32
Figure 7-4.
D4 55
NC 60 61 R33
CUES 61 D5 62 FFT A7 56
FILL DET 62 D6 63 R34
CA8 D7 FFT A5 57
63 64
CA9 64 FFT A3 R35
58
FFT A1 R36
17
59
FRAME CLK 60
9.6 MHZ CLK 61
(SH 3)
(Sheet 2 of 3)
1.2 MHZ CLK

50
62
+5V 63
DGND 64
Schematic Diagram
(10284-5701 Rev. B)
14

SHEET 2 OF 3
7-23/7-24
RF-5720
10284-5701 REV B
(SH 2)
J5
17
NC 1
NC 2
FP POWER ON 3
NC 4
NC 5
NC 6
NC 7
NC 8
AGND 9
+12V 10
NC 11
–12V 12
NC 13
FP POWER ON 14
NC 15
FRAME CLK 16
9.6 MHZ CLK 17
POR 18
NC 19
NC 20
NC 21
+5V 22
DGND 23
NC 24
NC 25
NC 26
NC 27
NC 28
NC 29
NC 30
+5V 31
DGND 32
DGND 33
+5V 34
NC 35
NC 36
NC 37
NC 38
NC 39
NC 40
NC 41
DGND 42
+5V 43
NC 44
NC 45
POR 46
HOP CLK 47
HSSB 48
HOP CLK 49
HSSB 50
RMT POWER ON 51
NC 52
–12V 53
NC 54
+12V 55
AGND 56
NC 57
NC 58
NC 59
NC 60
NC 61
RMT POWER ON 62
NC 63
NC 64
15
15
J9 J8
1 DGND DGND
+5V 1
2 +5V 2
3 NC 3
LPCRXDATA NC
4 LPCRXDATA 4
5 2400B CLK 2400B CLK 5
6 1.2 MHZ CLK 1.2 MHZ CLK
HSSB 6
7 HSSB 7
8 HOP CLK HOP CLK 8
9 NC NC 9
10 NC NC 10
11 LPCTXAU LPCTXAU 11
12 –12V –12V 12
13 NC NC 13
14 +12V +12V 14
Figure 7-4.
15 AGND AGND 15
16 AGND AGND 16
17 +12V +12V 17
18 NC 18
–12V NC
19 –12V 19
20 LPCRXAU LPCRXAU 20
21 NC NC 21
22 NC 22
FRAME CLK NC
23 FRAME CLK 23
24 9.6 MHZ CLK 9.6 MHZ CLK
POR 24
25 POR
(Sheet 3 of 3)
LPCTXDATA 25
26 LPCTXDATA 26
27 NC NC 27
28 NC NC 28
29 +5V +5V
Schematic Diagram
(10284-5701 Rev. B)
DGND 29
SHEET 3 OF 3
30 DGND 30
10284-5701 REV B
7-25/7-26
RF-5720
RF-5720
NOTE: UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED:

1. PARTIAL REFERENCE DESIGNATIONS ARE SHOWN. 4. VENDOR PART NO. CALLOUTS ARE FOR REFERENCE ONLY.
FOR A COMPLETE DESIGNATION, PREFIX WITH COMPONENTS ARE SUPPLIED PER PART NO. IN PARTS LIST.
UNIT NO. AND/OR ASSEMBLY NO. DESIGNATION.
2. ALL RESISTOR VALUES ARE IN OHMS, 1/8W, +/–5%.
3. ALL CAPACITOR VALUES ARE IN MICROFARADS.
P1 5 19.2 MHZ TCXO

CR1
14 R36 1N4454
U6 1 P1 6 FP_PWR_ON
H10BV–19.2M 3 39
R33 C34 U7 330K CR9
3 CW 2 C33 1N4454
470 47PF R22 P1
R32 2 1 ADJUST OUTPUT 8 7 .047 25 RMT_PWR_ON
74HC00
Ê
10K
1 7 GROUND VCC 14 R35 J1 5
100 DCPL1 NC J1 4
C35 E5 E6 J1 3 POS
.047 C37
+5V_HOT E–1314 F1 E–1314 10V–32V
.047 CR15 BATTERY
1N5401 3.5A J1 2
4 J1 1 NEG
U7B 6 NC
5
74HC00 C1 R2
.22 1K R10 Z3
9 MTD4P06–1 D P1
8 1% 1K Q3 3
10 U7C NC G C31 P1 28 +6.5V
Q5 S
74HC00 +5V_HOT 2.2
CW 3 TIP122 R21 POWER 25V
12 2 R1 330K T1
11 NC 2K CR10
13 U7D 1 4 MBR1545CT JMP3
VR1
1N5242B
74HC00 R3 12V L2 LT1085CT–5 P1
3.01K R25 100 14
1% C9 PART OF T2 Z4
6 5 2.7 3 U3 2 P1
1.5 PRI.–A 17 +5V
U5B 7 NC C17 C18
R23 25V R11 C19 C28 C20
5 JMP2 1 .01 390
LM2903 6.04K 22 Q1 390 1 2.2
C11 E3 E4 16V 16V 15
1% MTP25N10 CR2 25V
6 25V
R12 D 470PF
C4 17 27 G
.01 S CR3 P1
1 +ERR VCC VC 14 R14 15
C8 1/4W MUR120 GND
R27 R26 2 –ERR 470 P1 16
1:200 20K 4.99K 1.5 R13 R15
CURRENT SENSE CR11 R9 18 VREF 1K 1/4W
25V 10
T2 1 MBR160 100 1% 1% 7 +CS U4 1/4W 2 +12V_HOT
PRI–A
E4 R6 6 –CS SG2526N 7
C6 2.2K AOUT 13
E3 R4 C3 5 RE Z2
2 .01 47K .047 CR5 L4
PRI–B 8 SHUTD 16 MUR120 LT1086CT–12
BOUT 500 P1
E1 2.2K 11 DEADT C13 C14 Z5 2
CR12 C12
E2 R39 3 U2 2 P1 29
3 MBR160 3 COMP SYNC 12 NC
10
100 10 +12V
9 RT 40V 50V CR6 C23
(PRI–A AND PRI–B SHOWN ) 50V 8 C22 C24
10 CT MUR120 100 1
(FOR REFERENCE ONLY) 4 SOFTS E2 E1 3 15 2.2
R8 Q2 50V 25V 25V
2.2 C5 C7 GND MTP25N10 C15
C2 R5 R7
.001 .001 .68 15 R16 D 470PF PART OF T2 CR7 L5
20K 6.49K 500 MC79M12CT P1
50V 35V 27 MUR120 4
1% 1% G PRI.–B U1 Z6
S 9 2 I –12V
+5V_HOT 1/4W O3 P1 27
R18 CR4
R17 CR8 C25 COM
MUR120 C26
Ê
470 MUR120 C27
1K 100 1
1/4W R19 50V 15 2.2
C30 DCPL2 +12V_HOT 25V 25V
R24 10
.01 R30 R37 1/4W
100K 23.2K R29 100
1% 1K R38
C38 R20 C16 P1
2 8 .33 100 1
.047 GND
2 1 50V .01 P1 30
1W
3 U5A C32
U8 VIN 1
MC33064P–5 RESET C29 4 LM2903 .1
R31
GND 1.0UF R28 P1
3 1M 10V 130K 18 P.O.R.
1%
10284-2201 REV B
HIGHEST REFERENCE
DESIGNATION
C38 L5 T2 Z6
CR15 Q5 U8
E6 R39 VR1
REF. DESIGNATIONS
NOT USED Figure 7-7. A1 Black Power Supply PWB
C10
C21
CR2 CR14 L3
CR13 L1 Q4
Z1 Assembly Schematic Diagram
(10284-2201 Rev. B)
7-33/7-34
RF-5720

1. PARTIAL REFERENCE DESIGNATIONS ARE SHOWN. +5V
FOR A COMPLETE DESIGNATION, PREFIX WITH FD[0:15]
UNIT NO. AND/OR ASSEMBLY NO. DESIGNATION. +5V
C10 C11 C12 C7
2. ALL RESISTOR VALUES ARE IN OHMS, 1/8W, +/–5%. 47 0.047 0.047 0.047 C3 9 8 11 10
3. ALL CAPACITOR VALUES ARE IN MICROFARADS. 0.047 U1
D DGND D DGND D DGND D DGND U1 74AC04
4. VENDOR PART NO. CALLOUTS ARE FOR REFERENCE ONLY. 74AC04
COMPONENTS ARE SUPPLIED PER PART NO. IN PARTS LIST. D DGND 13 12
C55 14 U1
5. MINUS [–] DENOTES ACTIVE LOW. 0.047 FA15 1 2 –FA15 D DGND 74AC04
R17 7 U1
10K 74AC04
D DGND D DGND
103
23
33
36
50
59
76
92
96
15
4
D DGND 4
VCC –FREADY
66 H0_PB0 D0 111 FD0 3
Outputs TP1 FREADY U1
FTST1 65 H1_PB1 D1 112 FD1 74AC04
TP2 FTST2 60 2 FD2 C2 +5V +5V C1
H2_PB2 D2 0.047 0.047
TP3 FTST3 61 3 FD3
H3_PB3 D3
TP4 FTST4 62 5 FD4
H4_PB4 D4
58 6 FD5 DGND D 17 68 D DGND ID[0:15]
–FTIDPINT H5_PB5 D5 VCC
57 8 FD6 FD0 1 D0L D0R 19 ID0
H6_PB6 D6
56 9 FD7 FD1 2 D1L D1R 20 ID1
H7_PB7 D7
74 10 FD8 FD2 3 D2L D2R 21 ID2
HA0_PB8 D8
72 11 FD9 FD3 4 D3L D3R 22 ID3
HA1_PB9 D9
71 13 FD10 FD4 5 D4L D4R 23 ID4
HA2_PB10 D10
14 FD11 FD5 6 D5L D5R 24 ID5
D11
16 FD12 FD6 7 D6L D6R 25 ID6
D12 U2
70 HR/W_PB11 17 FD13 FD7 8 D7L IDT7133 D7R 26 ID7
D13
69 HEN_PB12 19 FD14 FD8 9 D8L D8R 27 ID8
D14
67 HREQ_PB13 20 FD15 FD9 10 D9L D9R 28 ID9
D15
68 HACK_PB14 FD10 11 D10L D10R 29 ID10
FD11 12 D11L D11R 30 ID11
R5 BS 41 –FBS FD12 13 31 ID12
D12L D12R
10K 84
85
MODA COP/FAP R/W
PS/DS
42
40
FR/W
FPS/DS
+5V FD13 14
FD14 15
D13L D13R 32
33
ID13
ID14
–ITFDPINT MODB D14L D14R
86 TA 21 –FREADY –FBR +5V +5V R13 FD15 16 34 ID15 R1 +5V
FMODC MODC 10K D15L D15R
BR 34 R4 C9 C8 22K
+5V C6 R6 D DGND 32 1K 0.047 0.047
0.047 10K BG 53 BUSYL BUSYR 50
–FRS 35 FREADY IREADY
BB –FBB R53 67 R/WLUB R/WRUB 36
–FRSP 83 RESET U4 –FBG –IWER
D DGND
RD 39 –FRD DGNDD 11 33 D DGND
–FWR
1% 33.2 66 R/WLLB R/WRLB 37
8 FBCLK DSP56156 37 VCC
WR –FWR FA0 5 A0 I/O0 7 FD0 R54 65 OEL OER 38
VCC –ITFDPCS
5 6 51 FA1 4 8 FD1 1% 33.2 52
Y1 O 5 EXTAL A1 I/O1 –FRD CEL CER 51
U1 87 FA0 FA2 3 9 FD2 R55
GND 40.000 MHZ 74ACTO4 +5V A0 A2 I/O2
88 FA1 FA3 2 10 FD3 1% 33.2 FA0 54 49 IA0
4 A1 A3 I/O3 –FA15 A0L A0R
FCLKO 46 CLKO 90 FA2 FA4 1 13 FD4 FA1 55 48 IA1
A2 A4 I/O4 A1L A1R
D R7 R8 R9 R52 91 FA3 FA5 44 14 FD5 FA2 56 47 IA2
DGND 10K 10K 10K 10K A3 A5 I/O5 A2L A2R
45 A4 93 FA4 FA6 43 A6 I/O6 15 FD6 FA3 57 A3L A3R 46 IA3
FDSI DSI_OS0
FDSCK DSCK_OS1
FDSO DSO
FDR DR
A8 99 FA8 FA10 25 A10 I/O10 31 FD10 FA7 61 A7L A7R 42 IA7
A9 100 FA9 FA11 24 A11 I/O11 32 FD11 FA8 62 A8L A8R 41 IA8
NOTE: 82 102 FA10 FA12 21 35 FD12 FA9 63 40 IA9
FSTD0 STD0_PC0 A10 A12 I/O12 A9L A9R
R8,R9, AND R52 FSRD0 81 SRD0_PC1 A11 105 FA11 FA13 20 A13 I/O13 36 FD13 FA10 64 A10L A10R 39 IA10
INSTALLED FOR FSCK0 80 SCK0_PC2 A12 106 FA12 FA14 19 A14 I/O14 37 FD14 GND
EMULATION ONLY. 79 107 FA13 18 38 FD15 IA[0:15]
FSC10 SC10_PC3 A13 FPS/DS A15 I/O15 18 35
FSC00 78 SC00_PC4 A14 109 FA14 22 N/C
110 FA15 23 D DGND D DGND
A15 N/C U3
R2
64 TC551664J–15 10
FSTD1 STD1_PC5 40
UB FBCLK ICLK
63 TIN_PC10 77 FTIN_PC10 R10
FSRD1 SRD1_PC6 1% 33.2 39
LB R3
55 TOUT_PC11 75 FTOUT_PC11 –FRD 10
FSCK1 SCK1_PC7 41
OE FTOUT_PC11
54 XFC 49 R11
FSC11 SC11_PC8 1% 33.2 6
CE
52 BIAS 31 FA15 NOTES:
FSC01 SC01_PC9 17
WE
SPKP 24 R12 1. ONLY R2 INSTALLED WHEN Y1 CLKS U4
25 1% 33.2 GND AND U5.
SPKM –FWR
30 AUX VREF 28 D 12 34 2. ONLY R3 INSTALLED WHEN U4 PLL CLKS U5.
29 27 DGND
MIC VDIV D DGND D DGND
HIGHEST REFERENCE FA[0:15]
DESIGNATION GND
1
12
18
26
38
47
48
53
73
89
95
101
104
108
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM,
RF–5466 SERIAL TONE PWB Figure 7-10. A3A1 FFT-DSP PWB Assembly
REF. DESIGNATIONS D DGND
––––––––––––––––– Schematic Diagram
NOT USED 10284–2551 REVB
SHEET 1 OF 6
(10284-2551 Rev. B)
(Sheet 1 of 6)
7-41/7-42
RF-5720
J2
TEST 1 FA9
2 FA8
3 FA7
4 FA6
5 FA5
6 FA4
7 FA3
8 FA2
9 FA1
10 FA0
11 –ITFDPINT
12 FMODC
+5V 13 –FRSP
R14 14 FSTD0
22K 15 FTIN_PC10
1 2 FMODC
R14 JTAG / OnCE CONN. 16 FTOUT_PC11
22K 17 FSRD0
3 –FBS
R14 18 FSCK0
22K J1
4 19 FSC10
–FBR 1 ITMS 20 FSC00
R14 2
22K 21 FSTD1
5 –FBG 3 ITDI
R14 22 FSRD1
22K 4 +5V 23 DGND
6 –FBB 5
R14 24 DGND
22K 6 25 –FTIDPINT
7 FSTD0 7
R14 26 FPS/DS
22K 8 27 FBCLK
8 FTIN_PC10 9 ITCK
R14 28 FSCK1
22K 10 ITCK 29 FSC11
9 FSRD0 11
R14 30 FSC01
22K 12 31 FDSO
10 FSCK0 13 IEMU0 32 FCLKO
14 IEMU1 33 FDSI
R15 15
22K ITDO 34 FDSCK
1 2 FSC10 16
R15 35 FR/W
22K 17 36 –FBS
3 FSC00 18
R15 37 FPS/DS
22K 19 ITRST 38 –FRD
4 FSTD1 20
R15 R16 39 –FBB
22K 21 FDSI 10K 40 –FBR
5 FSRD1 22
R15 41 –FBG
22K 23 FDSCK D DGND 42 –FWR
6 FSCK1 24
R15 43 +5V
22K 25 –FRSP 44 FDR
7 FSC11 26
R15 45 –FREADY
22K 27 FDSO 46 FD15
8 FSC01 28 VPPIN 47 FD14
R15 29 FDR 48
22K FD13
9 –FWR 30 VPPOUT 49 FD12
R15 50
22K FD11
10 N.C. D DGND 51 FD10
52 FD9
53 FD8
54 FD7
55 FD6
56 FD5
57 FD4
58 FD3
59 FD2
60 N.C.
61 FD1
62 FD0 +5V
63 FA15 C13
64 FA14 0.047
65 FA13 D DGND
66 FA12
67 FA11
68 FA10
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM,
RF–5466 SERIAL TONE PWB
–––––––––––––––––
10284–2551 B
SHEET 2 OF 6
Figure 7-10. A3A1 FFT-DSP PWB Assembly

Schematic Diagram
(10284-2551 Rev. B)
(Sheet 2 of 6)
7-43/7-44
RF-5720
C17
0.047 ID[0:15]
+5V R20 +5V R21
22K 22K
D 2 8
C16 DGND
0.047 R21 R20
22K 22K
2 8 +5V C20
C15 D DGND R21 R20 0.047
22K 22K RESISTORS
47 3 7 REQUIRED
+5V R21 R20 D DGND
D DGND 22K 22K FOR BICEMOS 32
4 6 PAL VCC
R21 R20 ID0 13 D0 A0 12 IA0
131
132
22K 22K
113
114
–IRSP ID1 14 A1 11 IA1
47
48
80
81
98
99
32
33
65
66
14
15
5 5 +5V C14 D1
R18 R21 R20 0.047 ID2 15 D2 A2 10 IA2
1K VCC
–IRS 127 30 ID0 22K 22K ID3 17
RS D0 6 4 D3 A3 9 IA3
–INMI 42 NMI D1 29 ID1 R21 R20 ID4 18 D4 A4 8 IA4
–IMP 5 28 ID2 22K 22K 28 DGND D 33.2 1% ID5 19
MP/MC D2 7 3 VCC D5 A5 7 IA5
–IFSX 38 INT1 D3 27 ID3 ID6 20 D6 A6 6 IA6
–MTIDPINT 39 26 ID4 –IDS 2 IN0 I/O1 19 R23 –IROE ID7 21
INT2 D4 3 20 R24 D7 A7 5 IA7
–FTIDPINT 40 INT3 D5 25 ID5 –IPS IN1 I/O2 –IRCE U9 A8 27 IA8
4 IN2 I/O3 21 R25
–IFSR 41 INT4 D6 24 ID6 –IIS
5 23 R26
–IPCE 28F001 A9 26 IA9
–IIACK 112 IACK D7 23 ID7 IXF IN3 I/O4 –IPOE A10 23 IA10
IREADY 128 13 ID8 –IR/W 6 IN4 I/O5 24 R27 –ITMDPCS
READY D8 7 25 R28 A11 25 IA11
–IR/W 92 R/W D9 12 ID9 –IWE IN5 I/O6 –ITFDPCS A12 4 IA12
–ISTRB 93 11 ID10 –ISTRB 9 IN6 O1 18 R29 –IPCLK
STRB D10 10 26 R30 A13 28 IA13
–IRD 82 RD D11 10 ID11 –IRD IN7 O2 –DAC IFPRG 1 VPP A14 29 IA14
–IWE 83 9 ID12 –IMSC 11 IN8
WE D12 12
U6 A15 3 IA15
–IHOLD 129 HOLD D13 8 ID13 IA11 IN9 TI20L8–5 –IWER 31 WE A16 2 IA16
–IHOLDA
–IBR
108
94
HOLDA
BR
IOP D14
D15
7
6
ID14
ID15
IA12
IA13
13
16
IN10
IN11
–IPOE
–IPCE
24
22
OE
CE
A17 30 IA17
–IIAQ 1 IA14 17 IN12

IAQ 27 GND
–IBIO 130 BIO DS 89 –IDS IA15 IN13 16
IXF 109 XF PS 91 –IPS GND
SHIFTCLK 46 CLKR IS 90 –IIS 14 D DGND
ITCLKR 126 TCLKR +5V;14 +5V +5V
SHIFTCLK 124 55 IA0 IA0 1 D DGND
CLKX A0 U10 3 –ITMDPINT C18 C19
ITCLKX 123 TCLKX A1 56 IA1 –IIS 2 0.047 0.047
U5
IDR 43 DR A2 57 IA2 74AC32
TMS320C51 +5V DGND;7
ITDR 44 TDR A3 58 IA3
IDX 106 59 IA4 DGNDD 11 33 D DGND
DX A4 C27 VCC
ITDX 107 60 IA5 0.047 IA0 5 A0 I/O0 7 ID0 +5V C21
TDX A5 IA1 4 8 ID1 0.047
–IFSR 45 FSR A6 61 IA6 A1 I/O1
ITFSR 125 62 IA7 D IA2 3 A2 I/O2 9 ID2
TFSR/TADD A7 DGND IA3 2 10 ID3 D DGND
–IFSX 104 FSX A8 63 IA8 A3 I/O3 32
ITFSX 105 64 IA9 IA4 1 A4 I/O4 13 ID4 VCC
TFSX/TFRM A9 IA5 44 14 ID5 ID8 13 D0 A0 12 IA0
A10 72 IA10 IA1 4 A5 I/O5 ID9 14 11 IA1
97 73 IA11 U10 6 –ITMDMA IA6 43 A6 I/O6 15 ID6 D1 A1
X1 A11 –IIS 5 IA7 42 16 ID7 ID10 15 D2 A2 10 IA2
A12 74 IA12 A7 I/O7 ID11 17 9 IA3
74AC32 IA8 27 29 ID8 D3 A3
A13 75 IA13 A8 I/O8 ID12 18 8 IA4
76 IA14 IA9 26 A9 I/O9 30 ID9 D4 A4
A14 IA2 9 IA10 25 31 ID10 ID13 19 D5 A5 7 IA5
ICLK 96 X2/CLKIN A15 77 IA15 U10 8 –ITFDPINT A10 I/O10 ID14 20 6 IA6
–IIS 10 IA11 24 A11 I/O11 32 ID11 D6 A6
IA12 21 35 ID12 ID15 21 D7 A7 5 IA7
ICLKIN2 95 74AC32 A12 I/O12
CLKIN2 IA13 20 36 ID13 U8 A8 27 IA8
ICLKIN2EN 71 CLKMD1 A13 I/O13 26 IA9
–ITMDPCS 12 IA14 19 A14 I/O14 37 ID14 28F001 A9
ICLKOUT1 110 CLKOUT1 11 –MTIDIR 23 IA10
122 –IRD 13 U10 IA15 18 A15 I/O15 38 ID15 A10
TOUT 22 A11 25 IA11
ITRST 2 TRST +5V 74AC32 N/C 4 IA12
ITMS 31 23 N/C A12
TMS U7 28 IA13
ITDI 67 A13
TDI TC551664J–15 1 VPP A14 29 IA14
ITCK 34 R19 40UB IFPRG
TCK 22K 39 A15 3 IA15
ITDO 100 TDO LB 31 2 IA16
IEMU0 118 –IROE 41OE –IWER WE A16
EMU0 R22 –IRCE 6 –IPOE 24 OE A17 30 IA17
IEMU1 119 EMU1/OFF 33.2 CE 22
–IMSC 111 17WE –IPCE CE
MSC CLKMD2 103 –IWE
GND
GND GND
1% 16
12 34
3
20
21
35
36
53
54
68
69
86
87
101
102
120
121
D DGND
D DGND D DGND D DGND
–IWER IA[0:17]
D DGND
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM,
–––––––––––––––––
10284–2551 B
SHEET 3 OF 6

Schematic Diagram
(10284-2551 Rev. B)
(Sheet 3 of 6)
7-45/7-46
RF-5720
J4
ID[0:15]
1 ID3
2 ID4
3 ID5
+5V C28 +5V C26 4 ID6
0.047 0.047
5 ID7
6 ID8
18
31
42
D DGND IBD[0:15] 20 D DGND 7 ID9
7
VCC VCC 8 ID10
ID0 47 1A1 1B1 2 IBD0 ID0 3 D0 Q0 2 IA16
ID1 46 3 IBD1 ID1 4 5 IA17 9 ID11
1A2 1B2 D1 Q1 10 ID12
ID2 44 1A3 1B3 5 IBD2 ID2 7 D2 Q2 6 IFLASH
ID3 43 6 IBD3 ID3 8 9 –IAICRS 11 ID13
1A4 1B4 D3 Q3 12 ID14
ID4 41 1A5 1B5 8 IBD4 ID4 13 D4 Q4 12 –FRS
ID5 40 9 IBD5 ID5 14 U21 15 13 ID15
1A6 1B6 D5 Q5 14 –IIAQ
ID6 38 11 IBD6 ID6 17 74AC273 16
1A7 1B7 D6 Q6 15 –IHOLD
ID7 37 1A8 1B8 12 IBD7 ID7 18 D7 Q7 19 ALBSEL
ID8 36 13 IBD8 16 IREADY
2A1 2B1 17 –IRSP
ID9 35 U11 14 IBD9 1
2A2 2B2 –IRS CLR 18 ITCLKR
ID10 33 74ACT16245 16 IBD10 11
2A3 2B3 –IPCLK CLK 19 ITFSR
ID11 32 2A4 2B4 17 IBD11 GND
ID12 30 19 IBD12 20 SHIFTCLK
2A5 2B5 10 21 ITCLKX
ID13 29 2A6 2B6 20 IBD13
ID14 27 22 IBD14 D 22 –IIACK
2A7 2B7 DGND 23 –IMSC
ID15 26 2A8 2B8 23 IBD15
24 ICLKOUT1
48 25 –IHOLDA
–ITMDPCS 1G +5V 26 ITDX
–MTIDIR 1 1DIR R31
22K 27 IDX
1 2 –MTIDPINT 28 ITFSX
25 2G R31
24 22K 29 –IFSX
2DIR 3 –IEODX 30 N.C.
GND R31
22K 31 ICLK
4
4
10
15
21
28
34
39
45
–IMP 32 –IBR
R31 33
22K jumper –ISTRB
D DGND D DGND 5 N.C. JMP10 34 –IR/W
R31 in for
22K masked 35 –IPS
6 –IBIO D 36 –IIS
R31 DGND 320
C29 22K 37 –IDS
+5V 0.047 7 –IHOLD 38 –IWE
R31 39
IA[0:15] IBA[0:15] 22K jumper –IRD
18
31
42
D 8 ITCLKR JMP9 in for 40 IA15
7
VCC R31 41
IA0 47 2 IBA0 22K test IA14
1A1 1B1 9 IEMU1 D 42 IA13
IA1 46 1A2 1B2 3 IBA1 R31 DGND
IA2 44 5 IBA2 22K 43 IA12
1A3 1B3 10 IEMU0 44 IA11
IA3 43 1A4 1B4 6 IBA3
IA4 41 8 IBA4 45 IA10
1A5 1B5 46 IA9
IA5 40 1A6 1B6 9 IBA5
R32 47 IA8
IA6 38 1A7 1B7 11 IBA6 22K
IA7 37 12 IBA7 1 2 –IFSR 48 IA7
1A8 1B8 R32 49 IA6
IA8 36 2A1 2B1 13 IBA8 22K
IA9 35 U12 14 IBA9 3 ITDR 50 IA5
2A2 2B2 R32 51 IA4
IA10 33 74ACT16245 16 IBA10 22K
2A3 2B3 4 52 IA3
–ITMDPCS 32 2A4 2B4 17 –IBTMDPCS IDR
R32 53 IA2
–IWER 30 2A5 2B5 19 –IBWER 22K
29 20 5 –INMI 54 IA1
–IFSX 2A6 2B6 SAMPLECLK R32 55 IA0
–IFSR 27 2A7 2B7 22 IBFSR 22K jumper
26 23 6 –IEODR JMP11 in for 56 –IEODX
2A8 2B8 R32 57 DGND
22K extended
+5V 48 7 –FTIDPINT D test 58 DGND
1G R32 DGND 59 DGND
1 1DIR 22K +5V
8 ICLKIN2EN 60 +5V
R32 61 SHIFTCLK C30
25 2G 22K 0.047
24 9 ICLKIN2 62 –IFSR
2DIR R32 63 ITDR
GND 22K D DGND
10 –IBR 64 IDR
4
10
15
21
28
34
39
45
65 –FTIDPINT
66 ID0
DGNDD DGNDD R33 67 ID1
22K 68 ID2 SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM,
–IRS RF–5466 SERIAL TONE PWB
R34 –––––––––––––––––
22K
SHIFTCLK 10284–2551 B
SHEET 4 OF 6

Schematic Diagram
(10284-2551 Rev. B)
(Sheet 4 of 6)
7-47/7-48
RF-5720
+5VREF
+5VREF C51
0.047
R39 6 A R41
3.32K 8 100 3.03 V REF
U16 7
C41
47PF 1% 5 4 –5VREF C31 C32
0.047 0.047
R40
R36 +5VREF R37 C42 5.11K C52
100K 100 0.047 0.047 AGND A AGND A
1%
C40 R35
.047 100K 14 A A AGND A AGND
AIN 2 AGND
VCC
U15 1 15 VREF
1% 3 R38
TL072 11 470K
A AGND ID0 D0 RFB 16 +5V C44
10 0.047 C33
ID1 D1 +5VREF 47PF
ID2 9 D2 C43
8 U17 10PF D DGND +5VREF
ID3 D3 7 R50
7 TLC7524 VDD 100K
ID4 D4 8 20 R49
ID5 6 D5 6 8 REF V+ 61.9K 1%
5 OUT+ 22 2
ID6 D6 OUT1 1 U15 7 26 IN+ 21 1
ID7 4 D7 OUT2 2 5 25 IN– OUT– U16 AOUT
4 –5VREF 1 1% 3
24 NC TL072
13 A AGND AUXIN+ NC 15
–DAC WR 23 AUXIN– 6 AICCLK
12 CS 27 MCLK AGNDA
NC DR 5 IDR
GND 28 U20
NC FSR 4 –IFSR
3 TLC32044 14 –IFSX
FSX
A AGND DX 12 IDX
U13 SHFTCLK 10 SHIFTCLK
MC78L05AC
R42 EODR 3 –IEODR
100 3 I 1 EODX 11 –IEODX
+12V O +5VREF
1/2W 16 NC RSET 2 –IAICRS
C34 COM C36 17
1.0UF 2 6.8UF
CR2 AGND W/B 13 +5V
25V 10V 18 AGND V– 19
A AGND A AGND A AGND A AGND DGND
AGND A 9 –5VREF
D
U14 DGND
MC79L05AC
R43
100 2 3
–12V I O –5VREF +5VREF
1/2W C49
COM CR1 0.047
C35 C37
1.0UF 1 6.8UF
25V 10V A AGND
16
A AGND A AGND A AGND A AGND VDD
AX 12 RADIOTXAU
VPPIN AOUT 14 AX/AY AY 13
VPPOUT BX 2 RADIORXAU
AIN 15 BX/BY BY 1
CX 5
FLASH PROGRAMMING R46 R47 4 CX/CY CY 3
HARDWARE 2.2K 10 3 2 5 4 6
DGND IFPRG
6 INH R51 R51 R51 R51 R51
U23 470K 470K 470K 470K 470K
D ALBSEL 11 A 74HC4053
2 10 1
D C48 B A AGND
U18 0.047 9 C
TCS4426 R44 1
UNUSED GATE 2 7 100 G Q1 GND V–
IFLASH D 8 7
+12V S –5VREF
R45 3 DGND
100K +12V A AGND C50
C38 C39 1% 0.047
.047 1.0UF D
DGND
U18 6 DGND D A
4 5 AGND RF–5466 SERIAL TONE PWB
3 –––––––––––––––––
10284–2551 B
D SHEET 5 OF 6
DGND

Schematic Diagram
(10284-2551 Rev. B)
(Sheet 5 of 6)
7-49/7-50
RF-5720
P1 1 P1 64 J5
RADIOTXAU 1
AGND A AGND A P1 J5 2
P1 2 63
+12V +12V AGND A
–ITMDMA P1 3 –ITMDPINT P1 62
RADIORXAU J5 3
P1 P1 J5 4
–12V 4 –12V 61
AGNDA
–IRS P1 5 P1 60
+5V J5 5 J5
P1 6 P1 59 6
DGNDD
P1 7 P1 58
P1 P1 +12V J5 7
8 57 J5 8
+12V
P1 9 AICCLK P1 56
P1 10 IBFSR P1 55
–12V J5 9 J5
–12V 10
–IBWER P1 11 –IBTMDPCS P1 54
–MTIDPINT P1 12 P1 53
P1 P1 J5 11 J5 12
13 SAMPLECLK 52 +5V
DGND D
IREADY P1 14 IBD15 P1 51
IBD14 P1 15 IBD13 P1 50 J5 J5
13 14
IBD12 P1 16 IBD11 P1 49
IBD10 P1 17 IBD9 P1 48
IBD8 P1 18 IBD7 P1 47
IBD6 P1 19 IBD5 P1 46
IBD4 P1 20 IBD3 P1 45
IBD2 P1 21 IBD1 P1 44
IBD0 P1 22 IBA10 P1 43
IBA9 P1 23 IBA8 P1 42
IBA7 P1 24 IBA6 P1 41
IBA5 P1 25 IBA4 P1 40
IBA3 P1 26 IBA2 P1 39
IBA1 P1 27 IBA0 P1 38
P1 28 P1 37
P1 29 P1 36
+5V P1 30 P1 35
L3
100UH P1 P1
31 34
C46 C45 P1 32 P1 33
47UF 0.047
10V DGND D DGNDD
D D
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM,
–––––––––––––––––
10284–2551 B
SHEET 6 OF 6

Schematic Diagram
(10284-2551 Rev. B)
(Sheet 6 of 6)
7-51/7-52
RF-5720

1. PARTIAL REFERENCE DESIGNATIONS ARE SHOWN.
FOR A COMPLETE DESIGNATION, PREFIX WITH
4. VENDOR PART NO. CALLOUTS ARE FOR REFERENCE ONLY.
COMPONENTS ARE SUPPLIED PER PART NO. IN PARTS LIST.
+5V +5V
Ê Ê
C10 C14 C13 C20
.047 .047
U13 10UF .047
74HC04 DGND D +5V C7
–RST186 1 2 RST186 D DGND D D
.047
9 43 DGND DGND +5V
C15
Ê
VCC VCC .047 +5V
19PT2MHZ 59 XIN AD0 17 D0 +5V C5
C2 .047 8 59 D DGND
58 XOUT AD1 15 D1 DGND .047 320D[0:15]
20 VCC D0R 10 320D0
AD2 13 D2 D D0 60 D0L
56 11 D3 D0 2 VCC 19 A0 DGND D1 61
CLKOUT AD3 D1 Q1 28 D DGND 28 D D1L D1R 11 320D1
U13 8 D4 D1 3 18 A1 D2 62
74HC04 AD4 D2 Q2 D0 11 VCC 10 A1 D0 11 10 A1 D2L D2R 12 320D2
52 S0 AD5 6 D5 D2 4 D3 Q3 17 A2 D0 A0 D0 VCC A0 D3 63 D3L D3R 13 320D3
13 12 R19 D1 12 9 A2 D1 12 9 A2
10K 53 S1 AD6 4 D6 D3 5 D4 Q4 16 A3 D1 A1 D1 A1 D4 64 D4L D4R 14 320D4
DGND D 54 2 D7 D4 6 15 A4 D2 13 D2 A2 8 A3 D2 13 D2 A2 8 A3 D5 65
S2 AD7 D5 Q5 D5L D5R 15 320D5
Ê
U4 16 D8 D5 7 U5 14 A5 D3 15 D3 A3 7 A4 D3 15 D3 A3 7 A4 D6 66
R10 AD8 D6 Q6 D4 16 6 A5 D4 16 6 A5 D6L U10 D6R 16 320D6
+5V U13 80C186 AD9 14 D9 D6 8 D7 74HC573 Q7 13 A6 D4 A4 D4 A4 D7 67 D7L 7133 D7R 17 320D7
10K D5 17 5 A6 D5 17 5 A6
Ê Ê
74HC04 24 D5 A5 D5 A5
186T0 3 4 RE AD10 12 D10 D7 9 D8 Q8 12 A7
D6 18 4 A7 D6 18 4 A7
D8 68 D8L D8R 18 320D8
57 REOUT AD11 10 D11 D6 A6 D6 A6 D9 1 D9L D9R 19 320D9
D7 19 3 A8 D7 19 3 A8
Ê Ê
+5V R9 –186T0 AD12 7 D12 RST186 1 EN D7 A7 D7 A7 D10 2 D10L D10R 20 320D10
10K U13 +5V CR1 U8 25 A9 U2 25 A9
74HC04 46 NMI AD13 5 D13 ALE 11 LE R1 A8 A8 D11 3 D11L D11R 21 320D11 +5V
10 27C256 A9 24 A10 65256 A9 24 A10
–DPREQ 5 6 45 AD14 3 D14 D12 4 D12R 22 320D12
Ê
INT0 GND 21 A11 21 A11 D12L
R8 44 INT1 AD15 1 D15 10 A10 A10 D13 5 D13L D13R 23 320D13
+5V U13 C8 23 A12 23 A12 R23
10K 42 INT2 .047 A11 A11 D14 6 D14R 24 320D14
Ê Ê Ê Ê Ê
74HC04 1 VPP 2 A13 2 A13 D14L 10K
–FECREQ 9 8 41 INT3 ALE 61 ALE DDGND A12 A12 D15 7 D15L D15R 25 320D15 1/8W
A13 26 A14 –WR 27 WR A13 26 A14 TO
DT/R 40 J2–46
Ê Ê Ê Ê
U13 50 HOLD +5V C16 D –OELOW 22 OE A14 27 A15 –RD 22 OE A14 1 A15 SHT
R7 74HC04 BHE 64 –BHE
.047 DGND
–UCSIN 20 CE –LBYTE 20 CE
–BUSYL 44 BUSYL BUSYR 41 –BUSY186
2
+5V 10K 11 10 51 HLDA –WR 58 R/WLUB R/WRUB 27 RORW
Ê Ê Ê
A16 68 A16 DGND R2 GND GND 57 R/WLLB R/WRLB 28
47 TEST 67 20 D 10 14 14 –RD 56 29
R6 A17 VCC A16IN +5V OEL OER –320DPCS
Ê
+5V 2.2K 48 LOCK A18 66 D8 2 D1 Q1 19 A8 –186DPCS 43 CEL CER 42
JMP1 A19 65 D9 3 D2 Q2 18 A9 DGND D D
DGND
Ê
–BUSYL 55 ARDY D10 4 D3 Q3 17 A10 R18 A1 45 A0L A0R 40 320A0
49 SRDY 33 –LCS D11 5 16 A11 4.7K A2 46 39 320A1
LCS D4 Q4 C3 +5V A1L A1R
38 –MCS0 D12 6 15 A12 +5V A3 47 38 320A2
Ê Ê
DGND D MCS0 D5 Q5 .047 C6 A2L A2R
20 37 D13 7 U6 14 A13 .047 A4 48 37 320A3
TMRIN0 MCS1 D6 Q6 A3L A3R
R20 SAMPLECLK 21 TMRIN1 MCS2 36 D14 8 D7 74HC573 Q7 13 A14 A5 49 A4L A4R 36 320A4
Ê
10K 186T0 22 35 –FECCS D15 9 12 A15 28 D DGND 28 A6 50 35 320A5
TMROUT0 MCS3 D8 Q8 D DGND A5L A5R
23 TMROUT1 UCS 34 –UCSOUT D8 11 VCC 10 A1 D8 11 VCC 10 A1 A7 51 A6L A6R 34 320A6
Ê Ê
D +5V RST186 1 EN D0 A0 D0 A0 A8 52 33 320A7
D9 12 D1 A1 9 A2 D9 12 D1 A1 9 A2 A7L A7R
DGND 18 DRQ0 PCS0 25 –PCS0 ALE 11 LE D10 13 8 A3 D10 13 8 A3 A6 53 A8L A8R 32 320A8
D2 A2 D2 A2
Ê
DMAREQ1 19 DRQ1 PCS1 27 –PCS1 +5V GND D11 15 7 A4 D11 15 7 A4 A10 54 A9L A9R 31 320A9
28 –PCS2 D3 A3 D3 A3 A11 55 30 320A10
PCS2 10 D12 16 D4 A4 6 A5 D12 16 D4 A4 6 A5 A10L A10R
Ê Ê Ê
39 DEN PCS3 29 D13 17 5 A6 D13 17 5 A6 GND 320A[0:15]
30 C12 D5 A5 D5 A5
PCS4 .047 D D14 18 D6 A6 4 A7 D14 18 D6 A6 4 A7 9 26
–RST186 –WR 63 WR PCS5 31 DGND D15 19 3 A8 D15 19 3 A8
–RD 62 RD 32 –PCS6 D7 A7 D7 A7
PCS6 D CR2 R3 U9 25 A9 U3 25 A9 +5V
DGND +5V 10 A8 A8 DDGND
Ê Ê Ê
GND GND 27C256 A9 24 A10 65256 A9 24 A10
+5V 10 C11
26 60 –BHE 2 D1 Q1 16 –LBHE A10 21 A11 A10 21 A11 –RST186
PRE C9
12 D Q9 Q1 1 23 A12 23 A12
Ê Ê Ê Ê Ê
.047 A11 A11
ALE 13 CLK U7 1 VPP 2 A13 2 A13
–DPINT 11 CLK DGND D DGND A12 A12 +5V 4 D DGND
74HC75 26 A14 –WR 27 WR 26 A14
Ê
A13 A13 PRE
U12 Q 8 –DPREQ C1 A16 3 D2 Q2 15 A16OUT D –OEHIGH 22 OE A14 27 A15 –RD 22 OE A14 1 A15 2D Q5 DMAREQ1
74HC74 CLR +5V .047
Q2 14 –UCSIN 20 CE –HBYTE 20 CE –FFTREQ 3 CLK
Ê Ê Ê
R4
13 10 GND GND
16 A16IN U12 Q 6
D DGND 14 14
Ê Ê
–PCS2 R5 74HC74 CLR
D15 3 VCC 2
D1 Q1 –RSTFFT 10K
D14 4 5 D DGND –PCS6 1
D2 Q2 6 D1 Q1 10 D DGND A[0:15]
Ê Ê
D13 6 D3 Q3 7
D12 11 10 TP1 E1 Q1 11 D DGND
D4 Q4 4 CLK U7
Ê Ê ÊÊ Ê
D11 13 U1 12
D5 Q5 TP2 E2 74HC75 –MCS0 1 4
6
9
8
12
11
D10 14 D6 74HC174 Q6 15
TP3 E3 7 D2 Q2 9 –PCS6 2 U14
3 –186DPCS 5 U14 10 U14 13 U14
Ê Ê Ê Ê
+5V 4 +5V
TP4 E4 DGND Q2 8 –LBHE 6 74HC08 +5V 74HC08 74HC08 74HC08
–PCS0 12 1 CLR D –LCS 5 U11 –HBYTE
–WR 9 C4 DGND D
Ê Ê Ê
–WR 13 U11 11 9 CLK TP5 E5 U11 8 –320MBINT
GND 1 C19 –PCS1 10
3 .047 DGND
8
A0 2 U11 –LBYTE
D
DGND D DGNDD
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM, Figure 7-13. MOD/DEMOD Assembly A3A2

10284–2421 B
1 OF 2 Schematic Diagram
(10284-2421 Rev. B)
(Sheet 1 of 2)
7-57/7-58
RF-5720
+5V J2 1 J2 64
L1
150UH J2 J2 D
Ê Ê
2 63
R11 R14 DGND
C17 C18 100 100
Ê Ê
–POR J2 3 1PT2MHZ J2 62
10 .047
R12 R15
100 100
–HOPCLK J2 4 9PT6MHZ J2 61
D D
Ê Ê
R13 R16
DGND DGND
100 100
HSSBTX J2 5 FRAMECLK J2 60
Ê 320A0 J2
Ê 320A1 J2
Ê Ê
6 59
320A2 J2 7 320A3 J2 58
Ê Ê
320A4 J2 8 320A5 J2 57
Ê 320A6 J2 9
Ê 320A7 J2 56
Ê Ê Ê Ê
Ê Ê Ê Ê
320A8 J2 10 320A9 J2 55 A3 J1 1 +5V J1 40
Ê Ê
320A10 J2 11 320D0 J2 54 +5V J1 2 –POR J1 39
Ê Ê
A1 J1 3 AICCLK J1 38
320D1 J2 12 320D2 J2 53
Ê Ê Ê Ê
A2 J1 4 –BUSYL J1 37
320D3 J2 320D4 J2
Ê Ê Ê Ê
13 52
A4 J1 5 FRAMECLK J1 36
Ê Ê Ê Ê
320D5 J2 14 320D6 J2 51
A0 J1 6 19PT2MHZ J1 35
Ê Ê
320D7 J2 15 320D8 J2 50 D4 J1 7 –FECREQ J1 34
Ê 320D9 J2 16
Ê 320D10 J2 49
Ê
D5 J1 8
ÊHSSBRX J1 33
Ê 320D11 J2
Ê 320D12 J2
Ê
D3 J1 9
Ê9PT6MHZ J1 32
Ê Ê Ê Ê
17 48
A5 J1 –HOPCLK J1
Ê Ê
10 31
320D13 J2 18 320D14 J2 47
D2 J1 1PT2MHZ J1
Ê Ê Ê Ê
11 30
320D15 J2 19 –BUSY186 J2 46
A6 J1 HSSBTX J1
Ê Ê Ê Ê
12 29
SAMPLECLK J2 20 19PT2MHZ J2 45
Ê Ê
D1 J1
Ê
13 –WR J1 28
Ê Ê Ê Ê
J2 21 –320MBINT J2 44 D0 J1 14 –FECCS J1 27
Ê Ê
A7 J1 15 –RD J1 26
–320DPCS J2 22 RORW J2 43
Ê Ê Ê
D6 J1 16 SAMPLECLK J1 25
–RD J2 23 J2 42
Ê Ê Ê Ê
A10 J1 17 –186T0 J1 24
AICCLK J2 –OEHIGH J2
Ê Ê Ê Ê
24 41
A9 J1 18 –RST186 J1 23
–UCSOUT J2 25 –UCSIN J2 40 A8 J1 19 D7 J1 22
Ê
–OELOW J2 26 J2 39 J1 20 J1 21
ÊA16OUT J2 27
Ê A16IN J2 38
Ê Ê
R17
100 D
HSSBRX J2 28 –RSTFFT J2 37
DGND
J2 29 J2 36
Ê –DPINT J2
J2
30
31
Ê –FFTREQ J2
J2
35
34
Figure 7-13. MOD/DEMOD Assembly A3A2
Schematic Diagram
(10284-2421 Rev. B)
10284–2421 B
J2 32 J2 33 2 OF 2 (Sheet 2 of 2)
7-59/7-60
RF-5720

5. R6, R7, CR7 AND C1 INSTALLED AS FOLLOWS.
U4 R6 R7 CR7 C1
27C512 INSTALLED NOT NOT NOT

INSTALLED INSTALLED INSTALLED
27C256 NOT INSTALLED INSTALLED INSTALLED

INSTALLED
C10
10 D[0:7]
186D[0:15]
+5V C8
.047 +5V C13 C14 C15
.047 +5V +5V +5V C17
Ê
.047 .047 .047
40 D DGND
20 D DGND 28 DDGND 28 D DGND
19 XIN VCC 39 D0 48 D DGND
9PT6MHZ AD0 D0 2 VCC 19 A0
18 XOUT 38 D1 D1 Q1 D0 11 D0 VCC A0 10 A0 D0 11 D0 A0 VCC 10 A0 D0 25 VCC 16 186D0
Ê
AD1 D1 3 D2 Q2 18 A1 D1 12 9 A1 D1 12 9 A1 D0R D0L
4 R3 AD2 37 D2 D2 4 17 A2 D1 A1 D1 A1 D1 26 D1R D1L 17 186D1
–POR 6 4.7K 9 RE 36 D3 D3 Q3 D2 13 D2 A2 8 A2 D2 13 D2 A2 8 A2 D2 27 18 186D2
Ê
R2 5 U7 AD3
35 D4
D3 5 D4 Q4 16 A3 D3 15 D3 A3 7 A3 D3 15 D3 A3 7 A3 D3 28
D2R D2L
19 186D3
470K POR AD4 D4 6 D5 Q5 15 A4 +5V D4 16 6 A4 D4 16 6 A4 D3R D3L
74HC00 1 34 D5 U3 D4 A4 D4 A4 D4 29 20 186D4
FRAMECLK P1.0 AD5 D5 7 14 A5 D4R D4L
Ê
E1 2 33 D6 D6 Q6 D5 17 D5 A5 5 A5 D5 17 D5 A5 5 A5 D5 30 21 186D5
P1.1 AD6 D6 8 D7 74HC573 Q7 13 A6 D5R D5L +5V +5V
DGND D 3 32 D7 CR2 D6 18 D6 A6 4 A6 D6 18 D6 A6 4 A6 D6 31 22 186D6
P1.2 AD7 D7 9 12 A7 D6R D6L
Ê Ê Ê Ê
4 U2 D8 Q8 D7 19 D7 A7 3 A7 D7 19 D7 A7 3 A7 D7 32 23 186D7 R19 R20
PLLCLK P1.3 U4 U5 D7R U8 D7L
E2 5 80C31 A8 25 A8 A8 25 A8 10K 10K
VALID P1.4 POR 1 EN R7 7130
Ê Ê Ê Ê
27C256 A9 24 A9 HM65256 A9 24 A9
PLLDATA 6 P1.5 ALE 30 11 LE 100 –BUSYR 45 BUSYR BUSYL 3 –186BUSY
7 A10 21 A10 A10 21 A10
+5V +5V PLLSTB P1.6 PSEN 29 –DINT0 44 INTR INTL 4 –FECREQ
Ê Ê Ê Ê
8 GND R6 A11 23 A11 A11 23 A11 46 R/WR
–RST186 P1.7 +5V 10 A15 10 1 VPP 2 A12 2 A12 –8031WR R/WL 2 –186WR
R17 R18 A12 A12 –8031RD 43 OER OEL 5 –186RD
26 A13 –8031WR 27 WR 26 A13
Ê Ê Ê
10K 10K 10 21 A8 C1 A13 A13 47 CER
RXD RXD A8 D DGND .047 22 OE 27 A14 –8031RD 22 OE 1 A14 –CER CEL 1 –FECCS
TXD 11 TXD A9 22 A9 R1 DGND A14 A14
10K 20 CE A15 20 CE
Ê
–DINT0 12 INT0 A10 23 A10 CR1 A0 42 A0R A0L 6 186A1
13 24 A11 D GND GND A1 41 7 186A2
–186T0 INT1 A11 A1R A1L
Ê
14 T0 A12 25 A12 14 14 A2 40 A2R A2L 8 186A3
15 T1 A13 26 A13 A3 39 A3R A3L 9 186A4
+5V SAMPLECLK D
Ê
–8031WR 16 WR A14 27 A14 R8 DDGND DGND A4 38 A4R A4L 10 186A5
17 28 A15 47K A5 37 11 186A6
–8031RD RD A15 A5R A5L
A6 36 12 186A7
Ê
R4 R5 A6R A6L
2.2K 10K 31 EA A7 35 A7R A7L 13 186A8
D DGND A8 34 14 186A9
GND A8R A8L
20 A[0:15] A9 33 A9R A9L 15 186A10
–HOPCLK
ÊÊÊÊ
GND
DDGND A14 A15 24 186A[0:15]
+5V 100
Q1 C2
Ê
2N2222A R12 10
1 DDGND
3
D 2 U7 –CER
Ê
4 C7 C6 D DGND +5V
DGND .047 .047
VCC 74HC00
1 OSCIN RFOUT 14 16
Ê
1PT2MHZ +5V C20
2 OSCOUT VDD .047 4
C18 13 DGND DDGND D 14 SIG–IN CMP1 2
PRE
Ê
+5V .047 FR DGND D 3 CMP–IN CMP2 13 2D
8 FIN LD 7 R11 9 1 D DGND –CER 9 Q5 VALID
5 2.7K VCO–IN PULS 8 3 CLK
PDOUT 6 U7
Ê Ê Ê Ê
DDGND 16 CX1 U9 10
U10 0R C5 C4 C3 7 CX274HC4046 U6 Q 6
15 .047 .047 100PF 11 74HC00
0V 4 12 74HC74 CLR
Ê
19PT2MHZ 1 CLK Q1 3 145158 RX1 VCO–O
9PT6MHZ 11 EN FV 3 11
U11
Q2 4 PLLSTB
10 DATA
12 RX2 DEMD 10 13 U7 AICCLK
1
PLLDATA DGND DDGND D 5 15 +5V R9 +5V C21
Ê
74HC393 Q3 5 INH ZENR 74HC00 .047
PLLCLK 9 CLK MODCTRL 12 4.7K
2 CLR Q4 6 1PT2MHZ GND
GND
Ê
R10 8 D
6 10K DGND
DGND D D 1% D –BUSYR
DGND DGND
DGND D
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM,
RF–5466 FEC PWB
Figure 7-16. A3A2A1 FEC PWB Assembly
Schematic Diagram
10284–2431 B (10284-2431 Rev. B)
1 OF 2
(Sheet 1 of 2)
7-65/7-66
RF-5720
Ê
Ê Ê
186A3 J1 1 J1 40
L2
150UH J1 J1
+5V 2 –POR 39
Ê Ê
C23 C22
.047 10 186A1 J1 3 AICCLK J1 38
Ê Ê
Ê Ê
D D 186A2 J1 4 –186BUSY J1 37
DGND DGND
186A4 J1 5 FRAMECLK J1 36
186A0
Ê J1 6 19PT2MHZ
Ê J1 35
Ê Ê
Ê Ê
186D4 J1 7 –FECREQ J1 34
186D5 J1 8 RXD J1 33
186D3
Ê J1 9 9PT6MHZ
Ê J1 32
186A5
Ê J1 10 –HOPCLK
Ê J1 31
Ê Ê
186D2 J1 11 1PT2MHZ J1 30
186A6
Ê J1 12 TXD
Ê J1 29
186D1
Ê J1 13 –186WR
Ê J1 28
Ê Ê
186D0 J1 14 –FECCS J1 27
186A7
Ê J1 15 –186RD
Ê J1 26
186D6
Ê J1 16 SAMPLECLK
Ê J1 25
Ê Ê
186A10 J1 17 –186T0 J1 24
Ê J1 18
Ê J1 23
Ê Ê
186A9 –RST186
186A8 J1 19 186D7 J1 22
J1 20 J1 21
D
DGND D DGND
10284–2431 B
2 OF 2
Figure 7-16. A3A2A1 FEC PWB Assembly

Schematic Diagram
(10284-2431 Rev. B)
(Sheet 2 of 2)
7-67/7-68
RF-5720

R2 D[0:7]
9.6MHZ P1 100
CLK 17
+5V C4 R31 DATA
C2 .047 10 C5
R29 +5V R32
.047 10 .047 100
R7 +5V C29 +5V D0 P1
10K C3 R30 22 25 CD0
R3 C30 .047 10
10K Q1 22 +5V
18 P1 D1 P1
POR 2N2222A D D 26 CD1
D 28 28
D 20
40 D0 11 VCC 10 A0 D0 11 VCC 10 A0
R4 D0 3 VCC 2 A0 D0 A0 D0 A0 D2 P1 27 CD2
100 VCC D1 Q1 D1 12 9 A1 D1 12 9 A1
Ê
SPARE_IO 31 J1 19 XIN AD0 39 D0 D1 4 5 A1 D1 A1 D1 A1
D2 Q2 D2 13 D2 A2 8 A2 D2 13 D2 A2 8 A2
C_NOT_P D NC 18 XOUT AD1 38 D1 D2 7 D3 Q3 6 A2 D3 15 7 A3 D3 15 7 A3 D3 P1
R18 37 D2 D3 A3 D3 A3 28 CD3
Ê
(SH 3) 4.7K AD2 D3 8 D4 Q4 9 A3 D4 16 6 A4 D4 16 6 A4
9 RE AD3 36 D3 D4 13 12 A4 D4 A4 D4 A4
C_P_NOT 35 D4 D5 Q5 D5 17 D5 A5 5 A5 D5 17 D5 A5 5 A5
Ê
AD4 D5 14 U2 15 A5 D4 P1
(SH 3) 1 34 D5 D6 Q6 D6 18 D6 A6 4 A6 D6 18 D6 A6 4 A6 29 CD4
P1.0 AD5 D6 17 74HC373 16 A6
2 33 D6 D7 Q7 D7 19 D7 A7 3 A7 D7 19 D7 A7 3 A7
Ê
PT_DET P1.1 AD6 D7 18 D8 Q8 19 A7 U3 25 A8 U4 25 A8
(SH 3) 3 P1.2 AD7 32 D7 A8 A8 D5 P1 30 CD5
U1 27C256 A9 24 A9 6264 A9 24 A9
4 P1.3 1 EN
5 80C31 A10 21 A10 A10 21 A10
DATAPOL P1.4 11 LE 23 A11 23 A11 D6 P1
(SH 2) 6 ALE 30 A11 A11 31 CD6
Ê
P1.5 GND 2 A12 27 2 A12
7 P1.6 PSEN 29 A12 WR A12
TX_TONE_EN 8 10 A13 26 A13 22 OE
(SH 3) P1.7 D7 P1
Ê
+5V 22 OE A14 27 A14 A13 26 CS 32 CD7
RTSA_IN D 20 1 A15 20
(SH 2) 10 RXD A8 21 A8 CE A15 JMP1 CE NC 1 A14
R5 11 TXD A9 22 A9 R9 GND A15 GND

100 12 23 A10 10K 14 14
HSSB 48 P1 INT0 A10 R10
+5V 13 INT1 A11 24 A11 CR1 47K C1 R11 CR2
14 25 A12 1N6263 .047 100 1N4454 D
T0 A12 +5V
R40 15 T1 A13 26 A13
10K 16 27 A14 D
R6 WR A14 A[0:7]
P1 100 17 RD A15 28 A15 LOW ADDR
FRAME CLK 16 A[8:15]
+5V 31 EA
GND
Ê
R39 20
10K C7 R34 A8 P1
.047 100 63 CA8
R1 +5V
DU_INT 1K
(SH 2) +5V A9 P1
D 64 CA7
Ê
20
D VCC
R38 D0 3 2
Ê
10K D1 Q1 TX_MUTE
D1 4 D2 Q2 5 RX_MUTE
40 P1 D2 7 D3 Q3 6 TONE_ON
Ê
CUINT D3 8 9 (SH 3)
+5V C6 R33 D4 Q4 PT_DET_RESET
.047 100 D4 13 D5 Q5 12 C_P_NOT
+5V D5 14 U6 15
R37 D6 Q6 C_NOT_P
D6 17 D7 74HC373 Q7 16
10K D
16 D7 18 D8 Q8 19 R17
41 P1 100
CDPINT C8 VCC
Ê
R35 A13 1A Y0 15 +5V 1 EN J1 18 TX KEYLINE
.047 100
+5V A14 2B Y1 14 11 LE
A15 3C 13 NC
RD Y2 R13
D U5 12 12 GND 100
WR 14 Y3 U7 11 10 J1
74HC138 Y4 11 13 30 RADIO_RX_EN
(SH 2) 9
U7 8 6 EN1 Y5 10
P1 10 74HC86 D
CRORW 59 4 EN2A 9
Ê
Y6
+5V 74HC86 7 5 EN2B 7
Y7
D GND DU_CS (SH 2)
R12 8
10K
P1 P1 61
ATE IN 34 D CUCS
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM, P1 58 CDPCS

INTERFACE PWB
10284–2611 C Figure 7-19. Interface Assembly A5

1 OF 4
Schematic Diagram
(10284-2611 Rev. C)
(Sheet 1 of 4)
7-75/7-76
RF-5720
D[0:7]
DATA
A[0:7]
LO ADDR
Ê TXC_IN
Ê
(SH 3)
1 P1 A0
CA0
DATAPOL
R55
(SH 1)
P1 A1 100
CA1 2 R54 +12V 74HC86
100
+5V C14 R43
.047 C18 2
R53 3 U7 100
3 P1 A2 C10 .047 J1 16
CA2 100 1 ASYNC TXD
.047 +5V
16 D
CA3 4 P1 A3 A
VCC 9
U9 74HC86
R42
D MC145406 VCC 4
V+ 1 D0 40 D0 RXA 13
6
100
J1
P1 A4 U7 9 ASYNC RXD
CA4 5 3 14 D1 1 D1 15 5
NC D TXA
D2 39 D2 RXB 27
5 D 12 D3 2 D3 TXB 25
6 P1 A5
CA5
D4 38 D4 C17
7 10 D5 3 D5 27PF
D
7 P1 A6 D6 37 D6
CA6
2 R 15 D7 4 D7 U10 Y1
3.6864MHZ C16
Z85C30 27PF
15 P1 A7
CA7 4 R 13 20 PCLK SYNCA 11
NC D
D
12 RTXCA REQA 10
NC
6 R 11 R56 +5V 14 TRXCA DTRA 16 R44
NC NC
100 100
V– 8 –12V 28 RTXCB RTSA 17 J1 15 CTSA OUT
Ê
26 TRXCB CTSA 18 +5V
GND C12
R59
.047 DCDA 19
J1 100 9
CTS SYNC 11 5 RTSA_IN
INT R104 R101
D (SH 1)
8 INTACK 10K
R57 10 R62
D A
SYNC RXD J1 100 7 IENIN 100 J1
12 17 RTSA IN
6 IENOUT
NC
R58 SYNCB 29
100
SYNC TXD 13 J1 A0 32 D/C REQB 30 R63
NC
100
A1 34 A/B DTRB 24 J1 19 RLSD
R60
SYNC_CLK_OUT 35 WR RTSB 23
100 +5V
40 J1
36 RD CTSB 22
33 CE DCDB 21
R102
GND 10K
R64
R61 31 100
J1 4
100 PTT
47 P1
1.2MHZ CLK
D
+5V
DU_INT
Ê
Ê
R103
10K
WR
Ê
P1 50 CDP BUSY
RD
DU_CS
62 P1 J1 1
FILL DET FILL DET
37 P1 J1 2
ZEROIZE ZEROIZE
39 P1 J1 35
FILL DATA FILL DATA
FILL CLK 38 P1 J1 34 FILL CLK
21 P1 J1 33
MUX OVRD MUX OVRD
20 P1 J1 32
REQ REQ
10284–2611 C
2 OF 4

Schematic Diagram
(10284-2611 Rev. C)
(Sheet 2 of 4)
7-77/7-78
RF-5720
RADIO TX J1
AUDIO (TO FP) 6
+5V +5V
P1 HANDSET TX (FR COMSEC)

LPC TX AUDIO 52 P1 R91 R92 33 AUDIO IN
270K 10K C23
Ê
R78 R81
27K .047 100
PT_DET_RESET 2 +5V
(SH 1) U14 1 JMP2
3 D 12
HANDSET TX VCC HANDSET TX (TO COMSEC)
C21 LM2903 P1
.01 CR3 R77 CT 35 AUDIO OUT
1N4454 56K 3 A A–OFF 2
14 B B–ON 15 PT
11 C C–ON 10 P1 14
A R76 FP PWR ON
56K 6 D D–OFF 7 J1 3
Ê
1 U11
A CTLA P1
16 DG–413 R86 51
CTLB 100 RMT PWR ON
9 CTLC V+ 13 +12V R72 J1
PT_DET 8 21
(SH 1) CTLD V– 4 C26 22.1K
GND .047
5
AUDIO IN 5 J1 A R87
D 100
C_NOT_P –12V
Ê
C27
.047
(SH 1) A
Ê
R79
TX_TONE_EN 10
Ê
(SH 1)
TX_MUTE R97
39K
(SH 1)
Ê
R75 TL062
100K TL062
TONE_ON 2 CR4
R74 1 1N4454 6 C35 R68 R69 R82
100K U13 .01 15K 15K 15K
+12V 3 8 U13 7
4 C34 5
R89 .01 R98 C19
R70 100 22K .01
HANDSET RX 150K +12V
C31 A
8 J1 .047 A
AUDIO OUT –12V
C22 R80
.047 100 A R99
+5V 18K
R90
100 P1 49 HOP CLK
D 12 –12V A
VCC C32
.047
3 A A–OFF 2 J1
14 B B–ON 15 39 SYNC_CLK_IN
A JMP3
CT 11 C C–ON 10 R71
A PT 6 D D–OFF 7 22.1K
1 U12
LPC RX P1 CTLA R73
13 16 DG–413 4.7K
AUDIO CTLB
9 CTLC V+ 13
8 CTLD V– 4 A
RADIO RX 7 J1
Ê
AUDIO IN GND
5
RX_MUTE D R84 R83

(SH 1) 100 100
Ê
–12V +12V
C24
C_P_NOT C25 .047
Ê
(SH 1) .047
A A
TXC_IN
(SH 2)
10284–2611 C
3 OF 4 Schematic Diagram
(10284-2611 Rev. C)
(Sheet 3 of 4)
7-79/7-80
RF-5720
P1
22
P1 +5V
43 P1
8
+5V
J1 P1
22 11
J1 C33 R93 P1
23 .047 19
100
C28 +
+5V
22 P1
24
P1
23
6 8 P1
36
P1 7
42 U14 NC
P1
5 44
J1 4
24 D LM2903
P1
DGND 45
J1
25
P1
46
A
J1 NC
37
P1
54
J1
38
P1
57
P1
60
P1
10
+12V
P1 J1
+12V 55 10
J1 J1
28 14
J1
20
J1
36
P1
9
P1
56
AGND
J1
26 A
J1
27
P1
12
–12V
–12V P1
53
J1
29
10284–2611 C
4 OF 4
Schematic Diagram
(10284-2611 Rev. C)
(Sheet 4 of 4)
7-81/7-82
RF-5720

NOTE: R17, R18, CR6 AND C11
1. PARTIAL REFERENCE DESIGNATIONS ARE SHOWN. 4. VENDOR PART NO. CALLOUTS ARE FOR REFERENCE ONLY. ISTALLED AS FOLLOWS.
FOR A COMPLETE DESIGNATION, PREFIX WITH COMPONENTS ARE SUPPLIED PER PART NO. IN PARTS LIST.
UNIT NO. AND/OR ASSEMBLY NO. DESIGNATION. U3 R17 R18 CR6 C11
5. C1 AND C17 ARE INSTALLED FOR NOISE SUPPRESSION ONLY. NOT NOT NOT
2. ALL RESISTOR VALUES ARE IN OHMS, 1/4W, +/–5%. 27C512 INSTALLED INSTALLED INSTALLED INSTALLED
3. ALL CAPACITOR VALUES ARE IN MICROFARADS. 27C256 NOT
INSTALLED INSTALLED INSTALLED INSTALLED
R1
9.6MHZ P1 100
CLK 24 CR3
D[0:7] 1N4454
R2 +5V
P1 10 5 U9 B
POR 25 6 74HC00
+5V 4 C10
C9 .01 C12 CR4 R20
R3 4 TP2 .01 1N4454 JMP3 1K
10 U8 B C8 .01 +5V
FP DATA 4 J1 6 .01 +5V
CLK 5 74HC08
+5V D D
R24 CR1 D 28 28 BT1
10K 1N6263 D 20 3.5V
VCC
+5V 40 D0 11 VCC 10 A0 D0 11 10 A0
D0 2 VCC 19 A0 D0 A0 D0 A0
R25 19 XIN VCC 39 D0 D1 Q1 D1 12 D1 A1 9 A1 D1 12 D1 A1 9 A1 D
J1 100 AD0 D1 3 D2 Q2 18 A1 D2 13 8 A2 D2 13 8 A2
TEST IN 14 NC 18 XOUT AD1 38 D1 D2 4 17 A2 D2 A2 D2 A2
C21 R23 37 D2 D3 Q3 D3 15 D3 A3 7 A3 D3 15 D3 A3 7 A3 +5V
.001 4.7K AD2 D3 5 D4 Q4 16 A3 D4 16 6 A4 D4 16 6 A4
9 RE AD3 36 D3 D4 6 15 A4 D4 A4 D4 A4
U1 D5 Q5 D5 17 5 A5 D5 17 5 A5 P1
A 80C51FA AD4 35 D4 D5 7 U2 14 A5 D5 A5 D5 A5 2 +5V
R4 1 34 D5 D6 Q6 D6 18 D6 A6 4 A6 D6 18 D6 A6 4 A6
100 P1.0 AD5 D6 8 74HC573 13 A6
FP DATA IN 2 J1 2 33 D6 D7 Q7 D7 19 D7 A7 3 A7 D7 19 D7 A7 3 A7 P1
P1.1 AD6 D7 9 D8 Q8 12 A7 U3 25 A8 U4 25 A8 29 +5V
C2 3 P1.2 AD7 32 D7 A8 A8
.001 +5V TP3 TP4 27C512 24 A9 6264 24 A9 +
U8 C 4 P1.3 1 EN A9 A9 C16
A 74HC08 5 A10 21 A10 A10 21 A10 22
R5 9 P1.4 11 LE 23 A11 23 A11
J1 100 8 6 P1.5 ALE 30 A11 A11
LCD DATA 3 10 7 GND A12 2 A12 27 WR A12 2 A12 P1 1
OUT C3 P1.6 PSEN 29 10 26 A13 22
DGND
.001 8 P1.7 A13 OE
+5V 22 OE A14 27 A14 26 CS P1
A D 20 1 A15 20 30 DGND
R6 10 RXD A8 21 A8 CE A15 R17 CE NC 1 A14
J1 100 11 22 A9 GND 10 A15 GND D
LCD BUSY 6 TXD A9 A10 R15
C4 12 INT0 A10 23 1K R16 14 14
.001 13 INT1 A11 24 A11 CR2 47K C11 R18 CR6
14 25 A12 1N6263 .047 100 1N4454 D P1
A R7 T0 A12 +5V 15 AGND
100 15 T1 A13 26 A13 P1 16 AGND
HSSB 7 P1 16 27 A14 D
WR A14 A[0:7]
17 28 A15 A
R8 RD A15 A[8:15]
P1 100
HOP CLK 8 31 R14
EA 100
R26 GND J1
10K 10 MODEM/PT
+5V 20 C15
U9 A U9 D .01
R27 74HC00 C20
A13 1 74HC00 +5V .001
J1 100 3 12
PT SENSE 9 2 11 D
C22 D 13 A
.001 20
7 R29
A +5V D0 2 D1 VCC Q1 19 100
+5V D1 3 18 J1
+5V C7 D D2 Q2 13 LIGHT
.01 D2 4 17 NC
D3 Q3
R28 D3 5 D4 Q4 16 NC C23
R9 4 D +5V 470K D4 6 15 .001
10K D5 Q5
+5V C14 D5 7 U7 14
14 J Q 12 .01 D6 Q6
R10 16 D D6 8 74HC573 13 A
NEW KEYBD J1 100 1 CLK C13 D7 Q7
7 +5V 10 I–PULS VDD 9 .01 D D7 9 D8 Q8 12
DATA AVAIL C19 Q1 NC U8 A
C5 3 K Q 13 74HC08
.001 .01 Q4 7 NC 9 14 U9 C R21
CLR U5A 5 D 8 74HC00 1 1 EN 100
A D Q5 NC 10 3 11 LE J1
2 74HC73 D 4 5 LCD STB
Q6 NC A15 2
Q7 6 NC GND
+5V 14 U6
12 Q8 13 NC 10
11 4020 12
+5V 13 Q9 NC CR5
R11 U5B U8 D 14 1N6263 D
10K 74HC73 7 74HC08 Q10 NC
Q11 15 NC
7 J Q9
R12 D Q12 1 NC R22
NEW MODE 100 TP1
8 J1 5 CLK Q13 2 R19 100
NC JMP2 10K J1 FP READ
DATA AVAIL 11 RE 3 1
C6 10 K Q 8 Q14 STB
.001 GND
D CLR C18
A 8 D .001
6 11
D D A
R13
1.2mHz P1 100
CLK 6
Figure 7-22. A6 Front Panel Controller
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM,
FRONT PANEL CTLR PWB Assembly Schematic
Diagram
10284–2701
1 OF 1
A (10284-2701 Rev. A)
7-87/7-88
RF-5720
PARTS LISTS AND SCHEMTICS
COMPONENTS ARE SUPPLIED PER PART NO. IN PARTS LIST. RAD_MDMRX_AUD_TO_FFT (SH 5)
RAD_TX_AUD_FM_INT (SH 5)
RAD_MDMTX_AUD_FM_FFT (SH 5)
C5
150PF
+5VB
R6
100K
C1
0.047
Y–27220 R2
T1 100K U1 A
8 TL062 12 D BLK
(SH 5) RX_AUD+ 1 5 2
VCC
NC 2 6 NC 1
(SH 5) RX_AUD– 3 7 R4 3 16 A1 A–ON 1 NC
4 620 4 4 A2 A–OFF 3 RAD_RX_AUD_TO_INT (SH 5)
9 B1 B–ON 8
5 B2 B–OFF 6
+5VB
A BLK A BLK A BLK
A BLK U2
DG403DJ
15 CTLA V+ 11 +12VB
10 CTLB V– 14 –12VB
R54 GND R89
100 13 C4 C3 10K
+U1DCPL 0.047 0.047
+12VB
D BLK A BLK A BLK
C56 PT_AUDIO–N
0.047 (SH 5)
RADIO_RX_ENABLE (SH 5)
A BLK
R55
100 –U1DCPL
–12VB R7
C55 10K
0.047
BLK A
U1 B
Y–27220 TLO72 D BLK
R5 6
TX_AUD+ T2 620
(SH 5) 5 1 7
NC 6 2 NC 5
TX_AUD– 7 3
(SH 5)
4
A BLK
R1 R3 C65
220K 100K 0.047
A BLK C2
68PF
TX_KEYLINE
(SH 5)
R9 R10
10K 10K TX_KEY–N (SH 5)
Q1
2N2222A
R8 C6
22K 0.047
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM,
FRONT PANEL PWB
10284–2111 A
D BLK
Figure 7-25. A8A1 Front Panel PWB

Assembly Schematic Diagram
(10284-2111 Rev. A)
(Sheet 1 of 5)
7-97/7-98
RF-5720
PTT–N
Ê(SH 5)
Ê
(SH 5) CCD
C68 R31 C26
R56 0.0015 22K 0.47
100 R27 RX_HNDST_AUD_FM_INT (SH 5)
+5VR 10K
R26
C7 3.3K
12 0.047 R92
22K R65
VCC R25 100
D RED 1.8K +5VR
S1
(SH 5) RX_AUD–CCD 16 A1 A–ON 1 NC 1
4 A2 A–OFF 3 2 C18 C17
R24 0.047 0.047
9 B1 B–ON 8 1K 3
(SH 5) PTT–REQ 5 B2 B–OFF 6 4 U7 A D RED
R23 5 TL072 D RED R66
U3 R58 510 2 100
100 6 +12VR
DG403DJ +12VR 13 1
R22 7
15 CTLA V+ 11 COM 3
R57 270 8
+12VR
10 CTLB 100 C15 C16
V– 14 –12VR 9 16 0.047 0.047
GND R21 10
180 VCC
A RED U5 A RED A RED
Ê
13 C8 C9 11
0.047 0.047 VR4 MC145406
R20 12 8.2V V+ 1
D RED A RED A RED 100 10243–7601 3 D 14 REQ–N (SH 5)
R19 CR4 6.8V

C27 HANDSET 1N5711 5 D 12
Ê
82 VR5 R13 R12 R11 NC
0.022 VOLUME 15K 15K 15K
R18 CONTROL D RED D RED 7 D 10 SYNC_CLK_OUT (SH 5)
Ê
R28 68 VR1
620 3.3V CR1
R17 2 R 15 FILL_DATA (SH 5)
Ê
6 51 VR2 CR2 1N4454
3.3V 4 13 FILL_CLK
7 R (SH 5)
Ê
5 VR3 CR3 1N4454
U18 B 3.3V 6 11 MUX_OVRRD (SH 5)
MC33072CP R
A RED 1N4454 V– 8 –12VR
100
+5VR GND R67
9 C13 C14
R61 0.047 0.047
Ê Ê
100
R69
100 +U9DCPL R70 +U7DCPL
+12VR 100
+12VR D RED A RED A RED
C12 C58
Ê
0.047 0.047 C59
12 0.047 SNCLKTOFLT
VCC D RED (SH 5)
RED A
+5VR
16 A1 A–ON 1 RED A
TX_AUD–FILL_DATA 4 A2 A–OFF 3
(SH 5)
9 B1 B–ON 8 NC C29
C38 150PF
5 B2 B–OFF 6 NC 470PF
U4 R60
A RED 100 R35
DG403DJ +12VR R34 R15
27K 100K R14 100K C25 C28 R29
15 CTLA V+ 11 R59 100K 0.047 0.047 10K
Ê
SPARE_SWITCH_CONTROL 10 CTLB 100
(SH 5) V– 14 –12VR U9 B
GND R32 U9 A TL072 D RED D RED FILL_DET (SH 5)
2 TL072 R36
R90 13 10K 6 8
10K C10 C11 1 6 8 R93
0.047 0.047 R33 510 3
7
7 15K
220 5
4 5 U7 B Q3
Ê
4 TL072 2N2222A
D RED A RED D RED A RED A RED R71
Ê
A RED –U7DCPL 100 R94
A RED R68 A RED R16 –12VR 4.7K
100 –U9DCPL C23 C19 27K
–12VR 0.001 0.047
C60
C57 C67 C66 0.047
Ê
0.047 0.047 0.047
D RED D RED A RED RED A A RED
A RED TX_HNDST_AUD_TO_INT (SH 5)
(SH 5) MUX_OVRD
(SH 5) FILL_IA
10284–2111 A
2 OF 5

(10284-2111 Rev. A)
(Sheet 2 of 5)
7-99/7-100
RF-5720
100
+5VR
NEW_KBD_DATA_AVAIL
Ê (SH 5)
C41 C40 R72 +5VR

0.047 0.047 100
R73
C31 C30
D RED D RED 0.047 0.047
20 D RED D RED
Ê
VCC
(SH 5) COL1 12 X1 D0 19
COL2 11 18 16
(SH 5) X2 D1
Ê
VCC
(SH 5) COL3 9 X3 D2 17 11 A Q9 FP_DAT_OUT (SH 5)
(SH 5) COL4 8 X4 D3 16 12 B Q 7 NC
D4 15 13 C FP_DAT_CLK (SH 5)
(SH 5) ROW1 1 Y1 14 D U8A
Ê
ROW2 2 U11 3 4049B
(SH 5) Y2 E 2 3 FP_RD_STB
ROW3 3 74C923 4 (SH 5)
(SH 5) Y3 U8F F
ROW4 4 4049B 5 U10
(SH 5) Y4 G
ROW5 5 74HC165
(SH 5) Y5 DA 13 14 15 6 H
+5VR
6 OSC 1 100
SH/LD R74
7 KBM 15 C37 C36
CLKINH 0.047 0.047
14 OE 2 CLK
C43 C42 GND 10 SER
0.47 4.7 D RED D RED
10 GND
Ê
16
8 VCC
2 A<BIN A<BO 7 NC
D RED D RED D RED D RED D RED 3 A=BIN A=BO 6 NEW_MODE_DAT_AVAIL (SH 5)
4 A>BIN A>BO 5 NC
10 A0
12 A1
13 U13
A2
R76 15 74HC85
100 A3
+5VB +5VR
+5VR 9 B0
R41 R40 R39 R38 R37 C33 C32 C35 C34 100 11
0.047 0.047 R75 B1
10K 10K 10K 10K 10K 0.047 0.047 14 B2
1 B3
D RED D RED D RED D RED
10284–7602 16 16 GND
2 OFF 8
VDD VCC
S2 1 PT 10 D0 Q0 9 4 D1 Q1 2
3 CT 11 D1 Q1 7 5 D2 Q2 7
13 4 LD 12
COM D2 Q2 6 12 D3 Q3 10 D RED
5 RMT 13 D3 13 D4 Q4 15 NC
D BLK 6 Z 1 U12 U14
NON SHORT D4
2 74HC148 74HC175
D5 Q1 3 NC
3 D6 Q2 6 NC
4 D7 1 CLR Q3 11 NC
R42
PLAIN_TEXT–N 10 GSEL 14 NC 9 CLK Q4 14 NC
(SH 5) 5 EN–I EN–O 15 NC GND
GND 8
8
(SH 5) ZEROIZE D RED
D RED
10284–7602
NC 8
Ê
7 S2
9 R43
14 33K FP_PWR_ON–N
10 (SH 5)
COM
11 C39
0.047
12
SHORTING
A BLK A RED
10284–2111 A
3 OF 5

(10284-2111 Rev. A)
(Sheet 3 of 5)
7-101/7-102
RF-5720
Ê
Ê
R77 FP_DAT_IN (SH 5)
100 FP_DAT_CLK (SH 5)
+5VR
C52 C51
0.047 0.047
D RED D RED
(SH 5)
Ê
RS 14 R79 R80
Ê
RD_WR–N VCC 100 100
(SH 5) 3 Q1 INA 1 +5VR +12VR
R46 4 INB 2
Ê
1K Q2 C46 C45
(SH 5) DIS_D0 5 Q3 0.047 0.047 C48 C47
R47 6 U16 0.047 0.047
Ê
1K Q4
DIS_D1 10 74HC164 D RED D RED
(SH 5) Q5 16
R48 11 VCC A RED A RED
Ê Ê Ê
1K Q6 U15
(SH 5) DIS_D2 12 Q7 CLR 9 MC145406
R49 13 CLK 8 V+ 1
Ê Ê Ê
1K Q8 CTSASTOFLT 3 14 CTSASFMI
(SH 5) DIS_D3 GND (SH 5) D (SH 5)
R50
Ê Ê Ê
1K 7 RXDASTOFLT 5 12 RXDASFMI
(SH 5) DIS_D4 (SH 5) D (SH 5)
R51 D RED
Ê Ê Ê
DIS_D5 1K (SH 5) RLSDTOFLT 7 D 10 RLSDFMI (SH 5)
(SH 5)
Ê Ê Ê
DIS_D6 (SH 5) RTSASFMFLT 2 R 15 RTSASTOI (SH 5)
(SH 5)
Ê Ê Ê
DIS_D7 (SH 5) TXDASFMFLT 4 R 13 TXDASTOI (SH 5)
(SH 5)
Ê
+VLIGHT R78 (SH 5) CLK_IN 6 R 11 SYNC_CLK_IN (SH 5)
(SH 5) 100
+5VR V– 8
100
(SH 5) VO GND R81
C54 C53 +5VR 9 C50 C49
0.047 0.047
–12VR
0.047 0.047
D RED A RED A RED
Ê
D RED D RED
5 4 9 1 10 LCD_BUSY (SH 5)
8 U8D
U8B 4049B
4049B
R44 14
1K VCC
3 INA 1
Ê
Q1
4 Q2 INB 2
1K RED D
R45 NC 5 Q3 LIGHT_ON–N
U17 (SH 5)
NC 6 Q4
74HC164
NC 10 Q5
Ê
+5VR NC 11 Q6 R88
C44 R52 NC 12 Q7 CLR 9 +12VR
100 +U18DCPL
0.047 4.7K NC 13 Q8 CLK 8
C63
GND 0.047
Q2 7
RED D 2N2907A
RED A R84
R53 RED D 121K
2.2K
1%
R85 R86
8 2 47.5K 1.2K
+12VR
1 1%
U18A 3 +12VR
MC33072CP 4 R82 C62
1.1K 0.047
Ê
R83
15K
R87
100 –U18DCPL A RED
–12VR
TEMPERATURE VR8 C61

C64 LM135H
0.047 SENSOR 0.047
3V AT 25C
RED A A RED A RED
10284–2111 A
4 OF 5

(10284-2111 Rev. A)
(Sheet 4 of 5)
7-103/7-104
RF-5720
(SH 4)
Ê
CTSASTOFLT J4 1
Ê
(SH 5) RMT_PWR_ON–N J4 2
Ê Ê
(SH 4) RXDSNTOFLT J4 3
(SH 4) TXDSNFMFLT J4 4
Ê Ê Ê
(SH 3) COL1 J5 1 (SH 4) RTSASFMFLT J4 5 FILL_DET P2
(SH 2) 1
Ê Ê Ê
COL2 J5 (SH 2) SNCLKTOFLT J4 6 ZEROIZE P2
(SH 3) 2 (SH 3) 2
(SH 4) RLSDTOFLT J4 7 FP_PWR_ON–N P2
L2
Ê Ê Ê
(SH 3) COL3 J5 3 (SH 3) 3
50UH J4 8 (SH 2) PTT–N P2 4
COL4 J5
Ê Ê
(SH 3) 4 D RED (SH 4) TXDASFMFLT J4 9 TX_HNDST_AUD_TO_INT P2
(SH 2) 5
NC J5 5 (SH 4) CTSSNTOFLT J4 10 TO FILTER PWB RAD_TX_AUD_FM_INT P2
Ê Ê Ê
TO KEYPAD ASSY. (SH 1) 6
ROW1 J5 (SH 4) CLK_IN J4 11 (10284–2120) RAD_RX_AUD_TO_INT P2
(SH 3) 6 (SH 1) 7
Ê Ê Ê
(SH 4) RXDASTOFLT J4 12 RX_HNDST_AUD_FM_INT P2
ROW2 J5 L1 (SH 2) 8
(SH 3) 7 50UH J4 13 RXDASFMI P2
Ê Ê Ê Ê
ROW3 J5 (SH 4) 9
(SH 3) 8 (SH 2) RX_AUD–CCD J4 14
A RED NC P2 10
Ê Ê Ê
(SH 3) ROW4 J5 9 (SH 2) PTT–REQ J4 15 CTSSNTOFLT P2
(SH 4) 11
ROW5 J5 (SH 2) TX_AUD–FILL_DATA J4 16 RXDSNTOFLT P2
Ê Ê Ê
(SH 3) 10 (SH 4) 12
(SH 2) FILL_IA J4 17 TXDSNFMFLT P2
(SH 4) 13
Ê
(SH 4) MUX_OVRD J4 18
J6 1 NC P2 14
J4 19 CTSASFMI P2
Ê
D RED (SH 4) 15
J4 20 TXDASTOI P2
(SH 4) 16
Ê Ê
+5VR J6 2
(SH 4) RTSASTOI P2 17
(SH 4) VO J6 3 D RED A RED
Ê Ê Ê Ê
(SH 1) TX_KEY–N P2 18
(SH 4) RS J6 4 (SH 1) RAD_MDMTX_AUD_FM_FFT P1 1 RLSDFMI P2
(SH 4) 19
Ê Ê Ê
P1 2
(SH 4) RD_WR–N J6 5 RAD_MDMRX_AUD_TO_FFT P1 NC P2 20
(SH 1) 3 TO INTERFACE PWB
Ê
LCD_STB J6 P1 4 (SH 5) RMT_PWR_ON–N P2 21
(SH 4) 6 P1 (10284–2610)
A BLK +5VB 5 +5VR P2 22
Ê
(SH 4) DIS_D0 J6 7 P1 6
P1 +5VR P2 23
DIS_D1 J6 TO LCD ASSY +12VB 7
Ê
(SH 4) 8 (10284–2130) P1 TO FFT PWB P2 24
+12VB 8 (10284–2430)
(SH 4) DIS_D2 J6 9 P1 D RED P2 25
ÊÊ
–12VB 9
DIS_D3 J6 P1 P2 26
(SH 4) 10 –12VB 10
P1 A RED P2 27
(SH 4) DIS_D4 J6 11 +5VB 11
P1 +12VR P2 28
Ê Ê Ê
DIS_D5 J6 12
(SH 4) 12 –12VR P2 29
NC P1 13
Ê Ê
(SH 4) DIS_D6 J6 13 D BLK (SH 1) RADIO_RX_ENABLE P2 30
NC P1 14
DIS_D7 J6 C20 C21 (SH 2) SPARE_SWITCH_CONTROL P2 31
Ê Ê Ê
(SH 4) 14 4.7 4.7
20V 20V (SH 2) REQ–N P2 32
Ê Ê Ê
+VLIGHT J7 FP_RD_STB P3 (SH 2) MUX_OVRRD P2 33
(SH 4) 1 (SH 3) 1 A RED A RED
(SH 2) FILL_CLK P2 34
Ê Ê
NC J7 2 (SH 3) FP_DAT_OUT P3 2
J7 FP_DAT_IN P3 (SH 2) FILL_DATA P2 35
3 (SH 4) 3
Ê
FP_DAT_CLK P3 (SH 2) CCD P2 36
D RED (SH 3) 4
JMP1 P2
Ê Ê
(SH 4) LCD_STB P3 5 37
LCD_BUSY P3 P2 38
(NOT INSTALLED) (SH 4) 6
Ê Ê Ê
A BLK J3 1 (PIN_A) SYNC_CLK_IN P2
(SH 3) NEW_KBD_DATA_AVAIL P3 7 TO FP CONTROLLER (SH 4) 39
RX_AUD+ J3 (10284–2700) SYNC_CLK_OUT P2
Ê Ê
(SH 1) 2 (PIN_B) (SH 3) NEW_MODE_DAT_AVAIL P3 8 (SH 2) 40
(SH 1) TX_KEYLINE J3 3 (PIN_C) (SH 3) PLAIN_TEXT–N P3 9
Ê Ê
TX_AUD+ J3 TO HF RADIO (SH 1) PT_AUDIO–N P3 10
(SH 1) 4 (PIN_D) D RED
Ê Ê
RX_AUD– J3 NC P3 11
(SH 1) 5 (PIN_E)
NC P3 12
Ê Ê
(SH 1) TX_AUD– J3 6 (PIN_F) LIGHT_ON–N P3
(SH 4) 13
(RESERVED 2700 TEST INPUT) NC P3 14
10284–2111 A
5 OF 5

(10284-2111 Rev. A)
(Sheet 5 of 5)
7-105/7-106
RF-5720
Figure 7-28. A8A2 Front Panel Filter

PWB Assembly
Schematic Diagram
(10284-2121 Rev. –)
7-109/7-110
RF-5720

P/O HEATSINK ASSY.
COMPONENTS ARE SUPPLIED PER PART NO. IN PARTS LIST. CR1
MUR810
Q1
MJH11018
P/O
HEATSINK
ASSY.
L1
470UH R2
0.27 J1
1
5W
J1
NC 2 10V – 32V
R1 UNREGULATED D.C.
470 J1
C1 2W 3
2,700UF C2
80V CR3 CR4 CR5 J1
1N4454 1N4454 1N4454 1,200UF NC 4
50V
VR1
1N4752
33V
1W
RECTIFIER ASSY. (10091–3060)
A2
VR2
1N4759
CR2 62V
1W
MDA2502
R4
3.3K
1/2W Q2
P1 NC
MJD47–1
J3
P1
P1
P1
P1
NC 6 NC
R3
1
5
J3
NC 5 NC 1 22K
5
J3
J2
J2
J2
J2
J2
+ 4
NC
18–32VDC
INPUT
J3
– 2
10284–6011
(AC GND & DC GND) 1 OF 1
F1
1A
J3
1
DP 241–7–20
56 VA
115V 3 220V:20V
S1 1 T1 5
2
230V 1
LINE INPUT 2
97–133VAC (115 SETTING) 3 6 NC
195–265VAC (230 SETTING)
115V 4
4 7
S1
5
Figure 7-31. Battery Eliminator Assembly
P/O
230V 6 HEATSINK ASSY. Schematic Diagram
3
J3 (10284-6011 Rev. A)
7-115/7-116
RF-5720
APPENDIX A
Figure A-3. Synchronous Modem/DTE

Cable Drawing
(10284-0703 Rev. A)
A-5/A-6
RF-5720
APPENDIX A
Figure A-4. Asynchronous Modem/DTE

Cable Drawing
(10284-0704 Rev. A)
A-7/A-8
RF-5720
APPENDIX A
Figure A-5. PRC-104 Audio Cable

Drawing (10284-0723 Rev. –)
A-9/A-10
RF-5720
APPENDIX A
Figure A-6. Shock Tray Assembly

(10284-0820 Rev. –)
A-11/A-12

RF 5720

Încărcat de

Informații document

Titlu original

Drepturi de autor

Formate disponibile

Partajați acest document

Partajați sau inserați document

Opțiuni de partajare

Vi se pare util acest document?

Este necorespunzător acest conținut?

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

RF 5720

Încărcat de

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

PUBLICATION NUMBER: 10284-0004

Harris Corporation Telephone: (716) 244-5830

WHAT IS NOT COVERED – We regret that we cannot be responsible for:

• Defects or failures caused by buyer or user abuse or misuse.

HARRIS CORPORATION RF COMMUNICATIONS DIVISION

When an Adult Stops Breathing

1 Does the Person

7 Check for Pulse

TABLE OF CONTENTS (Cont.)

SECTION 3 – OPERATION (Cont.)

TABLE OF CONTENTS (Cont.)

SECTION 5 – THEORY OF OPERATION (Cont.)

TABLE OF CONTENTS (Cont.)

SECTION 6 – MAINTENANCE (Cont.)

TABLE OF CONTENTS (Cont.)

SECTION 6 – MAINTENANCE (Cont.)

SECTION 7 – PARTS LISTS AND SCHEMATICS

1-1 RF-5720 HF Modem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1

LIST OF FIGURES (Cont.)

LIST OF FIGURES (Cont.)

LIST OF TABLES (Cont.)

• CAUTION – Used when there is a possibility of damage to equipment

• NOTE – Used to alert personnel to a condition that requires emphasis

2. PERSONNEL AND EQUIPMENT SAFETY

c. Power to the equipment must be removed before a piece of equipment is removed.

1. Shut off power.

2. Call for help.

3. Administer first aid if qualified.

DO NOT SERVICE EQUIPMENT ALONE

TURN OFF POWER AND GROUND CAPACITORS

KEEP AWAY FROM LIVE CIRCUITS

DO NOT BYPASS INTERLOCKS

USE CARE HANDLING HEAVY EQUIPMENT

HEED WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS

5. EXPLANATION OF HAZARD SYMBOLS

FSK-NS: Center = 2805 Hz, Shift 42.5 Hz

FSK-WS: Center = 2000 Hz, Shift 425 Hz

FSK-A: Center = 2000 Hz, Shift 85 Hz

FSK-V: Programmable Mark/Space Frequency;

Receive Tuning: Center frequency tunable in 10 Hz steps up to ±200

Tracking Type: Automatic threshold

RF-5720 MODEM - MECHANICAL,

Weight: 8 lbs. (without battery eliminator)

Shock: MIL-STD-810E, Method 516.4, Procedure I

Vibration: MIL-STD-810E, Method 514.4, Category 10

Humidity: MIL-STD-810E, Method 507.3, Procedure III

Submersion: 3 feet of water

Interface Data: RS-232C

Radio: 600 ohms balanced audio

ABOUT THIS MANUAL

• Section 1 – Introduction: Contains a description of the scope

• Section 2 – Installation: Contains general information,

• Section 3 – Operation: Describes and shows the controls,

• Section 4 – Remote Control: Contains a general

• Section 5 – Theory of Operation: Contains an

ABOUT THIS MANUAL (Cont.)

• Section 6 – Maintenance: Contains an introduction,

• Section 7 – Parts Lists and Schematics: Contains a parts list

• Section A1 provides a parts list, assembly diagram, and a

• Section A3 contains a parts list for A3 Modem Module

• Section A5 provides a parts list, assembly diagram, and a

• Section A6 provides a parts list, assembly diagram, and a

• Section A8 contains a parts list for Front Panel Module